PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Planning PeopleBook
Transcript of PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Planning PeopleBook
PeopleSoft 8.00.01Production Planning PeopleBook
PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Planning PeopleBook
SKU MAPLr8SP1B 1200
PeopleBooks Contributors: Teams from PeopleSoft Product Documentation and
Development.
Copyright © 2001 by PeopleSoft, Inc. All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
All material contained in this documentation is proprietary and confidential to PeopleSoft,
Inc. and is protected by copyright laws. No part of this documentation may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, including, but not
limited to, electronic, graphic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without theprior written permission of PeopleSoft, Inc.
This documentation is subject to change without notice, and PeopleSoft, Inc. does not warrant
that the material contained in this documentation is free of errors. Any errors found in this
document should be reported to PeopleSoft, Inc. in writing.
The copyrighted software that accompanies this documentation is licensed for use only in
strict accordance with the applicable license agreement which should be read carefully as it
governs the terms of use of the software and this documentation, including the disclosure
thereof.
PeopleSoft, the PeopleSoft logo, PeopleTools, PS/nVision, PeopleCode, PeopleBooks, and
Vantive are registered trademarks, and PeopleTalk and "People power the internet." are
trademarks of PeopleSoft, Inc. All other company and product names may be trademarks of
their respective owners.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S i i i
C o n t e n t s
About This PeopleBookBefore You Begin .............................................................................................................. xi
PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals............................................................................... xi
Related Documentation .................................................................................................... xii
Documentation on the Internet ..................................................................................xiii
Documentation on CD-ROM ....................................................................................xiii
PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions.......................................................................... xv
Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues................................................................. xvii
Page and Panel Introductory Table................................................................................xviii
Comments and Suggestions............................................................................................. xix
Chapter 1
Overview of PeopleSoft Production Planning
What Is PeopleSoft Production Planning?....................................................................... 1-1
Traditional MRP Approaches.................................................................................... 1-2
Material Requirements Planning....................................................................... 1-2
Manufacturing Resource Planning.................................................................... 1-2
Enterprise Resource Planning Using PeopleSoft Production Planning..................... 1-3
What PeopleSoft Production Planning Offers You ......................................................... 1-4
Managing Business Processes and Data Flow .......................................................... 1-5
Using Seamless Integration to Create Production Plans ........................................... 1-6
Moving and Balancing the Supply Chain ................................................................. 1-8
Using PeopleSoft Production Planning to Manage Your Shop Floor ....................... 1-8
Understanding Plans................................................................................................ 1-10
Working With Constraints ...................................................................................... 1-11
Understanding the Interactive Approach to Supply Chain Management ................ 1-11
Using an Integrated Model of Material and Capacity ............................................. 1-13
Consuming Inventory...................................................................................... 1-14
Using Resources.............................................................................................. 1-14
Supplying Inventory........................................................................................ 1-14
Linking PeopleSoft Production Planning to Your Enterprise ................................. 1-14
Using the System of Record.................................................................................... 1-15
Understanding the Production DataLink................................................................. 1-16
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
C O N T E N T S i v P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Resolving Plan Constraints in PeopleSoft Production Planning ............................. 1-17
Collaborating With PeopleSoft Production Planning.............................................. 1-18
Establishing Supply and Demand ........................................................................... 1-19
Analyzing Your Supply Chain Model ........................................................................... 1-20
Creating Flexible Reports .............................................................................................. 1-22
Maintaining Plan Data Using Workbenches, Graphical Charts, and Histograms.......... 1-22
Chapter 2
Setting Up Production Planning
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 2-1
Defining PeopleSoft Production Planning-Specific Installation, User, and
|General Options........................................................................................................ 2-1
Defining the Concatenation Code for Configured Items........................................... 2-2
Setting Up Business Units for Your Production Planning System.................................. 2-2
Establishing Inventory, Order Management, and Purchasing Options............................ 2-3
Defining Inventory Attributes ................................................................................... 2-3
Defining Item Attributes by Units..................................................................... 2-4
Defining Transfer Attributes ............................................................................. 2-4
Defining Forecast Items .................................................................................... 2-5
Setting Up Stocking Periods ............................................................................. 2-6
Setting Up Demand Priority Families ............................................................... 2-6
Defining Order Management Options....................................................................... 2-6
Defining Forecast Product Information............................................................. 2-6
Defining Purchasing Attributes................................................................................. 2-7
Defining Manufacturing Options..................................................................................... 2-8
Manufacturing Data Used by Production Planning................................................... 2-8
Defining Resource Changeover Penalties ................................................................. 2-9
Defining Planning Resource Attributes..................................................................... 2-9
Using Production Planning Resources in Aggregate or Detail ............................... 2-10
Defining Production Planning Attributes ...................................................................... 2-10
Maintaining Aggregate Items.................................................................................. 2-10
Defining Product Forecast Percentages................................................................... 2-11
Defining Master Plan Data...................................................................................... 2-12
Defining Promise and Request Dates...................................................................... 2-14
Defining Roll Forward Phases ................................................................................ 2-15
Overview of the Roll Forward Feature ........................................................... 2-15
Setting Up Roll Forward Parameters .............................................................. 2-16
Setting Up Roll Forward Phases ..................................................................... 2-18
Defining Planning Attributes .................................................................................. 2-21
Defining Work Center Attributes ............................................................................ 2-22
Prioritizing Demand....................................................................................................... 2-22
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S v
Defining Demand Priority Rules............................................................................. 2-24
Defining Lateness Tolerances ................................................................................. 2-26
Sourcing Demand .......................................................................................................... 2-27
Overview of Sourcing Templates............................................................................ 2-27
Solver Processing of Sourcing Template Data........................................................ 2-28
Setting Up Sourcing Templates............................................................................... 2-28
Defining Sourcing Templates ......................................................................... 2-29
Loading Sourcing Options .............................................................................. 2-34
Generating Sourcing Templates (PLS5000)............................................................ 2-38
Verifying Sourcing Options .................................................................................... 2-41
Defining Sourcing Inquiry Selection Criteria ................................................. 2-41
Viewing Sourcing Template Details ............................................................... 2-42
Viewing Sourcing Template - Production Option Details .............................. 2-44
Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details................................ 2-46
Viewing Sourcing Template - Transfer Options Details................................. 2-47
Defining the Line Schedule Editor Defaults.................................................................. 2-48
Setting Up Item Changeover Families .................................................................... 2-49
Defining the Line Schedule Editor Color Scheme .................................................. 2-49
Setting Up the Line Schedule Editor General Defaults, Colors, Dimensions,
and Time Periods..................................................................................................... 2-50
Defining LSE General Settings....................................................................... 2-50
Defining LSE Dimensions .............................................................................. 2-52
Defining LSE Color Settings .......................................................................... 2-53
Defining LSE Time Periods ............................................................................ 2-55
Setting Up Line Schedule Editor Resource Entries Defaults .................................. 2-57
Defining LSE Balancing Defaults........................................................................... 2-58
Defining LSE Bar Colors Defaults.......................................................................... 2-60
Defining LSE Filters Defaults................................................................................. 2-61
Setting Up Bar Item Filters ............................................................................. 2-61
Setting Up Bar Color Filters ........................................................................... 2-62
Viewing the LSE Chart ........................................................................................... 2-62
Verifying Production Planning Data.............................................................................. 2-63
Understanding the Data Verification Process ......................................................... 2-63
Generating the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) ............................ 2-63
Chapter 3
Setting Up the Production DataLink
Overview of the Production DataLink Process................................................................ 3-1
Setting Up Solvers Using the Production DataLink ........................................................ 3-3
Reviewing Time Fences Used by Solvers................................................................. 3-5
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
C O N T E N T S v i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Pegged Chain Processing for Solvers........................................................................ 3-7
Using Solvers to Process a Plan ................................................................................ 3-8
Overview of the Material Planning Solver.............................................................. 3-11
Overview of the Feasible Planning Solver .............................................................. 3-12
Verifying Current Supply and Demand Quantities ......................................... 3-13
Satisfying Unmet Demand .............................................................................. 3-13
Verifying Demand Priority for Frozen Tasks ................................................. 3-13
Ensuring Positive On-Hand Quantity at the Early Fence................................ 3-14
Sourcing Allocations and Options to Reduce Lead Time ............................... 3-14
Reducing Excess Inventory............................................................................. 3-15
Making the Plan Capacity Feasible................................................................. 3-15
Determining Weighted Priorities for Capacity Planning ................................ 3-17
Improving Plan Quality................................................................................... 3-19
Checking Effectivities..................................................................................... 3-20
Overview of the LP Solver...................................................................................... 3-20
Enforcing Constraints...................................................................................... 3-21
Planning Features Processed by the LP Solver ............................................... 3-22
Overview of Iterative Repair/Optimizer.................................................................. 3-24
Using the Production DataLink to Create a Master or Material Plan ............................ 3-25
Setting Up Run Types, Plan Types, Time Fences, and WIP/Roll Forward Options ..... 3-26
Defining General Time Fence Information ............................................................. 3-27
Defining Frozen Fence Offsets ............................................................................... 3-33
Defining WIP/Roll Forward Details ....................................................................... 3-34
Including Demand and Supply in the Production DataLink Run .................................. 3-36
Defining Demand Options ...................................................................................... 3-36
Defining Supply Options......................................................................................... 3-40
Setting Planning Run and Solver Options ..................................................................... 3-42
Selecting a Solver for Plan Generation ................................................................... 3-42
Defining Material Planning Options ....................................................................... 3-44
Defining Feasible Planning Solver Options ............................................................ 3-47
Defining Linear Programming Options................................................................... 3-50
Defining Iterative Repair Settings........................................................................... 3-52
Setting Up Command File and Source File Information ............................................... 3-55
Verifying Planning Server Connection Settings ............................................................ 3-58
Chapter 4
Generating the Production Plan
Overview of the Production Plan Process........................................................................ 4-1
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 4-2
Generating the Production Plan ....................................................................................... 4-2
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S v i i
Running Planning Solvers......................................................................................... 4-3
Defining Global Preferences ..................................................................................... 4-3
Creating a Material Plan............................................................................................ 4-5
Creating a Feasible Plan............................................................................................ 4-8
Generating a Plan Using Linear Programming (LP) ............................................... 4-12
Chapter 5
Managing the Master and Material Plans
Overview of the Master and Material Planning Process.................................................. 5-1
Master Plan Process Flow ......................................................................................... 5-3
Material Plan Process Flow....................................................................................... 5-4
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 5-4
Maintaining Master and Material Plans........................................................................... 5-5
Defining the Master or Material Workbench Search Parameters.............................. 5-5
Using the Master or Material Plan Summary............................................................ 5-7
Changing Server Settings................................................................................ 5-11
Changing Row Types...................................................................................... 5-12
Drilling Down to Maintain Scheduled Receipts...................................................... 5-13
Showing Supply .............................................................................................. 5-15
Showing Demand ............................................................................................ 5-18
Drilling Down to Add or Change Planned Orders .................................................. 5-20
Adding Production Orders .............................................................................. 5-22
Adding Purchase Orders ................................................................................. 5-24
Adding Transfers............................................................................................. 5-25
Maintaining Production Orders....................................................................... 5-26
Maintaining Purchase Orders .......................................................................... 5-29
Maintaining Transfer Orders........................................................................... 5-30
Analyzing the Master or Material Plan.......................................................................... 5-31
Reviewing the Master or Material Plan Summary .................................................. 5-32
Viewing the Master or Material Plan Detail ........................................................... 5-33
Reviewing Master or Material Plan Exceptions...................................................... 5-36
Selecting Exceptions for Review .................................................................... 5-37
Defining Advanced Filters .............................................................................. 5-39
Reviewing the Results..................................................................................... 5-40
Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Master or Material Plan................ 5-43
Overview of the Planning Scorecard............................................................... 5-43
Using the Planning Scorecard Page ................................................................ 5-44
Reviewing Request Date Constraint Violations.............................................. 5-47
Reviewing Safety Stock Constraint Violations............................................... 5-50
Reviewing Promise Date Constraint Violations.............................................. 5-51
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
C O N T E N T S v i i i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reviewing Excess Stock Constraint Violations .............................................. 5-54
Reviewing BI Shortage Constraint Violations ................................................ 5-55
Reviewing RM Shortage Constraint Violations.............................................. 5-57
Reviewing Aggregate Capacity Constraint Violations ................................... 5-59
Reviewing Forecast Fulfillment Constraint Violations................................... 5-62
Reviewing Transfer Shipment Date Constraint Violations............................. 5-64
Filtering Material or Master Plan Scorecard Data .......................................... 5-66
Chapter 6
Managing the Capacity Plan
Overview of the Capacity Planning Process.................................................................... 6-1
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 6-1
Maintaining the Capacity Plan......................................................................................... 6-1
Defining the Resource Workbench Search Parameters............................................. 6-2
Using the Capacity Summary.................................................................................... 6-4
Viewing the Resource Load ...................................................................................... 6-6
Adding Production ............................................................................................ 6-9
Viewing the Production Details .............................................................................. 6-10
Viewing the Production Outputs ............................................................................. 6-11
Analyzing the Capacity Plan ......................................................................................... 6-12
Viewing the Capacity Plan Summary ..................................................................... 6-12
Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Capacity Plan................................ 6-14
Filtering Capacity Plan Scorecard Data .......................................................... 6-14
Viewing Capacity Violations .......................................................................... 6-15
Chapter 7
Committing the Production Plan
Overview of the Commit Plan Process ............................................................................ 7-1
Receiving Planning Messages (PLS2000) ....................................................................... 7-3
Identifying Planning Message Options ..................................................................... 7-3
Verifying Planning Server Settings........................................................................... 7-5
Using Unprocessed Messages From a Previous Plan ...................................................... 7-9
Using the Master Plan Data Page.............................................................................. 7-9
Creating Planning Reports ............................................................................................. 7-10
Understanding Planning Report Options................................................................. 7-10
Creating Your Own Layout............................................................................. 7-11
Generating Supply and Demand Detail........................................................... 7-12
Understanding Simulation and Master Plan Reporting................................... 7-13
Generating the Planning Report (PLS2001)............................................................ 7-13
Before You Begin ........................................................................................... 7-14
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S i x
Defining Selection Criteria ............................................................................. 7-14
Defining Report Options ................................................................................. 7-16
Specifying Row Types .................................................................................... 7-17
Using the Planning Messages Report (PLS4001).......................................................... 7-21
Defining Message Selection Criteria....................................................................... 7-21
Defining Production, Purchase Order, and Inventory Transfer Message
Reporting Options ................................................................................................... 7-23
Displaying Planning Item Use Up Information ............................................................. 7-25
Displaying Planning Use Up Information ............................................................... 7-25
Generating the Planning Use Up Report ................................................................. 7-26
Chapter 8
Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management
Overview of the Production Messages Review and Application Process ....................... 8-1
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 8-2
Reviewing Production Messages ..................................................................................... 8-2
Selecting Production Messages for Review .............................................................. 8-2
Reviewing the Production Message Summary.......................................................... 8-5
Reviewing the Production Message Summary Production Details................... 8-5
Reviewing Production and Operations Detail ........................................................... 8-7
Viewing Additional Production Details ............................................................ 8-8
Viewing Operation Details................................................................................ 8-9
Reviewing Production Exceptions................................................................................. 8-10
Reviewing Production Exception Details ............................................................... 8-10
Applying Production Messages ..................................................................................... 8-12
Applying Production Messages............................................................................... 8-13
Chapter 9
Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory
Overview of the Inventory Messages Review and Application Process ......................... 9-1
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 9-1
Reviewing Inventory Transfer Messages ........................................................................ 9-2
Selecting Inventory Transfer Messages for Review.................................................. 9-2
Reviewing the Inventory Transfer Message Summary Details................................. 9-4
Displaying Message Details.............................................................................. 9-6
Applying Inventory Transfer Messages........................................................................... 9-7
Reviewing Inventory Exceptions..................................................................................... 9-9
Reviewing Inventory Planning Exceptions ............................................................... 9-9
Viewing Inventory Exception Details ............................................................. 9-10
Reviewing Material Stock Request Messages ............................................................... 9-11
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
C O N T E N T S x P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Selecting Material Stock Request Messages ........................................................... 9-11
Reviewing the Material Stock Message Summary MSR Details............................ 9-12
Reviewing Material Stock Request Exceptions............................................................. 9-13
Viewing Material Stock Request Exception Details ............................................... 9-14
Chapter 10
Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing
Overview of the Purchasing Planning Messages Review and Application Process ...... 10-1
Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 10-1
Reviewing Purchasing Messages................................................................................... 10-2
Selecting Purchasing Messages for Review............................................................ 10-2
Reviewing the Purchasing Message Summary: PO Details .................................... 10-4
Reviewing Purchasing Exceptions................................................................................. 10-7
Reviewing Purchasing Exception Details ............................................................... 10-7
Applying Purchase Messages ........................................................................................ 10-8
Chapter 11
Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management
Overview of the Order Management Planning Messages Review Process ................... 11-1
Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 11-1
Reviewing Sales Order Messages.................................................................................. 11-2
Selecting Sales Order Messages for Review........................................................... 11-2
Reviewing the Sales Order Message Summary....................................................... 11-3
Reviewing Message Summary: Sales Order Details....................................... 11-3
Reviewing Sales Order Exceptions................................................................................ 11-5
Reviewing the Sales Order Exception Details ........................................................ 11-5
Chapter 12
PeopleSoft Production Planning Report Descriptions
PeopleSoft Production Planning Standard Reports........................................................ 12-1
Standard Financial Reports............................................................................................ 12-2
Index
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x i
A B O U T T H I S P E O P L E B O O K
The book provides you with the information you will need for implementing and using
PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can order the online version by requesting SKU
FSCMB8SP1R0, or the hard-copy version by requesting SKU MAPLr8SP1B 1200.
This section describes information you should know before you begin working with PeopleSoft
products and documentation, including PeopleSoft-specific documentation conventions,
information specific to the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line, how to order
additional copies of our documentation, and so on.
Before You Begin
To benefit fully from the information covered in this book, you need to have a basic
understanding of how to use PeopleSoft applications. We recommend that you complete at leastone PeopleSoft introductory training course.
You should be familiar with navigating around the system and adding, updating, and deleting
information using PeopleSoft windows, menus, and pages. You should also be comfortable using
the World Wide Web and the Microsoft® Windows or Windows NT graphical user interface.
Because we assume you already know how to navigate around the PeopleSoft system, much of
the information in this book is not procedural. That is, it does not typically provide step-by-step
instructions on using tables, pages, and menus. Instead, we provide you with all the information
you need to use the system most effectively and to implement your PeopleSoft application
according to your organizational or departmental needs. This book expands on the material
covered in PeopleSoft training classes.
PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals
The PeopleSoft Production Planning PeopleBook provides you with implementation and
processing information for your PeopleSoft Production Planning system. However, there is
additional, essential information describing the setup and design of your system that is contained
in a companion volume of documentation called PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals.
PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals consists of important topics that apply to many or all
PeopleSoft applications across the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line. Whether
you are implementing only PeopleSoft Production Planning, some combination of products
within the product line (for example, PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, Inventory, Purchasing, and
Manufacturing), or the entire PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management system, you should be
familiar with the contents of this central PeopleBook. It is the starting point for fundamentals
such as setting up control tables and administering security.
In the PeopleSoft Applications Fundamentals PeopleBook, we've included common information
pertinent to all applications in the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line, such as
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
P R E F A C E x i i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
defining general options. If you're upgrading from a previous PeopleSoft release, you may notice
that we've removed some topics or topic headings from the individual application PeopleBooks
and consolidated them in this single reference book. You’ll now find only application-specific
information in your individual application PeopleBooks. This makes the documentation as a
whole less redundant. Throughout each PeopleBook, we provide cross-references to PeopleSoftApplication Fundamentals and other PeopleBooks.
Below you’ll find a list of those PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals sections that apply
specifically to PeopleSoft Production Planning.
Defining Financial and Supply Chain Management General Options describes how to set up
your basic structure and processing rules for PeopleSoft Financials and Supply ChainManagement applications using pages in the Define General Options menu.
Securing Your System explains how to set up application security for your system. The chapter
provides you with an overview of the PeopleSoft approach to application security and explains
the choices you must make in deciding what level of security to put in place throughout yoursystem, what key fields to secure, and whether it will be done by user IDs or user classes.
Maintaining Vendor Information explains how vendor information is positioned in the control
hierarchy, and guides you through the process of setting up vendors in the system. It also
discusses how to search for, inquire on, approve, inactivate, delete and report on vendors.
Structuring Procurement Options explains how to and where to enter basic system and default
information that doesn’t change or is used repeatedly throughout the systems for many aspects of
your payables and purchasing systems.
Working With Items discusses how to search for and work with items in the PeopleSoft
components. The topics covered include setting up and using substitute items, managing item
status, and defining quantity precision rules for item transactions.
Defining Item Control Values discusses how to set up item attributes using the Define Item
Controls menu. These attributes become the defaults or selection options for new items.
Defining Items discusses how to define items for PeopleSoft setID and business unit levels.
Items must be defined before you can use them in any PeopleSoft application.
Finding Item Information discusses the Inquiry and Report pages under the Define Items and
Define Item Control Data menus.
Working with Warehouse Management Systems describes the implementation of a full
integration between PeopleSoft Purchasing, PeopleSoft Payables, PeopleSoft Order Management,
PeopleSoft Inventory and a third-party warehouse management system (WMS). Integrating
PeopleSoft with a WMS can help you streamline your order-to-cash and procure-to-pay business
processes, which in turn can help you reduce costs, improve service levels, and generate morerevenue.
Related Documentation
To add to your knowledge of PeopleSoft applications and tools, you may want to refer to the
documentation of other PeopleSoft applications. You can access additional documentation for
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x i i i
this release from PeopleSoft Customer Connection (www.peoplesoft.com). We post updates and
other items on Customer Connection, as well.
Important! Before upgrading, it is imperative that you check PeopleSoft Customer
Connection for updates to the upgrade instructions. We continually post updates as we
refine the upgrade process.
Documentation on the Internet
You can order additional copies of the PeopleBooks CDs through the Documentation section of
the PeopleSoft Customer Connection Web site: http://www.peoplesoft.com/
You’ll also find updates to the documentation for this and previous releases on Customer
Connection. Through the Documentation section of Customer Connection, you can download
files to add to your PeopleBook library. You'll find a variety of useful and timely materials,
including updates to the full PeopleSoft documentation delivered on your PeopleBooks CD.
Documentation on CD-ROM
Complete documentation for this release is provided on the CD-ROM PeopleSoft 8.00.01Financials/Supply Chain Management PeopleBooks, SKU CD-FSCMB8SP1R0.
Your access to PeopleSoft PeopleBooks depends on which PeopleSoft applications you've
licensed. You may not have access to some of the PeopleBooks listed here.
The CD includes the following PeopleBooks (presented in HTML format) that you can print in
whole or in part:
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Advanced Planning Client
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Application Fundamentals for Financials and Supply Chain Management
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Asset Management
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Billing
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills and Routings
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Budgets
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Contracts
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Cost Management
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Deduction Management
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
P R E F A C E x i v P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Demand Planning
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eBill Payment
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Engineering
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Enterprise Planning
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eProcurement
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eProduct Management
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eStore
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eSupplier Collaboration
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Flow Production
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 General Ledger
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Inventory
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Inventory Planning
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Mobil Time and Expense
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Order Management
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Order Promising
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Payables
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Product Configurator
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Management
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Planning
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Projects
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Purchasing
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Quality
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Receivables
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Remote Order Entry
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Resource Management
• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Treasury
• PeopleTools
• Setting Up Your Manufacturing System
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x v
• Using PeopleSoft Applications
• Using PeopleBooks
PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions
Throughout our product documentation, you will encounter fields or page elements that are used
on many application pages or panels. This section lists the most common page elements andprovides standard definitions.
Field or Page Element Definition
As of Date The last date for which a report or process includes data.
Description Freeflow text up to 30 characters.
Effective Date Date on which a table row becomes effective; the date that
an action begins. For example, if you want to close out a
ledger on June 30, the effective date for the ledger closing
would be July 1. This date also determines when you can
view and change the information. Pages or panels and
batch processes that use the information use the current
row.
For more information about effective dates, see PeopleSoft
8.00.01 Using PeopleSoft Applications PeopleBook,
“Working With Pages”.
EmplID (employee ID) Unique identification code for an individual associated
with your organization.
Language or Language
Code
The language in which you want the field labels and report
headings of your reports to print. The field values appear
as you enter them.
Language also refers to the language spoken by an
employee, applicant, or non-employee.
Process Frequency group
box
Designates the appropriate frequency in the Process
Frequency group box:
Once executes the request the next time the batch process
runs. After the batch process runs, the process frequency
is automatically set to Don't Run.
Always executes the request every time the batch process
runs.
Don't Run ignores the request when the batch process
runs.
Report ID The report identifier.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
P R E F A C E x v i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Field or Page Element Definition
Report Manager This button takes you to the Report List page, where you
can view report content, check the status of a report, and
see content detail messages (which show you a description
of the report and the distribution list).
Process Monitor This button takes you to the Process List page, where you
can view the status of submitted process requests.
Run This button takes you to the Process Scheduler request
page, where you can specify the location where a process
or job runs and the process output format.
For more information about the Report List page, the
Process List page, and the Process Scheduler, see
PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook,
“Process Scheduler Basic”.
Run Control ID A request identification that represents a set of selection
criteria for a report or process.
User ID The system identifier for the individual who generates a
transaction.
SetID An identification code that represents a set of control table
information or TableSets. A TableSet is a group of tables
(records) necessary to define your company’s structure
and processing options.
Short Description Freeflow text up to 15 characters.
Standard Unit of Measure
(UOM)
A type of unit used for quantifying in PeopleSoft systems,
and usually associated with items. Depending on the
application, units of measure might describe dimensions,
weights, volumes, or amounts of locations, containers, or
business activities. Examples include inches, pounds,
workhours, and standard cost dollars.
Unit (Business Unit) An identification code that represents a high-level
organization of business information. You can use a
business unit to define regional or departmental units
within a larger organization.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x v i i
Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues
To help you locate and interpret information, we use a number of standard conventions in ouronline documentation.
Please take a moment to review the following typographical cues:
monospace font Indicates PeopleCode.
Bold Indicates field names and other page elements, such as
buttons and group box labels, when these elements are
documented below the page on which they appear. When
we refer to these elements elsewhere in the
documentation, we set them in Normal style (not in bold).
We also use boldface when we refer to navigational paths,
menu names, or process actions (such as Save and Run).
Italics Indicates a PeopleSoft or other book-length publication.
We also use italics for emphasis and to indicate specific
field values. When we cite a field value under the page on
which it appears, we use this style: field value.
We also use italics when we refer to words as words or
letters as letters, as in the following: Enter the number 0,
not the letter O.
KEY+KEY Indicates a key combination action. For example, a plus
sign (+) between keys means that you must hold down the
first key while you press the second key. For ALT+W,
hold down the ALT key while you press W.
Cross-references The phrase "For more information" indicates where you
can find additional documentation on the topic at hand.
• Capitalized titles in italics indicate the title of another
PeopleBook. For example: For more information about
billing, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Billing PeopleBook.
• Capitalized titles in italics followed by chapter title in
quotes refer to a chapter in another PeopleBook. For
example: For more information about establishing rate
templates, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Projects PeopleBook,
“Integrating With PeopleSoft Billing and PeopleSoft
Contracts”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
P R E F A C E x v i i i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
• Capitalized titles in quotes refer to another chapter
of this PeopleBook. For example: For more
information about contract status security, see
“Securing Your PeopleSoft Contracts System”.
• Capitalized titles refer to sections within this chapter of
this PeopleBook. For example: For more information
about Defining Contract Statuses, see Defining Your
Own Contract Statuses .
Text in this bar indicates information that you should pay particular attention to as you work
with your PeopleSoft system. If the note is preceded by Important!, the note is crucial and
includes information that concerns what you need to do for the system to function properly.
Text in this bar indicates cross-references to related or additional information.
Text within this bar indicates a crucial configuration consideration. Pay very close attention
to these warning messages.
Page and Panel Introductory Table
In the documentation, each page or panel description in the application will include an
introductory table with pertinent information about the page. Not all of the information will beavailable for all pages or panels.
Usage Describes how you would use the page or process.
Object Name Gives the system name of the panel or process as specified in the
PeopleTools Application Designer. For example, the Object Name of
the Detail Calendar panel is DETAIL_CALENDAR1.
Navigation Provides the path for accessing the page or process.
Prerequisites Specifies which objects must have been defined before you use the page
or process.
Access
Requirements
Specifies the keys and other information necessary to access the page.
For example, SetID and Calendar ID are required to open the Detail
Calendar page.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x i x
Comments and Suggestions
Your comments are important to us. We encourage you to tell us what you like, or what you
would like changed about our documentation, PeopleBooks, and other PeopleSoft reference and
training materials. Please send your suggestions to:
PeopleSoft Manufacturing Product Documentation Manager
PeopleSoft, Inc.
4460 Hacienda Drive
Pleasanton, CA 94588
Or send comments by email to the authors of the PeopleSoft documentation at:
While we cannot guarantee to answer every email message, we will pay careful attention to your
comments and suggestions. We are always improving our product communications for you.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 1
C H A P T E R 1
Overview of PeopleSoft ProductionPlanning
PeopleSoft Production Planning offers an advanced planning system that uses Web-based access
to enable simultaneous optimization of plant-level procurement and production. Using a
powerful Planning engine, the application simultaneously solves material, capacity, inventory
targets, and customer request and promise dates to produce supply chain schedules.
Breaking the traditional mold of ERP systems, PeopleSoft built a planning application around the
concepts of constraint-based optimization. The decision to embed advanced planning and
scheduling technology, instead of building traditional MPS and MRP planning systems, has
resulted in a system that provides advanced planning solutions to help respond to today’s quick-changing business environment.
The application’s interface structure makes it easy for you to follow a logical business process
flow. PeopleSoft Production Planning focuses on a clearly defined business process that makes it
possible to work with a production plan at every stage of the planning cycle. For example, you
can look at demands and at constraints on meeting those demands throughout your supply chain.
Then you can efficiently create an optimal Master or Material Plan that highlights and resolves
exceptions within the supply chain.
What Is PeopleSoft Production Planning?
PeopleSoft Production Planning is an integrated suite of intelligent agent applications that helps
you plan and schedule your enterprise production plans. It gathers information from other
PeopleSoft applications using the Production DataLink and loads it into a memory-resident data
model so you can easily create and solve your production plan. After processing your data,
PeopleSoft Production Planning presents plans and schedules to you that you can review,
approve, and then apply back to your PeopleSoft database.
PeopleSoft Production Planning is an intelligent assistant, showing you potential problems with
the plan and schedule. It graphically depicts exceptions, enabling you to drill-down to find out
what could be keeping your operation from meeting its objectives. Working with the application,
you resolve these exceptions. You can make manual changes to the plan with an easy-to-use
graphical interface or you can let PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically resolve the
exceptions with its intelligent exception-based solvers.
The more successful an enterprise is in controlling its supply chain, the more responsive it can be
to the constantly changing demands placed on it by the marketplace. PeopleSoft Production
Planning makes it possible for you to interact in real time with the planning model. As you
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 2 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
interact with the planning model, you can evaluate the impacts of changes to the plan and quickly
respond.
Traditional MRP Approaches
Traditional planning approaches, Material Requirements Planning (MRP) and Manufacturing
Resource Planning (MRP II), were used as early as the 1970s and were aimed at making the
production environment more predictable and, ideally, increasing bottom-line profits.
Material Requirements Planning
MRP was the first major breakthrough in attempting to control the supply chain. The advent of
computing technology enabled companies to be more effective at demand management. It was
easier for manufacturers using MRP to view a production facility’s bills of material, inventory
data, product lead times, and master production schedule.
MRP consists of three major components used to organize information:
• The current finished goods demand, represented by the Master Production Schedule (MPS).
• The required items and their order of assembly, represented by the bill of material (BOM).
• Inventory item files that track current allocations and storage location.
The information from these three sources enabled manufacturers to become more productive byreducing investments in inventory, facilities, and management efforts.
Manufacturing Resource Planning
MRP II provides effective planning of all resources in a manufacturing company. MRP II
measures operational planning in units and dollars. It also provides a simulation capability to
answer “what-if” questions.
MRP II is made up of a variety of functions that are linked together. MRP II consists of four
major components:
• Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP)
• Master Production Schedule (MPS)
• Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP)
• Demand Requirements Planning
The information generated by MRP II is used throughout the company: Production uses it to
schedule production; Finance receives total cost information; Order Administration receives
current production data and inventory information as input for Available To Promise (ATP); and
Human Resources accesses the information on employee costs and utilization. The evolution of
MRP to MRP II resulted in even better supply chain management, with companies becomingmore responsive to ever-changing demands.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 3
However, it was a bit cumbersome and at times difficult to manage. The information that needs
to flow through the MRP II system is extensive. Additionally, each step doesn’t consider the
constraints in the next step of the planning cycle.
MRP II process flow doesn’t consider the cumulative impact of constraints on each consecutivestep of the planning cycle
The cyclical process of developing a master production schedule (MPS), rough-cut capacity plan
(RCCP), materials resource planning (MRP), resource requirements planning (RRP), and detailed
capacity requirements planning (CRP) may take days to perform. Furthermore, detailed problems
uncovered in the MRP and CRP process might necessitate changes to the MPS.
Enterprise Resource Planning Using PeopleSoft Production Planning
With our vision of reinventing the planning process for the enterprise, PeopleSoft continues to
align best practices with leading-edge technology. We’ve streamlined the old planning paradigm
into a single model that considers capacity and material simultaneously and eliminates the needfor distinctly different planning processes like MPS, RCCP, MRP, and CRP.
PeopleSoft’s Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) solution leads a trend in globally enabled
enterprise Web-based manufacturing systems. It is one of the first manufacturing application
suites to embed advanced planning and scheduling capabilities (APS) for solving the supply chainand providing planning feasibility at the plant and enterprise levels.
Focusing on the principle that advanced planning and scheduling are essential to a complete and
competitive package, PeopleSoft’s strategy enables manufacturers to seamlessly blend planning
and execution activities.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 4 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
PeopleSoft Production Planning considers both supply and demand as it considers resource andmaterial constraints when generating and solving a production plan for your enterprise
PeopleSoft Production Planning provides interactive decision support tools for planners. The
system also provides integrated solutions for procurement, production, and distribution resources.
Moving ahead of traditional MRP and ERP solutions, PeopleSoft Production Planning is built
around the concepts of in-memory constraint-based solvers. The decision to embed advanced
planning and scheduling technology, instead of building traditional MPS and MRP planning
systems, has produced an application with the management and production flexibility required to
respond proactively to changes on the production floor, from the customer, and from the market.
What PeopleSoft Production Planning Offers You
To maintain a competitive advantage in today’s global marketplace, you need a single software
solution to manage and synchronize your entire supply chain. PeopleSoft Production Planning
consists of tightly knit and rich functionality that simplifies, automates, and augments your
business processes and data flow to provide a comprehensive, global supply chain planningsolution.
PeopleSoft Production Planning offers maximum flexibility to handle all phases of your planning
needs. You can make planning decisions that take into account multiple constraints you’ve
defined. You can also quickly create multiple “what-if” scenarios that enable you to assess andprepare for critical alternate situations.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 5
Managing Business Processes and Data Flow
Using PeopleSoft Production Planning adds simplicity to the planning process. The flow of
planning data helps you manage the planning process by dividing it into a series of sequential
processes that include different types of plans to meet your enterprise needs. With a focus on
practical business processes and the flow of data, the application assists you in developing
planning models, generating production plans, and intervening to make adjustments to the plans.
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the following types of production plans to assist you insupply chain planning:
Master Plan Focuses on the manufacture of the items. It looks at the
top-level demand to produce a schedule of planned orders
and order quantities for items at each manufacturing site.
The plan tells you if you can meet the forecasted demand
and provides you a production schedule.
Material Plan Focuses on the availability of raw materials,
subassemblies, and substitutes to meet top-level demand at
each manufacturing site.
Capacity Plan Provides a way for you to ensure the capacity of critical
resources to meet demand. With the plan, you can bucket
aggregate capacity by days, weeks, or months, and use
alternate resource capacity rather than moving tasks
forward or backward in time to meet capacity. Material
requirements are maintained during the processing of the
plan.
Regardless of the type of plan you use to meet business requirements, you’ll use an incremental
business process that logically takes you from one stage to another until you have a completed,
ready-to-use, and feasible plan.
Several steps are required to create these plans.
To develop simulated, master, material, or capacity plans, use the following steps:
1. Establish production-planning data for other PeopleSoft applications. This data ranges from
business units, items, and general options to inventory policies and aggregate resource
attributes and sales and purchase data. You also set up data specifically for PeopleSoft
Production Planning, such as sourcing preferences and demand priorities.
2. Set up the production-planning model using the Production DataLink. The DataLink
provides you a wide variety of options and the flexibility to develop a plan that explicitly
meets your enterprise’s production-planning goals. Using the Production DataLink, you can
indicate which types of supply and demand parameters should be included in the data model.
In addition to setting up the model, you incorporate solver settings at this stage of the process.
Solver settings enable you to automatically generate an initial plan upon loading of the model
into memory.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 6 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
3. Generate a production plan using the planning model. If you want to override how solvers
process the plan, you can make manual adjustments during this stage. After an initial
production plan is created, use this stage to run iterations to the plan to improve its quality.
You can also generate simulated plans. You use these plans to perform “what-if”
simulations. You can’t send a simulation plan back to the PeopleSoft database for execution,
only for reporting.
At this point of the business planning process, you must ensure that a Planning server is
running and that you are linked to it. The server needs to be running for the remainder of the
business process stages. A facility is provided at each stage of the process to link to the
server.
4. Review the production plan using tools available in the PeopleSoft Production Planning
interface. These include workbenches; Planning Scorecards; plan summaries, details, and
exceptions; and detailed reports. Each tool provides different approaches to plan information
and enables you to view the plan from a different perspective. You can review additional
details and use graphical interfaces (such as spreadsheets and Gantt charts) using the
advanced planning client.
5. Maintain the production plan using workbenches and summaries. Manual intervention
enables you to make the planning decisions that system data can’t handle. Using the
Planning server, you can also use spreadsheets and Gantt charts to maintain the plan. After
you are satisfied with the changes, you can run one or more iterations of the plan to fine-tune
its quality.
6. Commit the production plan using planning messages that are sent from the Planning server
and that reside in your PeopleSoft Production Planning interface to finalize elements of your
master or material Plan.
The preceding process stages apply to any Master, Material, or Capacity Plan you might be
developing.
Using Seamless Integration to Create Production Plans
PeopleSoft Production Planning is part of an integrated suite of intelligent-agent applications that
help you develop Master, Material, and Capacity Plans for your entire supply chain. The
applications run in conjunction with a powerful Planning engine that efficiently handles relatively
large amounts of data.
In this integrated system, PeopleSoft Production Planning imports data from PeopleSoft Order
Management, Inventory, Purchasing, Demand Planning, and Manufacturing and sends critical
data to PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, and Production Management. The results from
PeopleSoft Production Planning are also included in the data model used by PeopleSoftEnterprise Planning.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 7
The Production DataLink enables you to pull data from other PeopleSoft applications and place it
in the PeopleSoft Production Planning system. You have the flexibility to run the Production
DataLink as often as you need.
Using the PeopleSoft Production Planning interface, you can run this engine using a Planning
server without leaving the interface. In addition, you use seamless integration to determine how
you want the production-planning model processed by solvers. Solvers make up a set of planning
tools that generate Master or Material Plans ranging from simple material plans or material- and
capacity-feasible plans to more advanced plans that make manufacturing decisions through aseries of iterations and plan violation repairs.
Planning solvers are designed for you either to automate the planning process or to assist you in a
seamless interactive mode to develop a feasible Master or Material Plan. This capability helps
you make planning decisions from a business-unit level down to the manufacturing floor with
minimal navigation, easy data entry, and an intuitive interface structure. The following diagram
displays how you control planning solvers using your workstation.
Web-based user interface versus Windows-based interface
Two user interfaces are available for interacting with the PeopleSoft Production Planning model.
One is Web-based and enables access to planning information through standard Internet
browsers. Data in the Web browser is presented in traditional spreadsheet formats but is powered
by the advanced planning solvers available in the Planning server.
The other user interface is Windows-based and enables a graphical display and maintenance
capability of the planning model. This includes spreadsheet formats available in the Web-based
interface along with interactive Gantt charts and histograms.
You can also run iterations of the plan to improve its quality from the workstation before
committing the plan.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 8 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Moving and Balancing the Supply Chain
A supply chain for an item includes the top-level demand, such as a forecast or sales orders, for
the item. In addition, the chain is made up of the supplies to meet the demand, which might
include production or purchase orders. To facilitate keeping demand and supply balanced for
production plans, PeopleSoft Production Planning uses pegged chains.
Pegged chains tie top-level demand together with the tasks that produce supplies for the demand.
In doing so, solvers in the Planning engine can explicitly move, track, and record which supplies
they are using to satisfy that demands. This means that you can track the production or sourcing
of demand for a specific sales order or forecast. Using Planning servers, you can also view this
link graphically.
Using workbenches in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can review the pegged demand and
supply. The visibility and ease of maintenance help you make decisions about what production
tasks you can move to better expedite special orders, make the best use of resources, or improve
the efficiency and quality of your production plan.
Using PeopleSoft Production Planning to Manage Your Shop Floor
In a manufacturing environment, you are constantly juggling so many objectives that managing
them can seem to be an impossible task. As a planner, you’re asked to:
• Keep inventory at a minimum.
• Maintain quality.
• Maintain an even load on available resources.
• Produce to the plan.
• Meet shipment due dates.
• Keep costs down.
Using PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can maintain a full model of material and capacity.
You model how to replenish every time you have a shortage. Using production options to build
items, transfer options to transfer material where it is needed, and purchase options to indicate
when and where to purchase items, the system can build and solve a production plan that gets thematerial and resources where you need them when you need them.
The planning system makes possible the combination of multiple resources into single planning
runs, such as material and capacity or material and costs. A wide selection of resources can be
combined. You can create predictive data models, which can be optimized with one another.
Synchronized with supply chain execution processes (such as rescheduling, production order
creation, purchasing, transfers, or capacity leveling), advanced planning creates a system capable
of supporting faster manufacturing cycles.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 9
Master Scheduling
Detailed Material Planning
(MRP)
Rough Cut Capacity
Planning
Detailed Capacity Planning
(CRP)
Executable Plan
Planning
InteractivelyTraditional Planning Process
Traditional Process PeopleSoft Production Planning
-Interactive process
-All dependencies are considered
-Realtime capability
-Adaptable to changing business needs
-Graphical workbench
-Unlimited simulations
-Bucketed logic
-Time consuming sequential process
-I/O intensive
-Provides data instead of information
-Does not view constraints at next level
Executable Plan
MPS
RCCP
MRP
CRP
ScenariosScenarios
ScenariosScenarios
Scenarios
Comparing the traditional MRP planning process to the advanced planning and scheduling processembedded in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
By solving factory-specific planning and detailed schedules in your production facilities,
PeopleSoft Production Planning focuses on such situations as the following:
• What customer demand should be fulfilled above others when supply isn’t enough to meet all
demands?
• If material arrives late, what’s the impact going to be on the entire schedule? How can the
impact be minimized?
• A line goes down. Where can production be rescheduled? Can promise dates still be met?
• It’s quarter end. How do you ship the most revenue for this week?
• Sales orders are exceeding projected forecasts. Are the material and capacity available to meet
this additional demand while still observing material lead times?
The key to feasible and optimized planning is the ability to simultaneously balance multiple
business constraints. Constraints are schedule limits that, when violated, must be repaired to
produce a valid schedule. But constraints, by their nature, are often in conflict with one another:
minimizing capacity issues may cause promise-date constraint violations; minimizing promise-
date violations may cause problems with material availability constraints. With each constraint
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 1 0 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
battling the others, the planner’s role is producing a schedule that best meets the business
objectives of the day.
PeopleSoft Production Planning: redefining the planning paradigm
With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can recognize shorter planning process cycle times,
shorter “what-if” scenario cycle times, forward modeling of key inventories, and a single source
of planning data. PeopleSoft Production Planning helps speed the planning process, reduces
inventory carrying costs, and gets you closer to realizing the utmost capacity on your factories’
floors.
Understanding Plans
PeopleSoft Production Planning represents plans in memory to enable fast computation. There’s
no indication of running a consolidation job to compute projected on-hand balances, netted
requirements, or any of the other background processes such as in MRP systems. PeopleSoft
Production Planning always computes the ramifications of scheduling an event.
A plan is a set of tasks that consumes inventory, supplies inventory, or uses capacity resources.
Tasks model production, purchasing, transferring, and shipping. Each task has a start time and an
end time:
• For production tasks, these are the start and end of the production IDs and schedules.
• For purchase orders, these are the order date and the delivery date.
• For interunit transfers, these are the ship date and arrival date.
• For shipments, these are the ship date and the delivery date for forecast demand and for
customer orders and quotes.
PeopleSoft Production Planning dynamically keeps track of the availability of inventory and
capacity as these start and end times change within the data model. It does so by transforming
BOMs and bills of resources (BORs) into constraints when you create new tasks or orders. The
application maintains the effect of constraints on the schedule as you create, delete, or changetasks or orders. It then designates constraint violations on the Planning Scorecard.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 1 1
The receipt of material based on a scheduled purchase order delivery is a real-world event that
PeopleSoft Production Planning represents as a PO delivery task. This task has an effect on the
projected on-hand balance of material for the delivered item. The system immediately calculates
the change in the projected on-hand quantity of the delivered material when the PO delivery is
added to the schedule. No consolidation or netting process is required. When you add a
production task to the schedule, the system computes its effects on available balances of material
and capacity availability.
A transfer order or interunit transfer represents both a shipment and receipt of inventory between
two business units. Production planning recognizes the impact on inventory for both the shipping
and receiving sides of a transfer order.
A sales order represents the shipment of material to a customer from a location under PeopleSoft
Production Planning’s control. The system represents this as a shipment of material and changesthe projected on-hand balance in the future.
Working With Constraints
PeopleSoft Production Planning stores planning and scheduling knowledge in objects called
constraints. Constraints test for exceptions and have intelligent heuristics for repairing
exceptions. When PeopleSoft Production Planning explodes production and assigns times to
operations on the schedule, it attaches constraints to the operations. It then refers back to the
tasks causing the exceptions. You view the violated constraints of the system by viewing a
Scorecard.
When PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically resolves exceptions, it needs to know what
trade-offs it can make in over-constrained scenarios. There are many options available when
running the PeopleSoft Production Planning solvers to resolve violated constraints associated
with material and capacity.
For more information about solvers available in PeopleSoft Production Planning, see
“Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
Understanding the Interactive Approach to Supply Chain Management
PeopleSoft Production Planning vastly improves the way you interact with your company’s
information systems. Formerly, you would enter order and inventory transactions into your MRP
or ERP system on a daily basis, and the system would keep track of inventory balances and order
status. Either weekly or monthly, you would create a material requirements plan with abackground transaction that could take many hours to run: overnight or even over a weekend.
When you came back into the office, you would have to manually search through a massive
printout to find exceptions. You would have to devise reactions to the exceptions and execute
them manually without any opportunity to simulate the ramifications of your decisions on thesupply chain.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 1 2 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Now, PeopleSoft Production Planning helps you quickly identify your operational exceptions and
provides assistance in delivering optimal responses to those exceptions. You can immediately
ask for your exceptions, such as capacity overloads, late orders, or inventory shortages.
A Planning Scorecard provides you with this information. You drill down, using the constraint
tabs, to find specific order, item, or capacity problems. PeopleSoft Production Planning is event-
driven. You no longer need to spend enormous amounts of time analyzing situations to identify
problems, they are simply presented to you to drill down and reconcile.
Fixing problems is easy with PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can change plans and
schedules in a number of ways:
• You can move production orders around on Gantt charts.
• You can review production quantities in spreadsheets.
• You can use Material and Capacity workbenches.
• You also use PeopleSoft Production Planning to change due dates or delete planned
production, purchase, or transfer orders. You can automatically resolve exceptions.
As you resolve problems and make a production plan feasible, you use solvers that make it
possible for you to alternate between automated and manual control of plans as shown in the
following diagram:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 1 3
You can mix manual and automatic optimization to control PeopleSoft Production Planning
For more information about using Solvers, see Resolving Plan Constraints in PeopleSoft
Production Planning.
Using an Integrated Model of Material and Capacity
PeopleSoft Production Planning operates as your intelligent assistant by maintaining a full model
of material and capacity. You draw on this model to determine how to replenish items when you
have shortages. PeopleSoft Production Planning knows about building items through production
options, transferring items through transfer options, and purchasing items through purchase
options. Tasks in the system consume inventory, use resources, and supply inventory.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 1 4 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Although you maintain production options in the system of record (PeopleSoft Supply Chain
Management), you can use the production option pages for viewing data structures such as
production options, bill of material (BOM) entries, bill of resources (BOR) entries, and supply
entries. You can also use this form to change the data structures to perform “what-if”simulations.
Consuming Inventory
Each operation in a production option can consume inventory. You enter the option data, in this
case the bill of material (BOM) and routing, in PeopleSoft Bills and Routings. PeopleSoft
Production Planning ties the BOM and routing entries to the operations of a build option. Each
build option operation consumes items. PeopleSoft Production Planning ensures that the
appropriate material is consumed depending on when you schedule the operation. Component
effectivity dates enable you to model engineering change orders (ECOs).
PeopleSoft Production Planning includes a buildable inventory (BI) constraint and a raw material
(RM) constraint. Use the BI constraint for finished goods items and their buildable
subassemblies. Use the RM constraint to model purchased items.
Using Resources
The bill of resource (BOR) transactions associate resource requests with routing operations. Each
entry asks for a class of resource and a quantity. PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically
ensures that the instance of the resource assigned to an operation is a member of the BOR’s
assigned resource class.
Supplying Inventory
Each operation in a routing can supply inventory. Supplies are represented as production outputs
within planning.
For more information about outputs, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production ManagementPeopleBook, “Maintaining Production Orders and Production Schedules”.
Linking PeopleSoft Production Planning to Your Enterprise
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses data extracted from PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management.
You maintain all data within the associated applications, including static data (such as item
attributes and bills of material) and dynamic data (such as sales, purchase, and production orders).
As activity occurs, the planning system receives relevant data using the Production DataLink.
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses static data from PeopleSoft Bills and Routings and
Production Management and dynamic data from PeopleSoft Purchasing, Inventory, Order
Management, and Production Management.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 1 5
PeopleSoft Production Planning works with other PeopleSoft Supply Chain Managementapplications to provide a comprehensive, constraint-based production plan
PeopleSoft Production Planning gathers data from other PeopleSoft applications through the
Production DataLink and converts the data to an object-oriented form in memory. PeopleSoft
Production Planning performs batch extracts or incrementally grabs the net changes from your
databases. After processing your data, the system presents you with plans and schedules. It can
also tell you what’s wrong with the plans and schedules. These exceptions are graphically
depicted on a Planning Scorecard panel.
Working with PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can resolve these exceptions. You make
changes to a plan or schedule with an easy-to-use graphical interface, or you can have PeopleSoft
Production Planning automatically resolve exceptions with its solvers.
Using the System of Record
The PeopleSoft Production Planning server is an in-memory application. Creating the production
plan in memory enables you to plan multiple scenarios very quickly. However, the in-memory
system provides no permanent storage of data. This happens in the PeopleSoft database
applications that interact with PeopleSoft Production Planning. All items, for example, are added
through PeopleSoft Inventory and then sent to the planning in-memory server. The PeopleSoftdatabase applications are the system of record.
The user interface for PeopleSoft Production Planning can receive direct user input in memory
without going through the system of record. New items, for example, can be added through the
user interface in PeopleSoft Production Planning, but for simulation purposes only. However,
new planned orders and changes to order quantities and dates are passed from the Planning server
back to the system of record.
The only records that can be added to the user interface and passed back to the system of record
are for planned supply orders. If you enter a new planned purchase order online in a planningsession, it will be passed back to the Purchasing application as a new planned supply order.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 1 6 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Changes to existing supply orders can also be made online in PeopleSoft Production Planning
with respect to start and end dates. These changes are passed back in the Receive Planning
Messages process. Any other changes will not propagate back to the system of record.
Understanding the Production DataLink
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses data extracted from your Supply Chain Management
databases. You maintain all data within these associated applications, be it static data (such as
item attributes and bills of material) or dynamic data (such as sales, purchase, and production
orders). When you want to generate and analyze a plan, you’ll move the data to the Planning
server and a planning in-memory engine using the Production DataLink.
To create appropriate input for PeopleSoft Production Planning, the system combines DataLink
programming elements into scripts. Use these scripts to:
• Extract information from PeopleSoft Purchasing, Inventory, Order Management, Product
Configurator, Production Management, and Bills and Routings. You use Process Scheduler to
run the DataLink.
• Transform the data into transactional commands that PeopleSoft Production Planning
understands.
• Load a command file into memory on the Planning server.
The following diagram illustrates the process used by the Production DataLink to produce a plan
you can analyze, maintain, and commit.
SQR
PLS2000
Exported
.Command
File
Planning ServerClient Station
Running the
Planning
Process
Exported
Schedule
In Memory
Optimization
Updating the
System of
Record
Review/
Approve
Planning
MessagesProcess
Planning
Messages
Review/
Approve
Purchase
Messages
PO Staging
Load
Review
Transfer
Messages
PeopleSoft
Manufacturing
Database
SQR
PLS1000
Apply
Transfers
PeopleSoft Production Planning cycles
PeopleSoft Production Planning cycles separately from the PeopleSoft system of record: accepted
plans and schedules are sent back to the system of record through a streamlined export process.
The application maintains the data input as well as the optimization results in memory. When the
planning session completes, you invoke utilities to extract and load these results from memory
into ASCII files. A PeopleSoft SQR verifies the data against the data already in the PeopleSoft
Supply Chain Management database and loads it into planning message tables for your review in
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 1 7
PeopleSoft Manufacturing, Inventory, Purchasing, and Order Management. You then review,
approve, and apply planning messages in each area.
Resolving Plan Constraints in PeopleSoft Production Planning
Planning solvers are designed for you to automate the planning process or to assist you in an
interactive mode to develop an executable plan. The capability of this set of planning tools
ranges from developing a simple material and capacity planning to helping you make advanced
sourcing decisions. Solvers help you make planning decisions from an enterprise level down tothe manufacturing floor.
You use solvers to create viable medium-term material and capacity requirement plans that are
easy to understand and use. For medium-term planning, you can use solvers available in the
Production DataLink to determine what is required to meet all demands and make your plansmaterial- and capacity-feasible.
Material feasibility means that the longest cumulative lead-time exists within a doable time frame
where there are no material shortages. Capacity feasibility means that there are no critical
capacity violations for aggregate resources that are marked for repair in the planning time period.The following solvers are available:
Material Planning Solver This solver provides a simple plan that resolves material
shortages. It also provides a variety of options, such as
capacity smoothing, generating fixed-period requirements,
and consolidating purchase orders. The Material Planning
Solver provides a good starting point for generating a
feasible plan. You can create a material plan for any
combination of master- or material-planning items in
PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can start the
Material Planning Solver when you generate a plan or run
the Production DataLink.
For more information about running this solver, see “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
Feasible Planning Solver This solver tries to resolve all material and capacity
exceptions and to meet all due dates, using demand
priority and minimizing lateness as much as possible. The
solver also minimizes excess inventory and tries to
maintain just-in-time scheduling and preserve existing
supply-demand relationships. You can start the Feasible
Planning Solver when you generate a plan or run the
Production DataLink.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 1 8 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about running this solver, see “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
LP Solver (Linear
Programming Solver)
This solver is a more complex planning tool that models
the supply chain and computes schedules that optimize a
selected objective while satisfying a set of specified
constraints on operations. It is especially designed to
work with reasonably large data sets. The modeling
process extracts basic supply chain information from the
Planning engine data structures and generates an
aggregated supply chain model in linear programming
form. The solver doesn’t ensure a material- or capacity-
feasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions that feed
into the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a viable plan.
You can start the LP Solver when you generate a plan or
run the Production DataLink.
For more information about running this solver, see “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
Iterative Repair Iterative Repair is an advanced planning tool available for
creating a plan or detailed schedule. It is also called the
Optimizer, and you can run it by itself or as part of the
overall planning process. While we do not recommend it,
you can run the Optimizer as the initial phase of the
Feasible Planning Solver. Iterative Repair starts an
analysis of a plan and seeks to repair each problem it
finds, at the same time attempting to minimize the impact
of its improvements on other aspects of the schedule. You
use the Production DataLink to start the solver and define
its settings.
For more information about running this solver, see “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
Collaborating With PeopleSoft Production Planning
In many organizations today, teams at plant locations around the world conduct production
meetings on a weekly or daily basis: planners, product management specialists, and procurement
specialists wrestle with competing constraints to balance supply and demand. Supply chain
planning requires multisite coordination, and PeopleSoft Production Planning provides around-
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 1 9
the-world collaboration capabilities to help satisfy demand with the inventory and capacity of the
whole enterprise.
Planners can easily conduct an online planning session from their own business unit, each able to
see what changes others are suggesting. The result is a completely new approach to enterprise-
wide planning that dramatically reduces planning cycle time and ensures that all critical personnel
can participate in the process.
Applying a collaborative architecture, planners from around the world can create global supplychain plans to resolve supply chain conflicts
You can access a remote Planning server using a standard modem. The planning client can also
fully interact with the server over ordinary phone lines. This enables remote desktop and portable
systems to participate fully in the planning process from home or on the road. You can provide
this access to key suppliers, field sales staff, or potential customers who need the latest
information on product availability.
Establishing Supply and Demand
PeopleSoft Production Planning creates the demand plan for a single plant, including production
schedules, material requirements plan (MRP), and capacity requirements plan (CRP). The
application calculates a time-phased production schedule that is passed on to Production
Management for execution. It also creates purchase order recommendations for Purchasing to
ensure sufficient supply.
The production plan is calculated using demand in the form of forecasts, customer orders and
quotes, production component demand, and transfer demand less supply in the form of quantity-
on-hand balances in inventory, outstanding purchase orders in PeopleSoft Purchasing, and work
in process in PeopleSoft Production Management. It then applies constraints (such as capacity
constraints, inventory target levels from inventory, automatic replenishment, and due dates for the
production) to generate a feasible plan.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 2 0 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Capacitycrews
machines
tools
Production
orders
Planning
parameters
Bills of material
Routings
Sales
orders
Material
stock
requests
Quantity on hand
Quantity on order
Purchase
orders
Transfer
Orders
Transfer
ordersComponent
list
Demand
Supply
PeopleSoft
Production Planning
Sales
Quotations
Forecasts--
item and
product
Planning model
PeopleSoft Production Planning brings incoming demand together with your manufacturingplanning parameters and current quantities to generate required supply
Analyzing Your Supply Chain Model
A number of inquiries are available for you to view and analyze data before either committing the
plan or running another iteration of the plan. PeopleSoft Production Planning provides the
following inquiries:
Plan Summary The Master or Material Plan Summary provides you with
an aggregate (bucketed) view of the supply and demand
for a business unit item. You can use the summary as part
of the workbench where you can make changes to the plan
or as a stand alone display-only detailed review.
Details The Master or Material Plan Detail Inquiry displays the
sequence of supply and demand over time for an item.
You use the inquiry when you review the sequencing of
demand and supply for an item.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 2 1
Exceptions Use the Master or Material Plan Exceptions Inquiry to
review exceptions for individual items in a plan. An
exception is a condition that prevents the master or
material plan from being feasible. The Exceptions Inquiry
and Planning Scorecard display the same data. The main
difference is that the Exception Inquiry enables you to
review all exceptions for an item in the same grid, while
the Planning Scorecard provides some summary features
by exception type. The inquiry also displays additional
problems that may not be in the Planning Scorecard, such
as planned demand before current time.
Planning Scorecard Use the Planning Scorecard to review the efficiency of
your overall production plan. It displays constraint
violations, the number of violations, and a score for the
violations. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, a score is
the weighted sum of constraint violations in a schedule.
The score gives you an idea of how valid, or acceptable,
the schedule is.
You can also quickly analyze and troubleshoot your production plans for your supply chain
through Planning servers using the Supply Chain Viewer. This graphical tool builds a block
diagram of your supply chain model, from where you can see detailed information about
problems by drilling down on a business unit node.
The Supply Chain Viewer maps your business units and all possible connections between them.
You can perform a query using the Planning Scorecard and view a business unit’s inventory
movement or resource usage by clicking that business unit to bring up standard pages, such as
spreadsheets and graphical charts.
You can also view transfer and purchase options, as well as vendor and business unit information
and pegged supplies and demand. When you use the Supply Chain Viewer:
• A diagram is automatically generated from the business unit, supplier, and production-order
data in the server.
• You’ll work with a local copy of the diagram.
• Filters help limit the number of objects displayed. You can use separate check boxes to
prevent displaying vendor or customer sites.
• You can display the Vendor or Business Unit pages, as well as a Planning Scorecard for a
business unit, by right-clicking the vendor or business unit.
• You can display the Production Option page by double-clicking an arc in the diagram.
• The colors of the business units correspond to the scoring scenario you choose.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 - 2 2 O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Creating Flexible Reports
A critical measure of an effective, enterprise-wide planning system is its ability to produce
accurate and timely reports with a minimum effort. With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you
can take advantage of innovative relational reporting of all your PeopleSoft Production Planning
data. You can create your own reports quickly and easily, dramatically enhancing productivity.
PeopleSoft Production Planning offers you a wide range of query and reporting possibilities. You
can use any of our standard reports as delivered, or alter them to suit your specific needs. Also,
our relational data structure enables you to create your own reports easily and quickly.
PeopleSoft Production Planning is event-driven. You no longer need to spend enormous amounts
of time analyzing situations to identify problems: they are simply presented to you to drill down
and reconcile.
With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can:
• Generate planned purchase order and reschedule message reports.
• Determine current and future inventory levels graphically and highlight problem areas with
histograms.
• Use the Planning server to access Gantt charts to visualize what tasks are necessary to
complete a schedule, determine the length and quantity of the tasks, and reschedule the task
using drag and drop.
• Report horizontal planning data by selecting and naming only row types that you want to see.
Row types can include supply, demand, on-hand quantities, and available to promise. You candynamically select the data to be reported.
Maintaining Plan Data Using Workbenches, Graphical Charts, andHistograms
You can work with planning data using a number of tools, beginning with Master and Material
Plan Workbenches. You can use the pages to make changes to the plans. You can change
production, purchase, and transfer order dates and quantities for the plans. You use the respective
workbenches to access single items to work with. The workbenches display exceptions, planned
actions, and planned transfers for the replenishment of distribution or master items.
The Capacity Plan Workbench makes it possible for you to search all resources and identify those
that have capacity violations. You first use the workbench to view the rough-cut capacity plan
details based on certain selection criteria. After you identify overloaded resources, you can view
the loads in a bucketed format over time from the capacity summary, making manual adjustmentsto the plan to resolve capacity problems.
PeopleSoft Production Planning’s graphical tools enable you to easily drag and drop time-based
information to manipulate plans and run quick, interactive simulations. Using Planning servers,
you can efficiently reschedule tasks in plans, update planned orders, and release orders. The
planning system provides histograms you can use to visually determine inventory levels. Using
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L O V E R V I E W O F P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 1 - 2 3
the servers, you can also maintain tasks with Gantt charts and make use of several time-based
spreadsheets.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 1
C H A P T E R 2
Setting Up Production Planning
Before you use PeopleSoft Production Planning, you must define attributes in PeopleSoft
Production Planning as well as in other applications within the PeopleSoft Supply Chain
Management application suite. This section details the key setup pages and components and
describes how they affect PeopleSoft Production Planning.
Before You Begin
Before you begin defining key data elements to support the PeopleSoft Production Planning
process, you’ll need to verify that your installation options are complete, your planning-specific
general options are defined, and your PeopleSoft system backbone attribute settings are correct.
Defining PeopleSoft Production Planning-Specific Installation, User, andGeneral Options
Before you get started actually setting up planning data, there are several planning-related pages
you need to set up and maintain in the Define General Options menu. Most of the data you set up
using these pages you should already have entered when you set up other PeopleSoft applications,
such as PeopleSoft Manufacturing, Inventory, Purchasing, and Order Management. In addition,
you should:
• Define forecast sets to create “what-if” scenarios with different versions of the material and
capacity plan based on different forecasts using the Forecast Sets page.
• Define planner codes so you can use them to filter information for most pages and processes in
PeopleSoft Production Planning using the Planner Code page.
• Create Planning server templates using the Planning Server Definition page. Planning server
templates enable you to automatically transfer the transaction data and plan parameters directly
to the Planning engine to generate, analyze, and implement your plan. These templates make it
easy for you to change the host machine or database you are linked to.
• Define installation default Planning server information based on Planning server templates
using the Installation Options - Planning page.
• Select your own user default Planning servers based on your user preference using the User
Preferences - Planning page.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 2 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about setting up General Options, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 ApplicationFundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Financials and Supply Chain Management
General Options”.
Defining the Concatenation Code for Configured Items
If you’re using PeopleSoft Product Configurator, you need to define a concatenation code to pass
the necessary configuration information for the item to PeopleSoft Production Planning. If the
item uses configuration codes, the item and configuration code are concatenated together (based
on the concatenation code information you define) in the Production DataLink. You define this
concatenation code using the Installation Options - Planning page in the Define General Options
menu.
All attributes for configured items come from the Item Attributes by Unit value defined for the
generic item. These definitions are passed to PeopleSoft Production Planning for each
configuration code. This means that the planning attributes established for the generic configured
item will be used for all configurations of the item.
We strongly suggest that you run the Production Configuration process before running theProduction DataLink process.
For more information about the product configuration process, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Product Configurator PeopleBook, “Establishing Items and Products for Configuration”.
Setting Up Business Units for Your Production Planning System
With PeopleSoft Production Planning, you don’t need to set up business units specific to
PeopleSoft Production Planning. Instead, you need to make sure that you create business units tosupport supply chain information sharing.
To implement PeopleSoft Production Planning, you should at the minimum create one Inventory
business unit and define it also as a Manufacturing business unit. In addition, you might need to
create Order Management and Purchasing business units. Because of the way PeopleSoft
Production Planning works with other PeopleSoft applications, your business units should already
be set up as part of your PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, Order Management, or Manufacturing
systems.
If you want to set up For more information, see
Inventory business units PeopleSoft Inventory PeopleBook
Manufacturing business units Setting up Your Manufacturing System
Purchasing business units PeopleSoft Purchasing PeopleBook
Order Management business units PeopleSoft Order Management PeopleBook
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 3
Make sure you set up your Inventory business unit first.
If you have installed PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, you can decide where to build the master
plan when you establish your business units. To identify the master-plan items to be planned in
PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, you use the MFG Business Units Options page in the
Manufacturing Options component of the Define Business Rules menu. If you select the Master
Items in EP check box, the DataLink will send all the master-plan items for the corresponding
business units to PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. Otherwise, PeopleSoft Production Planning
will plan for the master-plan items.
Depending on your implementation strategy, you may or may not want the master-plan items to
be planned in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. You need to consider the following before you
decide to create your master plan in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning:
• PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning will create a supply schedule for the master-plan items. You
can optionally bring back the supply schedule via the Enterprise DataLink when you receive
the planning messages. This supply schedule can include transfers, purchase orders, or
production IDs or schedules.
• By including the master-plan items, PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning will be able to calculate
loads on Rough Cut Capacity Resources and perform capacity planning at aggregate level.
• If the PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning model is too large, you may encounter sizing constraints.
In that case, you might want to plan for the master-plan items in PeopleSoft Production
Planning.
• If one business unit feeds the key components to another business unit, then we recommend
that you plan your master-plan items in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning.
• If the manufacturing business units are independent of each other, then we recommend that you
plan your master-plan items in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
Establishing Inventory, Order Management, and Purchasing Options
To run PeopleSoft Production Planning, you need to set up several options in PeopleSoft
Inventory, Order Management, and Purchasing.
Defining Inventory Attributes
In order to use PeopleSoft Production Planning, you need to set up the following attributes in
PeopleSoft Inventory.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 4 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Defining Item Attributes by Units
For each item, you need to define the following information using the four Item Attributes by
Unit pages that support PeopleSoft Production Planning:
• General planning information for an item, such as whether the item is planned by distribution
planning, master planning, material planning, or is not planned.
• The item changeover family, which is used by the Line Schedule Editor (LSE) to group items
based on their common production resource usage.
• Planning time fences, planning message parameters, safety stock and excess stock parameters,
lead times, new order fences, and other general information on how you will generate supplyfor inventory items.
PeopleSoft Production Planning generates recommendations for new orders, reschedules, or
order cancellations and then routes these recommendations to PeopleSoft Inventory,
Purchasing, Order Management, and Production Management. In many cases, the volume of
changes number in the thousands. To help manage this activity more effectively, the system
enables you to define a time fence and filters to control the message review and approval
process.
• Item-level parameters to control forecast consumption and incremental material supply and
consumption.
• Transfer, purchasing, and manufacturing order quantities, order multiples, and increments.
For more information about defining item attributes for PeopleSoft Production Planning, see
PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Items”.
Defining Transfer Attributes
To plan transfer for items between business units, you need to define transfer attributes.
Using the Transfer Attributes page, you can define transfer attributes for individual items.
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses these attributes to help fulfill your material needs.
Transfer attributes can then be used to set up sourcing templates for an item in PeopleSoft
Production Planning. Sourcing templates for an item can include transfer, purchase, or
production options. The options are initially evaluated based on least cost; however, you can use
sourcing templates to select default options and to prioritize them when an item has more than
one sourcing option.
For more information about sourcing templates, see Generating Sourcing Templates
(PLS5000).
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 5
Defining Forecast Items
Usage Use the Forecast Items page to associate items with forecast sets. When
you run PeopleSoft Production Planning, you select a forecast set you
want to use.
Object Name FORECAST_INV
Navigation Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Forecast Items
Prerequisites You must define Forecast Sets before you associate items to forecast
sets.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Forecast Set, Business Unit, and Item ID.
Control Inventory - Forecast Items page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Std UOM (standard unit of
measure).
The Forecast Set, Unit, and Item ID are default values from the selection criteria you entered to
access this page. The default Source Code appears for the item.
Enter a Date and a forecast Quantity for each date for which you want an item forecast.
In PeopleSoft Demand Planning, the item forecast tables can be automatically populated
based on the features in that application.
For more information about PeopleSoft Demand Planning, see the PeopleSoft 8.00.01Demand Planning PeopleBook, “Understanding the Basics of PeopleSoft Demand Planning
and Inventory Planning”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 6 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Setting Up Stocking Periods
You use the Stocking Periods page to set up time-phased safety stock and excess stock levels.
The information you enter using this page supersedes any stocking level information you enteredon the Item Attributes by Unit - Planning: Order Modifiers page.
For more information about setting up stocking periods, see the PeopleSoft 8.00.01Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Item Control Values”.
Setting Up Demand Priority Families
You use the Demand Priority Family page to group like items to establish a common priority for
all items within a single group. The demand priorities can then be established for PeopleSoft
Production Planning.
For more information about setting up Demand Priority Families, see the PeopleSoft 8.00.01Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Item Control Values”.
Defining Order Management Options
If you are using PeopleSoft Order Management, you may want to define product forecast
information. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses forecast sets to define different versions of a
forecast. When you run PeopleSoft Production Planning, you select a forecast set that you want
to use. Products are associated with forecast sets when you enter product forecasts in PeopleSoft
Order Management. For planning purposes, you can split product forecasts across multiple
inventory business units as defined on the Forecast Percentages page.
Defining Forecast Product Information
Usage Use the Forecast Products page to maintain forecast information by
product for PeopleSoft Production Planning.
Object Name FORECAST_PROD
Navigation Manage Sales Activities, Analyze Orders, Use, Forecast Products
Access
Requirements
Enter a Forecast Set, Order Management Business Unit, and Product ID.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 7
Manage Sales Activities - Forecast Products page
The Forecast Set, Unit, Product ID, and Item ID are default values from the selection criteria
you entered to access this page.
Enter a Date and forecast Quantity for each date for which you have product forecast
information.
Defining Purchasing Attributes
If you are using PeopleSoft Purchasing, use the Purchasing Attributes component to enter a
variety of data that Production Planning needs. In particular, you need to do the following:
• Access the Purchasing Attributes page to define the lead time and the primary buyer for the
purchased item. The Production DataLink uses the Lead and Standard Price fields from this
page. The Lead Time specified on this page overrides the lead time indicated for thepurchasing attributes.
• Access the Item Vendor page to specify or change a vendor and the lead time for the vendor.
Using this page, you can specify a specific vendor or vendors for PeopleSoft Production
Planning for a purchased item. The application then recommends this vendor to PeopleSoft
Purchasing for each planned order. If you don’t specify a vendor for a purchased item,
PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a planned order without a vendor. You can then use
the purchase order load process to assign a vendor to the item. PeopleSoft Production Planning
also ranks multiple vendors for the same item based on priority.
• Define a Ship To Location that represents an Inventory business unit (IBU). However, the
Inventory business unit and the Ship to Location don’t have to share the same name. You can’t
define a Ship To Location unless the item has purchasing attributes. If an item has purchase
attributes defined but no Ship To Locations, it will be assumed that the item can be ordered at
any IBU. If any Ship To Locations are defined for an item, then each IBU to which the user
wants to order the item must be defined with a Ship To Location.
You can set the lead time that PeopleSoft Production Planning uses for a purchased item at either
the item or vendor level. If you assign a specific vendor to an item in PeopleSoft Purchasing,
define the lead time at the vendor level.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 8 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about maintaining purchasing attributes, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Items”.
Defining Manufacturing Options
There are several parameters available in PeopleSoft Manufacturing to help you define how you
want Production Planning to use work centers and resources.
Manufacturing Data Used by Production Planning
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the following data from PeopleSoft Manufacturing:
Data Production Planning
Work Centers A work center can consist of one or more
people and/or machines; it can represent a
logical grouping of machines, a department,
or a cost center. For a routing, you can
assign to each operation or task a work center
where the operation or task takes place. You
can also assign one or more resources (crew,
machine, or tool) to each work center.
Resources Resources are the crews, machines, and tools
assigned to work centers to complete tasks.
When analyzing capacity for planning and
scheduling, PeopleSoft Production Planning
considers the individual resources that you
assign to the work centers and schedules
them accordingly.
Routings A routing defines the sequence of steps
needed on the shop floor to create the
assembled item. Based on the routing
definition, you can determine the lead
timelead-times for manufactured items,
which, in turn, determine the start and end
dates for production.
Bills of Material PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the
planning bill of material for aggregate
forecasting or aggregate reporting purposes.
You can create and maintain (on a summary
level) all components that comprise a
planning BOM for a group of assembly items
or product families in a business unit.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 9
For more information about setting up this data, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills and RoutingsPeopleBook, “Overview of PeopleSoft Bills and Routings”.
Defining Resource Changeover Penalties
The time required to prepare a resource for production is often dependent on the previous
production run. For example, at a printing machine, you might require more time to flush lines of
black paint prior to using white paint than to flush lines of white paint prior to using black. You
can express this changeover factor as a penalty. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the
changeover cost constraint to sequence production in the proper order for a resource.
Prior to establishing the changeover penalties, you must group your items into unique attributegroups.
For more information about resource changeover penalties, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills andRoutings PeopleBook, “Defining Resources”.
Defining Planning Resource Attributes
You can model planning resources from work centers, machines, crews, and tools. By defining
parameters using the Work Center Maintenance or Resource Maintenance components:
• You can indicate that a work center or resource represents multiple instances of the same
resource.
• You can indicate whether operations within a work center are wrapping or non-wrapping.
Task wrapping refers to the ability of a specific operation to be stopped and started up againwhen crossing a nonscheduled work period, such as a weekend.
• You can define whether or not resources are available for tasks at other work centers during the
wrapping task’s nonscheduled work period.
The Machine Resources and Crew Size fields, which represent the number of resources you
need for each task performed in the work center, function differently than Planning
Instances. PeopleSoft Cost Management uses machine resources and crew size to perform
cost roll-ups.
For more information about planning attributes for resources, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Billsand Routings PeopleBook, “Defining Resources”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 1 0 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Using Production Planning Resources in Aggregate or Detail
In PeopleSoft Production Planning, you have the option to plan resources in aggregate or detail.
When you plan in aggregate, the system analyzes capacity loads for a resource in daily, weekly,
or monthly buckets. The number of tasks scheduled in this bucket can be unlimited as long as
there are available hours in the bucket.
When you plan in detail, the system scores capacity loads in a bucketless method. This means
that the planning system will note any capacity overload where the number of scheduled tasksexceeds the number of resources available.
There is a tremendous amount of flexibility when modeling capacity in PeopleSoft Production
Planning. You can decide to mix the aggregate and detailed capacity options with respect to the
different resources modeled. For example, you might model most crews and machines as
aggregate, whereas you would model certain tools that are highly utilized as detailed capacity.
Make this decision on a resource-by-resource basis. Detailed capacity creates higher quantity
schedules but will likely increase the amount of time required for optimization and maintenance
of the plan.
Use the Planning Options page to specify each resource (crews, machines, and tools) as an
aggregate resource. If you don’t define aggregate options on this page, then the resource is
considered a detailed capacity resource.
For more information about planning resources in aggregate or detail, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Bills and Routings PeopleBook, “Defining Resources”.
Defining Production Planning Attributes
Before you can generate a plan, you may need to define aggregate items, promise and request
dates, Roll Forward phases, and overall planning and work center attributes. These attributes
provide key indicators for how the Production DataLink should process a plan’s data.
Maintaining Aggregate Items
Usage Use the Aggregate Items page to identify which items to include in the
forecasting family.
Object Name PL_AGG_DMD_ITEM
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Maintain Aggregate
Items
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit and Parent Item ID.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 1 1
Plan Production - Aggregate Items page
The Business Unit and Parent Item ID are values for which you selected to maintain aggregate
items.
Aggregate Items
Select an Item ID. The item Description appears and is for display only.
If you want to do a search of all available items, click the transfer button and then click
the Item Search link to access the Item Search page.
Defining Product Forecast Percentages
Usage Use the Forecast Percentages page to define how much of a product
forecast quantity should be directed to a PeopleSoft Inventory business
unit. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses this percentage to allocate
the forecast (defined in the Order Management business unit) among
many inventory business units.
Object Name PL_OM_FCST_PCT
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Forecast
Percentages
Access
Requirements
Enter an Inventory Business Unit and Order Management Business Unit
if you are allocating percentages by business unit only. Enter the
Inventory Business Unit, Order Management Business Unit, and Product
ID if you want to allocate the forecast percentage by product and
business unit.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 1 2 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Plan Production - Forecast Percentages page
The IN Unit (Inventory business unit), the OM Unit (Order Management business unit), the
Product ID, and Description appear based on the business unit and product combination you
entered to access this page.
Enter the Effective Date for the forecast percentage. Indicate the Status (Active or Inactive) of
the forecast percentage for the business unit or product/business unit combination.
To allocate a specific forecast percentage to the business unit or product/business unit
combination, enter the Forecast Percentage. The percentage can be any number; even if you
define more than one effective-dated percentage, the percentages don’t have to total 100% and
can total more than 100%.
You can link an Order Management business unit to more than one Inventory business unit. For
example, you could allocate the forecast percentage as follows:
Order Mgmt BusinessUnit
Inventory Business Unit Forecast Percentage
GBR01 GBR01 50%
GBR01 GBR02 25%
GBR01 CAN01 25%
Defining Master Plan Data
Usage Use the Master Plan Data page to review the status of the Production
DataLink when you generate your master plan.
Object Name PL_MASTER_PLAN
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Master Plan Data
Access
Requirements
Define a Business Unit for your search.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 1 3
Plan Production - Master Plan Data page
The Unit field displays the business unit for which the master plan exists. The DateTime value
is when the previous master plan was generated, regardless of whether it was an iteration or an
initial run. This value also appears in the Production DataLink page in the Previous Master Plan
group.
The Net Change value is the last time that you ran a net change to the plan. This run type
refreshes only planning data created or changed since the last time you ran a master plan using
the Production DataLink. PeopleSoft Production Planning applies net-change data to a session
already running on the Planning server. The Net Change function applies to only new items,
forecasts, transfer orders, material stock requests, production orders, production schedules,
planned production, purchase orders, and sales orders. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn’tuse net change for other static data such as bills, routings, and calendars.
You can set the following values on the page by selecting or clearing the check boxes:
Processed This check box tells others that you have processed the
master plan. When the check box is selected, you can’t
run receive messages again. If you need to run the
Receive Planning Messages process again, you need to
clear this check box and run the Production DataLink
again. Otherwise, an error message appears to indicate
that you have already run receiving messages.
Lockout The system selects this check box when you run the
Production DataLink. This prevents other users from
converting planned orders from the previous run of the
Production DataLink. For example, if you run the
Production DataLink for Group Code A, bring the
messages back, and then run the Production DataLink
again for Group Code A, at that point you can’t convert
the messages from the original Production DataLink run.
This indicates that a more current planning iteration is
taking place. When you use the Receive Planning
Messages option, the Lockout check box is cleared.
Process Status This check box indicates that the Production DataLink is
currently running. It is intended to alert other users who
try to run the Production DataLink while you are running
it.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 1 4 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
When you are ready to convert planned orders after you have run the Production DataLink,
you want to freeze the database so that other users can’t convert planned orders by approving
the planning messages.
Defining Promise and Request Dates
Usage Use the Promise/Request Dates page to assign penalty weights to
promise and request date violations on customer shipments. The system
uses these weights to calculate the score for the promise date and request
date constraints on the Scorecard while optimizing the production plan.
Object Name PL_PR_DATES
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Promise/Request
Dates
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit and select one of the Penalty By options: either
Promise Date or Request Date.
Plan Production - Promise/Request Dates page
The system uses promise and request dates to monitor commitments to customers. The dates help
you track critical shipments. You use this option to emphasize the importance of meeting these
commitments.
Promise dates represent the dates and times that you promised a customer that a shipment would
arrive. The sales order shipment is scheduled to ship on the date you committed to ship. Request
dates represent the dates that a customer has requested to receive a shipment. A sales order line is
scheduled to ship based on this request date.
The Unit and Penalty By are display-only fields.
In the Offset field, enter the number of days (early or late) for the date violation.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 1 5
The Offset field value can be a negative number for penalties applied to early shipments.
Then, enter a Penalty Factor using a numeric value. The value can be greater than 0 but must be
less than 1.00. The penalty factor is cumulative but never exceeds 1.00. For example, an early or
late shipment is never scored higher than 1.00, even if the cumulative penalty value is greater
than 1.00.
Using the data on the screen shot as an example, a missed shipment with an offset of 3 or greater
would by default result in a penalty factor for the offset of 0.3000. A missed shipment with an
offset between 1 and 2 would by default result in a penalty factor for the offset of 0.1000.
Defining Roll Forward Phases
You use Roll Forward phases to reschedule tasks that are past due. Past-due tasks are those that
were scheduled to be completed prior to the current time but remain open. PeopleSoft Production
Planning moves tasks from the past and rolls them forward into the current or a future schedule orplan. Then you can view and work with them before running solvers to fine-tune the plan.
After you establish active phases, use the Production DataLink to indicate whether the Planning
engine should run active Roll Forward phases after loading data into the Planning server.
Overview of the Roll Forward Feature
Often tasks in a plan aren’t completed on time. For example, a purchase order is delayed that
affects whether you can meet forecasted demand on time. Or, possibly, a production line might
be closed for several hours, leaving some existing production operations incomplete.
Using Roll Forward phases, you resolve material movement needs using time periods rather than
fixed dates. Time periods, for example, include early time fences or current times, whereas a
fixed date is a specific time such as 3:30 p.m. on October 10. Time periods can be used over and
over and are associated with fixed dates through planning models.
To determine which moveable tasks to roll forward and where to roll them, PeopleSoftProduction Planning uses the following parameters:
• The time period from which you want to roll tasks forward, beginning with the time period
defined in the planning model as the start time.
• The target time period to which you want to roll tasks. This could be the current time or some
time after the current time.
• The status and types of task being rolled forward, such as the different behavior for planned
orders versus frozen orders across transfers, production, and purchases.
PeopleSoft Production Planning never rolls tasks backward, regardless of the parameters you
define for the Roll Forward utility.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 1 6 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about maintaining Roll Forward phases in the Planning engine, see
PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Advanced Planning Client PeopleBook, “Using the Advanced Planning
Client”.
Setting Up Roll Forward Parameters
This section describes how you establish filters that define which tasks to reschedule and when to
reschedule them. You create a Roll Forward phase that contains the parameters for rolling past-due tasks forward.
The following example shows several tasks that are past due and a production task (operation)
that must be rescheduled because materials won’t be available to complete the task in the current
planning horizon.
Planning Horizon
Start of
Time
Current
Time
Scheduling Horizon
Purchase
Task
Transfer
Task
Production
Task
Early Time
Fence
Rescheduled
Purchase Task
Rescheduled
Transfer Task
Rescheduled
Production Task
Target
Time
Late Time
Fence
End of
Time
Rescheduling a task using Roll Forward phases
You are planning for tasks that are past due in the scheduling horizon and you want to reschedule
them to the next planning cycle. The times and fences are the filter elements available for you to
use when you create a Roll Forward phase. The dates for this time line are determined by time
fences defined when running the DataLink.
You can select to move tasks that are in a Frozen status, but you can’t move tasks in a
Canceled status.
You use three fields that combine to define the parameters. The following table shows how the
production task in the preceding example was selected for rescheduling using the three fields.
Roll Forward Selection Field Field Value
Select task that End
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 1 7
Roll Forward Selection Field Field Value
On or before Early Time Fence
Third field No entry (default is 0)
The next table shows values for the target time.
Roll Forward Target Field Field Value
Roll task to Start
On Early Time Fence
Third field Plus (2 days)
In the example, all tasks are scheduled to start at the same time. So the Roll Forward target
field values are the same for each.
Let’s look at the past-due transfer task. It was scheduled to begin prior to the start of time.
Suppose you wanted to include all tasks that started within a day of the start of time. To selecttasks in this planning condition, use the following selection parameters:
Roll Forward Selection Field Field Value
Select task that Start
On or before Start of Time
Third field Minus (1 day)
The start of time is the earliest time the system uses to select tasks to be rescheduled. If a task
begins before the start of time and ends after the time, it can be rescheduled. In the case of the
transfer, it was scheduled one day prior to the start of time. Using the filters, you limit which
tasks the system selects to reschedule.
The selection parameters for defining the purchase task in the earlier example are in the following
table:
Roll Forward Selection Field Field Value
Select task that End
On or before Current Time
Third field No Entry (default is 0)
After you define parameters for Roll Forward phases, you can roll tasks forward based onindividual phases or on all phases.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 1 8 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Setting Up Roll Forward Phases
Usage Use the Roll Forward Phase page to set up PeopleSoft Production
Planning so that you can roll forward past-due tasks to current or future
production plans.
Object Name PL_ROLLFORWARD
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Roll Forward Phase
Access
Requirements
Enter or select the Roll Forward phase name that you want to add or
maintain.
Plan Production - Roll Forward Phase page
You use this page to add or maintain a Roll Forward phase in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
After it’s created, the phase can be run by the Roll Forward utility in the Planning engine. The
utility is used to reschedule a selected group of past-due tasks to a defined target at a later time.
Enter or update the Roll Forward Phase Name to define the code used to maintain and retrieve
data related to a set of roll forward specifications. The field is required and the name you entermust be unique. The Phase Description field is a short description of the phase.
Select the Active check box to indicate that the Planning engine should use this phase when it
calculates late tasks. Using the check box, you can create a number of Roll Forward phases in
advance, while activating only the phases that you intend to use for the next roll forward run.
If the check box is clear, the phase isn’t used by the system when you select to roll forward active
phases during the Production DataLink run.
Roll Forward Selection
Selections are the types of tasks the system considers for rescheduling during Roll Forward phase
processing. You designate which type of supply and demand task the system processes when it
rolls forward active phases by selecting the check box adjoining the task.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 1 9
Roll Forward phases don’t reschedule tasks that are in a Canceled status. You can
reschedule frozen task by selecting the Include Frozen Task check box.
You use a series of fields to define date and time filters that determine which tasks the system
considers for movement. Using the Select Tasks field, you define tasks based on the time period
that they exist in the schedule. You can use either their start or end date and time. The default is
the task’s end time.
The On or Before field is made up of entries that filter tasks based on their relative position to a
time fence, rather than a hard-coded date. This enables you to keep Roll Forward phases valid for
reuse as time goes forward. You use this field in conjunction with the remaining fields to apply
time filters. The following values are available:
Start of Time The earliest time for which the system can select tasks to
be rescheduled. Tasks that end after this time or start after
this time are eligible for rescheduling.
Current Time The time considered to be the present planning time. The
system can reschedule tasks that end before the current
time or that begin after the current time. This value is the
default value for the field.
Early Fence This time represents the beginning of a planning interval
and is used with the late fence to define the range of time.
The system uses the early fence time to reschedule tasks
that start or end on or before this time.
Late Fence This time represents the ending of a planning interval and
is used with the early fence to define the range of time.
The system uses the late fence time to reschedule tasks
that start or end on or before this time.
You use the second On or Before field with the third field. The third field enables you to specify
a time offset from the selected time fence date. This offset can be either added or subtracted from
the date. Using the second field, you determine whether you are going to add time (plus) to the
offset or subtract time (minus) from the offset.
Using the third On or Before field, PeopleSoft Production Planning stores the offset time as
Minutes, Hours, or Days. The offset default is in minutes. The next group box contains the
supply and demand tasks you can roll forward. If a box is selected, those supply or demand tasks
are included when the system rolls forward active phases.
The following tasks are available for rescheduling:
Sales Order Shipments Includes shipment parents that meet the date filters in the
Roll Forward phase.
Downtime Tasks Includes downtime tasks that meet the date filters in the
Roll Forward phase.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 2 0 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Planned Production Includes production operation tasks that meet the date
filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production
Planning considers an operation planned if the production
parent that it belongs has a status behavior of PLANNED.The system doesn’t reschedule production parents; it
reschedules only those production operations that meet the
date filter criteria.
Existing Production Includes production operation tasks that meet the date
filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production
Planning considers an operation planned if the production
parent to which it belongs has any status behavior other
than PLANNED or CANCELED.
Planned Transfers Includes transfer tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll
Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production Planning considers
a transfer task planned if it has a status of PLANNED.
Existing Transfers Includes transfer tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll
Forward phase. PeopleSoft Production Planning
considers a transfer task existing if it has any status
behavior other than PLANNED or CANCELED.
Planned Purchase Orders Includes purchase order line delivery tasks that meet the
date filters in the Roll Forward phase. PeopleSoft
Production Planning considers a purchase task planned if
it has a status behavior of PLANNED.
Existing Purchase Orders Includes purchase order tasks and possibly purchase order
line delivery tasks that meet the date filters in the Roll
Forward phase. These purchase tasks are considered
existing if they have any status behavior other than
PLANNED or CANCELED.
Select the Frozen Tasks check box to include frozen tasks for rescheduling by the Roll Forward
utility. If the check box is selected, all frozen tasks that meet the filter criteria are included in the
Roll Forward process.
Roll Forward Target
Use this group box to define the date and time to which tasks are rescheduled during the Roll
Forward phase processing. You define the Roll Forward target using a set of configurable
specifications maintained for each Roll Forward phase.
You use a series of fields (the same as the ones you used to select when past-due tasks should be
moved) to define date and time filters that determine when tasks are rescheduled. Using the Roll
Tasks to field, you define whether tasks will be rescheduled so that they either start or end on the
target date. The default is the End time, meaning that selected tasks will be rescheduled so theyare completed on the specified target date.
The On field is made up of entries that filter tasks based on their relative position to a time fence,
rather than a hard-coded date, allowing you to keep Roll Forward phases valid for reuse as time
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 2 1
goes forward. You use this field in conjunction with the remaining fields to apply time filters that
determine the target time. The following values are available:
Start of Time The earliest time for which the system can select tasks to
be rescheduled. Tasks that end after this time or start after
this time are eligible for rescheduling.
Current Time The time considered as the present planning time. The
system can reschedule tasks that end before the current
time or that begin after the current time. This value is the
default value for the field.
Early Fence This time represents the beginning of a planning interval
and is used with the late fence to define the range of time.
The system uses the early fence time to reschedule tasks
that start or end on or before this time.
Late Fence This time represents the end of a planning interval and is
used with the early fence to define the range of time. The
system uses the late fence time to reschedule tasks that
start or end on or before this time.
You use the second On field with the third field. The third field enables you to specify a time
offset from the selected time fence date. This offset can be either added or subtracted from the
date. Using the second field, you determine whether you are going to add time (plus) to the offset
or subtract time (minus) from the offset to arrive at a rescheduled date.
Using the third On field, you define the offset UOM (unit of measure) as Minutes, Hours, or
Days.
Defining Planning Attributes
Usage Use the Planning Attributes page to share an associated object with a
group of objects that have the same characteristics. This page is
optional. The DataLink will create the attributes it needs to support the
model that it creates.
Object Name PL_ATTRIBUTE
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Planning Attributes
Plan Production - Planning Attributes page
You can use Planning Attributes to map entities such as transfer options and sourcing templates
to items. This is accomplished first by creating a global repository of attributes, then associating
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 2 2 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
the values of those attributes to entities and items. Finally, you map the entities to items using
attribute value matching. For example, you can look up the transfer options that map to a given
item based on the common attributes that contain Transfer Option as their Planning Attribute
Category.
Select a Planning Attribute Category. Your options are Material Flow and Resource
Changeover.
Enter a Planning Attribute Name associated with the attribute.
Assign a Planning Attribute Value to the attribute.
Defining Work Center Attributes
Usage Use the WC Attributes (Work Center Attributes) page to associate a
work center with a planning attribute.
Object Name PL_WC_ATTRIBUTE
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Work Center
Attributes
Prerequisites You need to have already defined those work centers for which you
want to create work center attributes. You also need to have Planning
Attribute Names and Planning Attribute Categories defined. You define
Planning Attributes using the Planning Attributes page.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
Plan Production - Work Center Attributes page
Select a Work Center from the prompt.
Select a Planning Attribute Category, Planning Attribute Name, and Planning Attribute
Value to be associated with the selected work center.
Prioritizing Demand
When demand exceeds supply and you don’t have the available inventory on hand, you need to
define a set of rules to prioritize the distribution of demand. The rules are called “demand
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 2 3
priority rules” because they are used to determine the order in which you fulfill independent
demand. In addition, you can use the priority rules to define the lateness tolerance rules.
In PeopleSoft Production Planning, you define the demand prioritization rules specific to abusiness unit that you model.
The Production DataLink will use the demand priority rules to generate the priority for a given
independent demand. Once the priority is established, the DataLink passes the independent
demands with different priority codes to the Planning engine. A demand priority code can range
from 1 to 999, with 1 the most important. The priority value of 0 is reserved for the system. The
Planning engine uses the demand priority code to determine which independent demand to fulfill
first, so that higher priority demands are fulfilled before lower priority demands, in situationswhere there isn’t enough available supply or capacity to meet the various demands.
Lateness tolerance represents how sensitive your customers are to their orders not being fulfilled
on time. Lateness tolerance is expressed in terms of the number of days after which the customer
becomes seriously concerned about the independent demand not being met.
Before you can define the lateness tolerance rules, you must first establish the demand priority
values for your independent demands. You can then specify the lateness tolerance rules to
associate with various ranges of demand priority value. Each lateness tolerance rule is defined by
two values: a demand priority range and a lateness tolerance value that is expressed in days. All
of the demands with priorities in a given range are assigned the lateness tolerance value. The
Production DataLink passes the lateness tolerance rules to the Planning engine, which uses these
rules to determine which demands to delay in situations where there isn’t enough available supply
to meet the various demands.
In PeopleSoft Production Planning, you define the lateness tolerance rules specific to a business
unit that you model. Here’s an example of how the two values are combined.
If the demand priority is less than or equalto
Then the number of days for the latenesstolerance is
19 1
29 2
59 4
69 5
99 7
199 14
999 20
In this example, all independent demands are assigned a lateness tolerance (in days) based on the
demand priority range. Demands of:
• 1 - 19 days are assigned 1 day of lateness tolerance.
• 20 - 29 days are assigned 2 days of lateness tolerance.
• 30 - 59 days are assigned 4 days of lateness tolerance.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 2 4 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
• 60 - 69 days are assigned 5 days of lateness tolerance.
• 70 - 99 days are assigned 7 days of lateness tolerance.
• 100 - 199 are assigned 14 days of lateness tolerance.
• 200 - 999 days are assigned 20 days of lateness tolerance.
The Feasible Planning Solver and the Linear Programming Solver (LP Solver) use the lateness
tolerance rules and the demand priority values to determine which demands to delay in situations
where there isn’t enough available supply to meet the various demands. The following are threedifferent lateness conditions that are associated with the lateness tolerance:
Not late A demand that isn’t late is one that is met on time (on or
before the order request date, depending on which date the
planner is trying to meet).
Late but within tolerance A demand that is late but within tolerance is one that has
been scheduled after the order request date or promise
date, but before the lateness tolerance associated with that
order.
Late beyond tolerance A demand that is late beyond tolerance is one that has
been scheduled after the lateness tolerance associated with
that order.
Based on the lateness tolerance that you define, the solvers use these lateness tolerance conditionsto determine which demands to delay in situations where demand outpaces supply.
Defining Demand Priority Rules
Usage Use the Priority Rules page to assign a priority ranking based on the
demand source.
Object Name PL_PRIO_DEMAND
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Demand
Prioritization, Priority Rules
Prerequisites Depending on the demand source you’re using to establish the priority
rules, you must define Demand Priority Family, Customer Groups, and
the Destination Business Units.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 2 5
Plan Production - Demand Prioritization: Priority Rules page
The Unit you selected to access this page appears. Priority Rank defines the priority to be
assigned to each independent demand that satisfies a given priority rule. The lower the value you
select, the higher the priority. The highest value is 999, which is the lowest possible priority, and
the lowest value is 1, which is the highest possible priority. A priority rank value of 0 is reservedfor the system. Priority Rank is a required field.
The Demand Source represents the source of independent demand to which the prioritization
rule applies. Your options are:
Forecasts Forecasts are total expected sales to all customers that you
can maintain at the product, inventory-item, or planning-
item level. At the planning-item level, sales are forecasted
by families and exploded to inventory items through
planning bills of material.
Inter-Unit Transfers Refers to outbound transfers that represent independent
demand in the planning model.
Other Stock Requests Material stock requests that come from inventory and
aren’t transfers. Could be internal or external fulfillment.
Quotations An order management quotation. Quotations are
considered demand and are sent to Planning when the
quotation success percentage is over the planning success
percentage on the Production DataLink run control.
Safety Stock The intended inventory level designed to protect against
stockouts. Deviation from this level is tolerable within a
margin defined by the safety limit and excess limit. When
stock level drops below the safety limit, new supplies are
generated to bring the stock back to the desired level.
Sales Orders Represents the shipment of material to a customer from a
location under Planning’s control. The system represents
this as a shipment of material and changes the projected
on-hand balance in the future.
You can define the Demand Priority Family in PeopleSoft Inventory. A planning priority
family represents an item or a group of items that can be used as criteria for prioritization. This is
an optional field.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 2 6 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reservation Status is available if you select Sales Orders, Inter-Unit Transfers, or Material
Stock Requests as the demand source. Your options are Reserved and Unreserved. Reserved
orders are those that have been reserved against available/projected quantity on-hand at the
business unit/item level. This is an optional field.
Customer Group, or Customer Allocation Group, is a group corresponding to one or more ship-
to customers. You can select a Customer Group only when you select Sales Orders or
Quotations as the demand source. This is an optional field.
Priority is a valid parameter only when you select Sales Orders as the demand source. For sales
orders, the order priority is a calculated field that is generated during the reservation process. An
order priority value can range between 1 and 999, which is the default. For a given priority rule,
all sales orders with an order priority less than or equal to the value in the Priority field are
considered to match this parameter. For example, if a value of 100 is entered, all sales orders
with an order priority of 100 or less will be evaluated as matching this parameter. This is an
optional field.
Dest Unit (destination unit) is used only when you select Inter-Unit Transfers as the demand
source. You can use this value to prioritize demand for interunit transfer to a particulardestination business unit. This is an optional field.
Although Demand Source, Demand Priority Family, Reservation Status, Customer
Group, Order Priority, and Dest Unit are all optional fields, you must enter at least one of
them, along with the Priority Rank, to create a priority rule.
Defining Lateness Tolerances
Usage Use the Lateness Tolerance Rules page to define the lateness tolerance
rules based on the demand priority.
Object Name PL_PRIO_LATE_TOL
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Demand
Prioritization, Lateness Tolerance Rules
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
Plan Production - Demand Prioritization: Lateness Tolerance Rules page
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 2 7
The Unit is the business unit that you entered to access this page. Priority is the priority rank
from the priority rule definition. Lateness Tolerance (days) indicates the number of days after
which the customer becomes seriously concerned about the independent demand not being met.
Sourcing Demand
Sourcing demand is the process the Planning system uses to determine how the supply for an
item’s demand is going to be filled. The system sources demand using sourcing options. These
options define parameters for manufacturing, purchasing, or transferring an item to meet demand.
You define these options when you set up an item.
Overview of Sourcing Templates
You use sourcing templates to define how PeopleSoft Production Planning should generate
supply for an item. A sourcing template contains a sequenced list of sourcing options (purchase,
transfer, or production) based on the attributes defined throughout PeopleSoft Purchasing,
Inventory, and Bills and Routings for the item. You can let the system load the options
automatically, or you can set up sourcing templates manually and maintain the options. Thesetemplates are needed when multiple sourcing options exist for an item.
When you assign multiple sourcing options to a single item, you create a more flexible planning
situation by providing the Planning engine with more information to source demand. Material
availability, resource capacity, and lead time can create exceptions that influence the engine’s
sourcing selection. When you provide several options, the Planning engine has more
opportunities to find an option that resolves an exception. For example, if a purchase option
doesn’t have adequate lead time, the engine can go to the next prioritized option to see if thatoption can be used to meet the demand.
There are other advantages of creating sourcing templates. You can review sourcing options
before the Production DataLink run. Also, the DataLink doesn't have to create sourcing
templates for every run, thereby reducing processing time. When you indicate to the system that
you want to maintain sourcing templates manually, it prevents the Create Sourcing Templates
batch job from overwriting any sourcing templates when the Manually Maintained check box isselected.
The system uses the following sourcing options to source demand for an item:
Production Option This is a combination of a bill of material and routing
code that can be effective-dated for seasonal mix
variations. The option defines which material and
resources are required to make a specific item.
Transfer Option This option defines the transfer attributes, such as cost or
transfer time, that are associated with transferring an item
from one business unit to another. You create the option
by defining transfer attributes for an item.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 2 8 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Purchase Option This option defines item and vendor attributes, such as
cost, lead time, and order modifiers. You create the
option by defining item and vendor relationships on the
Item Purchasing Attributes page.
When you create a sourcing template, you sequence the options and define a default option for
use if the Planning engine can’t find an adequate option using prioritization. The Planning engine
uses fixed-priority sourcing logic to determine which sourcing option to use to meet the demand.
Solver Processing of Sourcing Template Data
When you generate a plan, you can use different solvers to process sourcing information. The
following list describes the processing:
• The Material Planning solver always selects the sourcing template’s default option.
• The Feasible Planning Solver, when used to generate an initial plan, also selects the default
sourcing option. However, the solver uses the fixed-priority sourcing template to source
transfers or purchases again during the material phase. It also uses the sourcing templates
during the Lateness Reduction Phase to source items again.
• The LP Solver (Linear Programming Solver) uses the fixed-priority sourcing template to guide
its decisions on which routing option to select, but it ultimately makes decisions based on the
bigger cost trade-off picture.
• The Iterative Repair/Optimizer evaluates each sourcing option when the fixed-priority sourcing
logic is invoked. It processes the options in their order of priority until one passes all of the
selection criteria. The first option that meets all of the criteria is the one that is used. If all of
the sourcing options have been evaluated and none passed the selection criteria, then it uses the
default. If you don’t define a default option, the Optimizer uses the option with the highest
priority as the default. The highest-priority option is the one with the lowest number.
Setting Up Sourcing Templates
A sourcing template provides a list of production, purchase, and transfer sourcing options you can
use to source the demand for an item. Using PeopleTools, you can set a default option and a
priority sequence for all the options available for the item. You can also delete options from thetemplate.
You can generate the template in three ways:
1. You can let the system automatically generate templates for items during each Production
DataLink run. The DataLink loads and prioritizes options based on their costs. Lower-costs
options have priority over higher-cost options. The option with the lowest cost will be set as
the default option.
2. You can manually load and create the template. You manually create a sourcing template for
each item that you want to control. You use the sourcing template and buttons to select
which options you want to load into the sourcing template. You define the priority of each
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 2 9
option and which one is the default option. To protect your settings, you indicate to the
system that options for the item are maintained manually. Then, when the Production
DataLink is run again, it doesn’t override manual settings. However, remember that if you
indicate all templates are to be regenerated during the DataLink run, then manually createdtemplates are removed and refreshed by system-generated templates.
3. You can run the Create Sourcing Templates batch job to generate templates for all or a range
of items. Then, you can maintain individual templates using Sourcing Template
maintenance. If you select to maintain the sourcing template manually, it prevents the CreateSourcing Templates batch job from automatically overwriting your templates.
The DataLink and the Batch Generation process create a sourcing template for an item only whenthere is more than one sourcing option available for the item.
The Production DataLink creates new templates, when necessary, for items that don’t have
templates.
Defining Sourcing Templates
Usage Use the Sourcing Template page to load and define the default for
sourcing options manually and to establish the priority of the options
when more than one option is available. You can also select to work
with and review specific types of sourcing options, including
production, purchasing, and transfer options.
Object Name PL_SRC_TEMPLATE
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Sourcing Template,
Sourcing Details
Prerequisites In order to create a sourcing template, you must have a valid inventory
item defined along with attributes for generating supply (transfer
attributes, purchase attributes, production options, or bills of material
and routings). Use the Click to add a new value option to assign
sourcing options for an item.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit and Item ID to access the Sourcing Template
page.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 3 0 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Plan Production - Sourcing Template: Sourcing Details page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Planning System and
Std UOM (standard unit of measure).
When you add a new sourcing template using the Sourcing Template page, you must first either
use the Sourcing Template Load button or use the Production, Transfer, and Purchase
buttons to load sourcing options manually. After adding sourcing options to the template, you
can change the priorities and define a default option.
When the Planning engine processes the plan, it uses the default option according to if solvers
process the templates. If the template is used in processing, solvers use the highest-priority
option first and go through all the remaining options. If a sourcing option can’t be found in the
template to meet the demand, then solvers normally use the default option.
For more information about how the sourcing template is processed by solvers, see Solver
Processing of Sourcing Template Data.
Use the Search Depth field to define how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine
will explode while solving sourcing and optimization issues. Each sourcing option represents a
single level in the supply chain. For example, suppose part A is made up of part B and part B is
made up of parts C and D. To explode all levels, you would enter a 3 in the Search Depth field.
The search depth you define is used as the default for this item for processing all the sourcing
options in the sourcing template.
Resch Early Lmt (reschedule early limit) indicates the maximum number of days early that you
want to allow solvers to move tasks in order to satisfy a demand when sourcing the demand. You
can either allow the Production DataLink or the Create Sourcing Template batch job to update
and assign sourcing options automatically or you can control how the options are used. You
select the Manually Maintained check box to indicate that the sourcing template is to be
maintained by users. When the check box is selected, the DataLink and the Create SourcingTemplate batch job don’t overwrite any options in the template.
You can’t delete a sourcing template. You can add and delete the options associated with it.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 3 1
You use the Description field to describe the sourcing template as it is used for this item. To
change the priority, enter the number in the priority field. The Planning engine processes the
priority sequence first. Select the Default check box to define the default sourcing option for the
Planning engine when all others fail. Initially, this is the lowest-cost option.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
You use buttons to select the sourcing options that you want to load into the sourcing template.
You load the number of production, purchasing, and transfer options that your business requires
for sourcing demand. These options provide you flexibility in planning at the item level.
Click the Sourcing Template Load button if you want to delete the existing sourcing
options and replace them with the current available sourcing options. Click Yes to
refresh with the current sourcing options. Click No to keep the sourcing options as they
appear on the page.
Click the Production button to go to the Update Production page if you want to select
production options for the item.
Click the Transfer button to go to the Update Transfer page if you want to select transfer
options for the item.
Click the Purchasing button to go to the Update Purchasing page if you want to select
purchase options for the item.
The following fields appear as common fields in the Sourcing Template page:
Default Select this check box to indicate that you want to use this
sourcing option as the default value when the Planning
engine sources demand for the current plan. You can
select one sourcing option as the default for the template.
The default option is used to source demand, after the
Planning engine goes through all sourcing template
entries, based on their planning priority, but can’t select
any of them because of problems such as capacity or
material shortages.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 3 2 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Priority Enter a numerical value that defines the priority you want
the Planning engine to place on using a sourcing option to
meet demand. You can enter any positive number up to
999 and the number must be unique.
The Planning engine considers all the sourcing template
options (production, transfer, and purchase) using their
priority in ascending sequence until it finds a template that
can meet the demand without creating planning
exceptions. If the engine can’t find a template without
exceptions, then it uses the default template.
Option Type Defines whether the demand is supplied by a production
task, purchase order, or by a transfer task.
Option Name Displays the name the system uses to track this particular
sourcing option.
For more information about each option type and where they are defined, see the
corresponding option discussions later in this section.
Sourcing Details tab
Viewing the Sourcing Details tab
The following information appears on the tab:
Effective Date Defines the date that a sourcing option is effective.
Unit Cost Displays how much it costs to produce a single unit of the
item defined in the sourcing template. When generate
sourcing templates automatically, the system uses the cost
as the basis for prioritizing sourcing. The lower an item’s
cost the higher the sourcing priority. Sourcing priorities
are defined using lower numbers than those with higher
priorities.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 3 3
Production tab
Viewing the Production tab
As you select different Sourcing Template tabs, the sourcing options remain the same; however,
data for each type of option changes depending on the tab you select. The Production page
displays additional information associated with any production type sourcing option.
For more information about loading initial information for the Production page, see Loading
Sourcing Options.
The following information appears on the Production tab:
BOM Code This is the bill of material identifier for the production
option within the template. Production options can be pre-
defined or created based on defaults specified at the item
attributes by unit level.
Routing Code This is the routing identifier for the production option
within the template. This column is empty if routings
aren’t being used. The routing code also doesn’t apply to
production options used in PeopleSoft Production
Planning.
Associated Primary BOM When an item is a co-product on multiple primary BOMs,
then one of the items must be assigned as an associated
primary BOM. This allows the Planning engine to
explode the co-product to the next level when it processes
sourcing options at greater search depths.
If an item has an associated primary item different from
itself and also has its own BOM, then the Planning engine
imports production options for both the item itself and the
associated primary item.
For more information about setting up production options, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills andRoutings PeopleBook, “Defining Production Options”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 3 4 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Purchasing tab
Viewing the Purchasing tab
As you select different Sourcing Template tabs, the sourcing options remain the same; however,
data for each type of option changes depending on the tab you select. The Purchasing page
displays vendor information.
Options that appear on the Purchasing page are combinations based on the definitions in the
Item/Vendor table.
Vendor Set ID The SetID in which the vendor information was defined.
Vendor ID Identifies a specific vendor as defined on an item/vendor
definition.
Transfer tab
Viewing the Transfer tab
The Transfer page shows active transfer options available for use by the Planning engine.
The following information appears on the Transfer page:
Source Business Unit This is the unit that is going to ship the item.
Ship Via Code This code identifies the method used for shipping the item.
Loading Sourcing Options
You use buttons to define the sourcing options that you want to load into the sourcing template.
You load the number of production, purchasing, and transfer options that your business requires
for sourcing demand. These options offer you flexibility in planning at the item level. This
section describes how to select and load production options and where the options originate.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 3 5
The Sourcing Details page contains four buttons for loading sourcing options. You use three of
these buttons to select the options and the fourth to load the options. You select the button to see
the options that have been created for items. Using the page, you then select the options you want
to include in the sourcing template. After you select the options that you want to load, click theOK button.
The options you load into the sourcing template for an item remain in the template until you
delete them. As long as you select for the template to be maintained manually, the Create
Sourcing Templates batch job and Production DataLink won’t overwrite an item’s sourcing
options.
Click the Delete button next to the option on the Sourcing Details page to remove the
options you load manually.
If you decide you no longer need a manually maintained sourcing template, you can clear the
Manually Maintain check box at the top of the page. The next time you run the Create Sourcing
Template batch job or the Production DataLink when it is set to regenerate sourcing templates,
the system overwrites the current sourcing template, including the options you’ve defined.
After you select the options, you can use the Sourcing Details page to define the priority in which
you want the Planning engine to use the options to source demand. You also define a single
default option.
Loading Production Options
Click the Production button to select production options.
Sourcing Template - Select Production page
PeopleSoft Production Planning production options define how an item is produced. They
originate from Item Maintenance settings at the business unit level. A production option can be
created for each BOM and routing code combination. You can define the BOM code and routing
code and how production options are created and used at the business unit level.
For more information about setting up and using production options, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Bills and Routings PeopleBook, “Defining Production Options”.
You can also maintain options for an item when their planning rates aren’t maintained at the
routing level. Use the Maintain Items option to access Item Attributes by Unit. Then access thePlanning page.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 3 6 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Production options are updated immediately when, for example, you change a BOM for an
item. The changes are available in the Select Production page and the Sourcing Inquiry.
For more information about data that appears in the Select Production page, see Verifying
Sourcing Options.
Use the Select check box to select the option or options that you want to load when you return to
the Sourcing Details page. You can select or clear an option using the check box.
After you select the production options that you want to load, click the OK button. When you
return to the Sourcing Details page, only the selected production options will be added to the
sourcing template.
Loading Transfer Options
Click the Transfer button to select transfer options.
Sourcing Template - Select Transfer page
Transfer options define how an item is moved between business units. They originate from the
transfer attributes that you define for the item. To access the Transfer Attributes page use thefollowing link: Transfer Attribute page.
Transfer options are updated immediately when, for example, you change the transportation
cost for an item. The changes are available on the Update Transfers page and the Sourcing
Inquiry.
For more information about data that appears on the Update Transfer page, see Viewing
Sourcing Template - Transfer Options Details.
Select the Select Cost check box to define the option or options that you want to load when youreturn to the Sourcing Details page. You can select or clear an option using the check box.
After you select the transfer options that you want to load, click the OK button. When you return
to the Sourcing Details page, only the selected transfer options are added to the template.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 3 7
Loading Purchase Options
Click the Purchasing button to select purchase options.
Sourcing Template - Select Purchase: Vendor Details page
Two tabs are available for selecting purchase options. The Vendor Details page displays vendor
information for the item. Using the two pages, you can only change the Select check box toselect or clear an option.
For more information about information that appears on the Vendor Details page, see
Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details.
Sourcing Template - Select Purchase: Order Modifiers page
Purchase options define how an item is procured. They originate based on a variety of settings in
PeopleSoft Purchasing. Among the considerations for defining purchase sourcing options arevendor selection criteria, such as lead time and pricing.
For more information about data to create purchasing sourcing options, see PeopleSoft
8.00.01 Purchasing PeopleBook, “Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing”.
Purchase options are updated immediately when, for example, you change the item vendor
priority for an item. The changes are available on the Update Purchasing page and the
Sourcing Inquiry.
For more information about information that appears on the Order Modifiers page, see
Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 3 8 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Select the Select check box to define the option or options that you want to load when you return
to the Sourcing Details page. You can select or clear an option using the check box.
After you select the purchase options that you want to load, click the OK button. When you
return to the Sourcing Details page, only the selected purchase options are added to the sourcing
template.
Generating Sourcing Templates (PLS5000)
Usage Use the Sourcing Templates page to define criteria that you want the
system to use when it sources demand automatically.
Object Name RUN_PLS5000
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Process, Create
Sourcing Templates
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID and Business Unit.
Process
Name
PLS5000
Process Type SQR
Plan Production - Sourcing Templates page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager,
Process Monitor, and Run.
You use the Sourcing Templates page to load production, transfer, and purchasing options
automatically into the sourcing template for a single business unit at a time. The priority of each
option is based on lowest cost. After you run the process to load the sourcing options into the
template, you can maintain the priorities and the default option manually. Using the Create
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 3 9
Sourcing Templates batch job is an optional step. You can create and maintain a sourcing
template without running the background process.
A sourcing template isn’t required to source an item. However, it does make it possible to
modify sourcing options and it reduces the amount of Production DataLink processing time.
If an item has a sourcing template, then the system uses entries in the template. If the item
doesn’t have a template, then the Production DataLink dynamically and temporarily creates the
sourcing template for that one-time use.
Plan Currency
The Currency Code represents the base currency for the specified business unit. It is used to
calculate costing information for setting the priorities of sourcing options for the sourcing
template. You can’t change the field.
The Rate Type determines the exchange rate the system uses to convert costs from other
currencies to the single currency code in the Currency Code field. Examples of exchange rates
include spot (immediate), current, negotiated (discount and premium forward rates), average, and
historical rates.
Planning System
You can establish a sourcing template for either PeopleSoft Enterprise or Production Planning or
both. When you select a specific system, the Create Sourcing Template builds the sourcing
templates for items for the corresponding planning system.
Sourcing Options
The Sourcing Options group box contains available options that can be used in the sourcing
template. You can select all or any combination of options. You must select at least one option.
Unselected options remain in any currently existing templates.
For example, if you select only the Purchase Options check box, then Transfer and Production
options remain unchanged in any template that they belong to when the templates are refreshed.
Purchase options will be completely refreshed for the items you select in the Item Option group
box.
The following sourcing options are available:
Production Options This is a combination of a BOM and routing code that can
be effective-dated for seasonal mix variations. The option
defines which material and resources are required to make
a specific item.
For more information about where production options are defined for an item, see Loading
Production Options.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 4 0 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Transfer Options This option defines the transfer attribute, such as cost or
transfer time, that is associated with transferring an item
from one business unit to another. You create the option
by defining transfer attributes for an item.
For more information about where transfer options are defined for an item, see Loading
Transfer Options.
Purchase Options This option defines item and vendor attributes, such as
cost, lead time, and order modifiers. You create the
option by defining item and vendor relationships on the
Item Purchasing attributes page.
For more information about where purchase options are defined for an item, see Loading
Purchase Options.
Item Option
Use the Item Option group box to define which items you want to include in Create Sourcing
Template processing. The following options are available:
All Select this option to include all items with defined
sourcing options in the processing. All is the default. To
clear it, you must select the Range option.
Range Select this option to specify a range of items to be
included. You use the adjoining entry fields to define a
From and To range for item IDs. The system creates
sourcing options only for those items that are within the
range. These fields are required if you select the Range
option.
Only New Items Select this option if you want to include only those items
that have been established since the last sourcing template
was created. You must also enter a date from which you
want the system to consider new items.
Date Added Enter the date from which you want the system to consider
new items. The system creates sourcing templates for any
items that were established after this date. This is a
required field if you select Only New Items.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 4 1
Click Run to run the Create Sourcing Templates process (PLS5000). Process Scheduler runs the
process at user-defined intervals.
For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process SchedulerPeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.
Verifying Sourcing Options
You can review an item’s sourcing template and sourcing options by using the Sourcing Inquiry
component. The inquiry shows the sourcing template for the item, along with data from
production, purchasing, and transfer options.
You use the Sourcing Inquiry pages before you run the Production DataLink to review sourcing
options that will be sent to the Planning engine. If a sourcing template doesn’t exist for the item,
then the Sourcing Template page is empty and the options appear on the Production, Purchase,
and Transfer Option pages, according to which ones have valid options assigned to them.
Defining Sourcing Inquiry Selection Criteria
Usage Use the Item Planning Inquiry page to define the item for which you
want to review sourcing options.
Object Name PL_PLAN_INQ
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing
Inquiry, Item Planning Inquiry
Prerequisites For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a
sourcing template for the item.
Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Item Planning Inquiry page
You can define filters for the following values:
Business Unit This is a required field. Either type or select the business
unit to which the item belongs.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 4 2 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Item ID This is a required field. Either type or select the item for
which you want to see associated sourcing options.
System Defines the planning system in which the item is being
planned. You can select the PeopleSoft Enterprise or
Production Planning system. If you leave the field empty,
sourcing options for both systems appear in the inquiry.
Base Currency If you plan for an item using different currencies, you can
select the currency for which you want to review the
item’s sourcing options. The field isn’t required.
Rate Type Defines how the exchange of currency from one business
unit to another is calculated. For example, you might use
a spot rate, which is the immediate rate, versus a
negotiated rate that might provide an exchange discount.
The field isn’t required.
Click the Search button to retrieve the sourcing information for the item.
Viewing Sourcing Template Details
Usage Use the Sourcing Template page to view sourcing options for an item
along with their priority, default option, and basic details about the
option. Use the remaining tabs to see additional details for each type of
option.
Object Name PL_SOURCE_DTL
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing
Inquiry, Sourcing Template
Prerequisites For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a
sourcing template for the item.
Access
Requirements
You must define a Business Unit and Item before you access inquiry
data.
Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Sourcing Template page
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 4 3
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Std UOM (standard unit of
measure).
When a sourcing template exists for an item, then the sourcing options appear in the Sourcing
Template. If a template doesn’t exist and valid sourcing options are available, you must use the
Production, Purchase, and Transfer Options tabs to review the options.
The Search Depth field displays how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine will
explode while solving sourcing and optimization issues. Each routine option represents a single
level in the supply chain.
Resch Early Lmt (reschedule early limit) indicates the maximum number of days that you want
to allow solvers to move tasks up in order to satisfy a demand when sourcing the demand.
The Sourcing Template check box indicates whether a sourcing template exists for the item.
When the check box is selected, a sourcing template has been created for the item and the
Production DataLink doesn’t include this item when it creates sourcing templates automatically.
Options appear regardless of whether a sourcing template has been created.
The following information appears on the Sourcing Template page:
Default Defines the sourcing option used as the default value
when the Planning engine sources demand for the current
plan. Only a single default option can exist.
The default option is used to source demand, after the
Planning engine goes through all sourcing template
entries, based on their planning priority, but can’t select
any of them because of problems such as capacity or
material shortages.
Priority Defines the priority you want the Planning engine to place
on using a sourcing option to meet demand. The lower the
number, the greater the priority.
The Planning engine goes through the sourcing templates
based on their priority until it finds a template that can
meet the demand without planning exceptions. If the
engine can’t find a template without exceptions, then it
uses the default template.
Option Type Defines whether the demand is supplied by a production
task, purchase order, or transfer task.
Option Name Displays the name the system uses to track this particular
sourcing option.
BOM (bill of material) This is the bill of material identifier for the production
option within the template. Production options can be
predefined or created based on defaults specified at the
item-attributes-by-unit level.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 4 4 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about setting up production options, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills andRoutings PeopleBook, “Defining Production Options”.
Routing This is the routing identifier for the production option
within the template. This column is empty if routings
aren’t being used. The routing code also doesn’t apply to
production options used in PeopleSoft Enterprise
Planning.
Effective Date Defines the date that a sourcing option is effective.
Vendor ID Identifies a specific vendor as defined on an item/vendor
definition.
Source Business Unit This is the unit that is going to ship the item or product.
Ship Via Code Identifies the method used for shipping the item.
Unit Cost Displays how much it costs to produce a single unit of the
item defined in the sourcing template. When you generate
sourcing templates automatically, the system uses the cost
as the basis for prioritizing sourcing. The lower an item’s
cost, the higher the sourcing priority.
Viewing Sourcing Template - Production Option Details
Usage Use the Production Options page to view detailed production sourcing
information about the item.
Object Name PL_PROD_DTL
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing
Inquiry, Production Options
Prerequisites For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a
sourcing template for the item.
Access
Requirements
Click the Search button on the Item Planning Inquiry page to access the
production option information.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 4 5
Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Production Options page
The business Unit, Item, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure) information are display-only
fields and default based on the search criteria you defined on the Item Planning Inquiry page.
Valid options that have been established for sourcing production appear on this page, including
the following production option information:
BOM (bill of material) This is the bill of material identifier for the production
option within the template. Production options can be
predefined or created based on defaults specified at the
item attributes by unit level.
For more information about setting up production options, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills andRoutings PeopleBook, “Defining Production Options”.
Routing This is the routing identifier for the production option
within the template. This column is empty if routings
aren’t being used. The routing code also doesn’t apply to
production options used in PeopleSoft Enterprise
Planning.
Effective Date Defines the date that a sourcing option is effective.
Obs Date (obsolescence date) Displays when the option becomes obsolete.
Description Describes the item to which this sourcing option belongs.
Unit Cost Displays how much it costs to produce a single unit of the
item defined in the sourcing template. When you
automatically generate sourcing templates, the system
uses this cost as the basis for prioritizing sourcing. The
lower an item’s cost, the higher the sourcing priority.
Batch Cost Displays the cost of producing a planned quantity of this
item.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 4 6 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Viewing Sourcing Template - Purchase Options Details
Usage Use the Purchase Options page to view detailed purchasing sourcing
information about the item.
Object Name PL_PURCH_DTL1
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Inquire, Sourcing
Inquiry, Purchase Options
Prerequisites For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a
sourcing template for the item.
Access
Requirements
Click the Search button on the Item Planning Inquiry page to access the
purchase option information.
Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Purchase Options page
The business Unit, Item, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure) information are display-only
fields and default based on the search criteria you defined on the Item Planning Inquiry page.
Valid options that have been established for sourcing purchases appear on this page, including the
following purchase option information:
Vendor Set ID Groups purchasing business units that share vendor,
purchase order, and receiving information with PeopleSoft
Payables in the same SetID.
Vendor Identifies a specific vendor within a vendor set.
Vendor Name Name of the vendor as defined during vendor
maintenance.
Priority Displays the preference of which vendor to use to supply
this item. The vendor with the lowest priority number is
the most preferred. The Planning engine doesn’t use this
priority to source demand. If two vendors have the exact
same price, you can use the vendor priority as the
tiebreaker to determine which one has a higher template
priority.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 4 7
Lead Time Days This is the purchasing lead time specified for the vendor
or item/vendor relationship. This represents the amount of
time it takes to get inventory from the vendor.
Std Price (standard price) Displays the standard price for the item. This value
becomes the default price in transactions where another
price, such as a vendor price or a contract price, isn’t
defined for the item.
Min Order Qty (minimum
order quantity)
Displays the minimum amount that can be placed on a
purchase order.
Max Order Qty (maximum
order quantity)
Displays the maximum amount that can be placed on a
purchase order.
Order Multiple Displays the multiple the system uses to determine an
order quantity. For example, if you have a demand for 28
and the multiple is 10, then the system generates a planned
purchase order for 30.
Purchase Yield Defines the usable output from the purchase. The value is
expressed as a percentage. Purchase yield is used in
planning to inflate the planned quantity on purchases to
account for any loss that may occur during the purchase
process.
Viewing Sourcing Template - Transfer Options Details
Usage Use the Transfer Options page to view detailed transfer sourcing
information about the item.
Object Name PL_TRANS_DTL1
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Inquire, Sourcing
Inquiry, Transfer Options
Prerequisites For sourcing information to appear for an item, you must first generate a
sourcing template for the item.
Access
Requirements
Click the Search button on the Item Planning Inquiry page to access the
transfer option information.
Plan Production - Sourcing Inquiry: Transfer Options page
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 4 8 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The business Unit, Item, and Std UOM (standard unit of measure) information are display-only
fields and are defaults based on the search criteria you defined on the Item Planning Inquiry page.
Valid options that have been established for sourcing transfers appear on this page, including thefollowing transfer information:
Source BU (source business
unit)
Displays the unit that is going to ship the item or product.
Total Cost Ship Via Displays the total amount it costs to ship the item using
the shipping method defined in the Ship Via Code field.
Min Order Qty (minimum
order quantity)
Displays the minimum amount that can be placed on a
transfer order.
Max Order Qty (maximum
order quantity)
Displays the maximum amount that can be placed on a
transfer order.
Order Multiple Displays the multiple the system uses to determine an
order quantity. For example, if you have a demand for 28
and the multiple is 10, then the system generates a planned
transfer order for 30.
Transfer Yield Defines the usable output from the transfer. The value is
expressed as a percentage. The transfer yield is used in
planning to inflate the planned quantity on transfers to
account for any loss that may occur during transport.
Defining the Line Schedule Editor Defaults
The Line Schedule Editor (LSE) is a graphical interface screen that displays production tasks for
multiple items on multiple resources across multiple periods of time. In addition, the LSE
enables you to modify the production schedule by changing the scheduled time or resource
assignments of the production tasks.
With the Line Schedule Editor, you can:
• Display resource utilization percentage in a given time period.
• Display overlapping production tasks.
• Display multiple bar definitions.
• Freeze, unfreeze, join, split, compress, and expand production tasks.
• Balance the utilization of resources by time periods and individual resources.
• Dispatch production tasks by sequencing and assigning task times.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 4 9
Setting Up Item Changeover Families
Usage Use the Item Changeover Family page to associate a SetID with an item
changeover family.
Object Name PL_LSE_FAMILY
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Item Family Group
Access
Requirements
Enter a SetID.
Plan Production - Item Changeover Family page
SetID is a display-only field that represents a set of control table information or TableSets. A
TableSet is a group of tables (records) necessary to define your company's structure andprocessing options.
Enter the name of the Item Changeover Family with a long Description and Short Description.
The LSE uses the item changeover family to combine items based on their common production
resource (work center, machine, tool, or crew) usage to help visually identify sequencing and
changeover points within the production plan. Using the changeover family, you can group items
that can sequentially run on the same resource without incurring a changeover.
Defining the Line Schedule Editor Color Scheme
Usage Use the Line Schedule Colors page to establish colors for LSE objects.
Object Name PL_COLORS
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Colors
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 5 0 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Plan Production - Line Schedule Colors page
You can create a new color by changing the color name of an existing color and its corresponding
RGB (red, green, and blue) values. Each RGB value can range from 0 to 255 (inclusive).However, you can’t add a new row to the color legend.
Once you’ve defined the LSE colors, you can then assign colors to the LSE objects.
Setting Up the Line Schedule Editor General Defaults, Colors, Dimensions,and Time Periods
To create an LSE template, you need to define several attributes and maintain them in the
transaction system. Through the DataLink, you transfer the LSE data to the Planning engine,from where you can display the LSE chart.
Once in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can modify the original settings of the LSE.
However, changes that you make to the LSE definition in the Planning Client aren’t permanent;
therefore, changes must be made in the transaction system for the changes to be saved for future
use. If changes are made to the LSE definition in the transaction system, these changes will be
modeled in the Planning engine only when the Production DataLink is run in Regenerative mode,
not Net Change mode.
Defining LSE General Settings
Usage Use the General - General page to define the general parameters of the
LSE.
Object Name PL_LSE_GENERAL
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, General, General
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 5 1
Line Schedule Editor - General: General page
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
Select the Copy LSE to Planning check box to include the LSE in the DataLink run (at least one
resource and one time period must be defined). If you don’t select this check box, no data for this
LSE will be transferred to the Planning engine.
Select an Above Line Definition from the available options. The Above Line, which appears
when there is a capacity shortage, is displayed above the production bar. Your options are No
Above Line and Capacity Shortage. The default is No Above Line.
Select a Below Line Definition from the available options. The Below Line, which appears
when there is a material shortage or unmovable bar, is displayed below the production bar. Your
options are No Below Line, Material Shortage, or Unmovable Bar. The default is No Below
Line.
The Bar Split Duration enables you to define a duration of time that can be used to split up a
group of overlapping or continuous tasks that are represented by a single bar in the LSE chart.
The duration can be expressed in Days, Hours, and Minutes. The default is 1 minute. The
following example illustrates how the Bar Split Duration is used. Suppose you have a bar that
represents eight continuous or overlapping production tasks, and suppose you have defined a Bar
Split Duration of 1 hour. If you decide to split this bar, then this bar will be divided into two bars
such that the last task of the first bar and the first task of the second bar are rescheduled so thatthey are one hour apart.
The Header Format determines where you want the utilization percentage to appear within acell. Your options are Right, Left, and Center. The default is Right.
Select a Date Format for the time period. Your options are Date Only, Hours, Minutes, and
Seconds. The default is Date Only.
The Cell Over Maximum enables you to specify the pattern that will appear in the cell when the
capacity usage in the cell exceeds the maximum utilization percentage. Your options are
Forward Diagonal, Backward Diagonal, Cross, Diagcross, Horizontal, Vertical, and None.
The default is Forward Diagonal.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 5 2 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The Cell Under Minimum enables you to specify the pattern that will appear in the cell when the
capacity usage in the cell falls below the minimum utilization percentage. Your options are:
Forward Diagonal, Backward Diagonal, Cross, Diagcross, Horizontal, Vertical, and None.
The default is Backward Diagonal.
If you are creating an Aggregate LSE, you need to specify the Bucket Size. Only aggregate
resources with a bucket size equal to the bucket size value specified on this page can be assigned
to the LSE. In addition, the bucket size determines the size of the LSE time periods; this is done
to ensure that the time periods match the bucket size of the aggregate resources shown in theLSE. Your options are Daily, Weekly, and Monthly. The default is Daily.
Defining LSE Dimensions
Usage Use the General - Dimensions page to define the display dimensions of
the LSE.
Object Name PL_LSE_DIMS
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, General, Dimensions
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
Line Schedule Editor - General: Dimensions page
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields. The following dimensional characteristics are available
for use:
Cell Height The height of the cell. The default is 180 pixels.
Cell Width The width of the cell. The default is 280 pixels.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 5 3
Bar Height The height of the bar. The default is 12.
Bar Space Vertical spacing of the bar expressed. The default is 8
pixels.
Column Label Height The height of the column irrespective of the font. The
default is 26 pixels.
Column Font Height The vertical space of the font in the column expressed in
number of points. The default is 14 pixels.
Row Label Width The width of the row with the label. The default is 100
pixels.
Row Font Height The vertical space of the font in the row expressed in
points. The default is 16 points.
Magnify Cell Height Magnified version of the cell height. The default is 500
pixels.
Magnify Cell Width Magnified version of the cell width. The default is 850
pixels.
Magnify Bar Height Magnified version of the bar height. The default is 15
pixels.
Magnify Bar Space Magnified version of the bar height. The default is 8
pixels.
Bar Line Space The amount of space between the bar and the line above
or below it. The default is 1 pixel.
Magnify Bar Line Space Magnified version of the bar line space. The default is 1
pixel.
Row Font Name The name of the font used for the row. The default is
Arial.
Column Font Name The name of the font used for the column. The default is
Arial.
Defining LSE Color Settings
Usage Use the General - Color Settings page to define the color of LSE objects.
Object Name PL_LSE_COLORSET
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, General, Color Settings
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 5 4 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Line Schedule Editor - General: Color Settings page
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
Before you can select a color for the LSE object, the color must exist in the LSE color legend.
You can add a color to the legend using the LSE Colors page in the Line Schedule Colors
component. By changing the RGB (red, green, blue) color value (0-255 inclusive), you cancreate any color you desire. The following color schemes are available for you to use:
Downtime Color Default is Gray.
Default Bar Color Default is Red. If you don’t specify the color, then all the
bars in the display will appear red.
Above Line Color Default is Orange.
Below Line Color Default is Cornflower Blue.
Cell Color Default is Light Gray.
Time Period Color Default is Light Gray.
Resource Entry Color Default is Light Gray.
Resource Entry Offload
Color
Default is Teal.
Cell Under Min Pattern
Color
Default is Goldenrod.
Cell Over Max Pattern
Color
Default is Light Coral.
Time Period Over Min
Color
Default is Yellow.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 5 5
Time Period Over Max
Color
Default is Red.
Defining LSE Time Periods
Time periods form the x-axis of the Line Schedule Editor. Essentially, a LSE time period is an
offset of the current time. To display the LSE chart, you must first set up at least one time period
for the LSE.
Because time periods for a detailed LSE and aggregate LSE are set up differently, you need to
define them on two separate pages.
Setting Up Time Period for Detailed LSE
Usage Use the General - Time Periods Detailed page to define the time periods
for a detailed LSE.
Object Name PL_LSE_TIME
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, General, Time Periods
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Detailed), and LSE Name.
Line Schedule Editor - General: Time Periods (Detailed) page
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the headerof the page and are display-only fields.
Enter a Start Date Offset (Days) for the first LSE time period as an offset (in days) from the
current time. For example, if today’s date is 5/5/00 and you want the start day to be one week
from now, you would enter 7.
Enter a quantity for the Daily Time Periods and Weekly Time Periods.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 5 6 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For Daily Time Periods, specify one Minimum Utilization % (minimum utilization percentage)
and one Maximum Utilization % (maximum utilization percentage) to be assigned to each time
period. Similarly, for Weekly Time Periods, enter a Minimum Utilization % and Maximum
Utilization % for each time period. The default value for the Minimum Utilization % is 0, andthe default value for the Maximum Utilization % is 100.
Select the Always Start Weekly Periods On check box to indicate that the weekly periods
should always begin on a certain day of the week. If you don’t select this check box, then the
weekly periods will begin immediately after the daily periods end. If you select this check box,
then extra daily periods will be added so that the first weekly period begins on the day of the
week that you select from the available options.
Setting Up Time Period for Aggregate LSE
Usage Use the General - Time Periods Aggregate page to define the time
periods for an aggregate LSE.
Object Name PL_LSE_TIME
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, General, Time Periods
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate), and LSE Name.
Line Schedule Editor - General: Time Periods (Aggregate) page
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
Enter a Start Date Offset (Days) for the first LSE time period as an offset (in days) from the
current time. For example, if today’s date is 5/5/00 and you want the start day to be one weekfrom now, you would enter 7.
Specify the number of Time Periods for the LSE.
For the time periods, specify one Minimum Utilization % (minimum utilization percentage) and
one Maximum Utilization % (maximum utilization percentage) to be assigned to each time
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 5 7
period that you create. The default value for the Minimum Utilization % is 0, and the default
value for the Maximum Utilization % is 100.
Setting Up Line Schedule Editor Resource Entries Defaults
Usage Use the Resources page to view or edit a resource entry and its
corresponding bar definition.
Object Name PL_LSE_RESOURCE
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, Resources
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
Line Schedule Editor - Resources page
LSE resource entries are placeholders for the resource, and they form the y-axis of the graphical
editor. To display the LSE chart, the LSE must contain at least one resource entry. You can add
a resource entry any time after you’ve created the Line Schedule Editor.
Both detailed and aggregate resources can be used as LSE resource entries. The order in which
resource entries are added to a Line Schedule Editor determines the order in which they appear inthe chart.
A detailed resource displays one task at a time and shows how each one is scheduled.
Conversely, an aggregate resource shows all tasks scheduled at the same time.
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
Select a Resource Type from the available options: Crew, Machine, Rough Cut Resource, Tool,
Workcenter, or Workcenter (Subcontract).
Select a Resource Code from the prompt.
Select a Bar Definition from the following options
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 5 8 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Gantt This bar represents a single production task. Each bar
must be displayed alone on its own cell row, which is
similar to the existing task Gantt charts in the PC client.
Item This bar represents a sequence of production tasks for the
same item so that no temporal gap exist between the tasks.
This means that either each task in the sequence overlaps
with the previous and next task of the sequence, or the
task is scheduled exactly “next to” the previous and next
task of the sequence.
Item Changeover Family This bar is similar to the Item bar, except that it represents
a sequence of production tasks for items that belong to the
same item changeover family such that no temporal gaps
exist between the tasks.
Item Utilization This bar represents all production for a specific item in a
cell. Each utilization bar starts at the beginning of the cell
and ends according to how much of the resource it
consumes for that cell. For example, a bar that takes 50%
of the cell utilization will end in approximately the middle
of the cell.
Item Changeover Family
Utilization
This bar represents all production for a group of items in a
cell that belong to the same item changeover family. Each
utilization bar starts at the beginning of the cell and ends
according to how much of the resource it consumes for
that cell. For example, a bar that takes 50% of the cell
utilization will end in approximately the middle of the
cell.
For a detailed resource, the default bar definition is Item. Aggregate resource uses Item
Utilization as the default.
Defining LSE Balancing Defaults
Usage Use the Balancing page to add or edit the balancing parameters for a
resource.
Object Name PL_LSE_LINEBALANCE
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, Balancing
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 5 9
Line Schedule Editor - Balancing page
PeopleSoft Production Planning provides a set of line balancing utilities that balance the
utilization of equipment resources by assigning resources (lines) to production tasks. The
primary goal of a line balancing utility is to avoid or reduce overallocation of resources. Line
balancing supports both detailed and aggregate resource. However, you can balance only onetype of resource at a time.
Line balancing utilities provide a flexible mechanism to associate tasks during balancing. You
can associate production tasks by item, item-slot values, or demand priority of a pegged chain. In
addition, you can determine the order in which you balance the associated production.
With line balancing, you can:
• Balance the utilization of resources by time periods.
• Balance the utilization of individual resources.
• Clear all of the production from a resource by time period, grid period, or resource.
• Offload just enough production according to specified criteria.
• Move a specific percentage of production from a source grid period to the destination grid
period.
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
Select a Move Bar Definition from the available options using one of the following options:
Fill Move enough production tasks from one cell to another so
that the maximum utilization percentage of the source cell
isn’t reached.
Move Task Move tasks around to balance utilization of individual
resources. This is the default.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 6 0 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Offload Move the resource from the source row to the destination
row. You must first select the source row and move it to
another resource row (destination). You can move every
cell in the grid into one bar definition row.
Select a Dispatch Order from the available options. The dispatch order is crucial to the
development of a capacity plan, as it determines how you sequence and assign tasks. The
primary purpose of the dispatch utility is to reduce changeover cost and changeover time of the
items. Your available options are Changeover Cost, Changeover Item, and Changeover Time.
The default is Changeover Cost.
The dispatch order applies only to detailed LSE. There is no dispatch order for aggregate
LSE.
Defining LSE Bar Colors Defaults
Usage Use the Bar Colors page to assign a color to an item and item
changeover family.
Object Name PL_LSE_CHGOVER
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, Bar Colors
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
Line Schedule Editor -Bar Colors page
LSE uses the item changeover family as a criterion to dispatch detailed resources. Items that
belong to the same changeover family have the same bar color.
Before you can associate an item with an item changeover family, you must first define the
changeover family at the SetID level using the Item Changeover Family page in the Item Family
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 6 1
Group component. Once you have created the changeover family, you can then associate it with
an item and color.
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
Select an Item ID and Item Changeover Family from the respective prompt. Select a Color
Name from the available options.
For more information about item changeover families, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 AdvancedPlanning Client PeopleBook, “Changing Products and Items”.
Defining LSE Filters Defaults
The Line Schedule Editor provides the capability to include and exclude certain bar items and bar
colors in the LSE chart. You can choose to turn the filtering feature on and off.
Setting Up Bar Item Filters
Usage Use the Filters - Bar Item Filters page to include certain production
items that will be displayed in the LSE.
Object Name PL_LSE_ITEMFILTER
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, Filters, Bar Item Filters
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
Line Schedule Editor - Filters: Bar Item Filters page
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 6 2 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Select the Use Bar Item Filter check box if you want to use the bar item filter in PeopleSoft
Production Planning. If you don’t select this check box, then all bar items will be sent to
Planning.
Select an Item ID from the available options. The Description appears when you click the field
heading or select the Use Bar Item filter check box.
Setting Up Bar Color Filters
Usage Use the Filters - Bar Color Filters page to include certain colors that will
be displayed in the LSE.
Object Name PL_LSE_COLORFILTER
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Planning Data, Use, Line Schedule
Editor, Filters, Bar Color Filters
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit, LSE Type (select Aggregate or Detailed), and
LSE Name.
Line Schedule Editor - Filters: Bar Color Filters page
The Business Unit is a display-only field and represents the business unit for which you are
maintaining the Line Schedule Editor. The LSE Type and LSE Name also appear in the header
of the page and are display-only fields.
Select the Use Bar Color Filter check box if you want to use the bar color filter in PeopleSoft
Production Planning. If you don’t select this check box, then all the bar colors associated withitems of changeover families will be displayed in the LSE.
Select a Color Name from the available options. You can add as many colors as you want into
the grid, as long as the color has been defined in the color legend.
Viewing the LSE Chart
If you want to view the LSE chart, you must access the Planning client. You can then use the
LSE pages for the Planning client to further define the LSE parameters before displaying the
chart. In addition, when you display the chart, you can manipulate the LSE objects to generate“what-if” scenarios.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G 2 - 6 3
For more information about configuring the LSE in the Planning client, see PeopleSoft8.00.01 Advanced Planning Client PeopleBook, “Using the Line Schedule Editor”.
Verifying Production Planning Data
Before you run the Production DataLink, you’ll want to verify that the planning data you’re
sending to the Planning engine is accurate.
Understanding the Data Verification Process
The Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) enables you to identify items to be plannedand validates the items that are currently planned.
Using the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000), you can:
• Identify any PeopleSoft Production Planning components whose routing sequence number is
invalid or zero.
• Identify any manufactured PeopleSoft Production Planning items that have no routing in the
routing table.
• Verify that the master-plan items have only master and material components.
• Verify that the material plan items have only material components.
• Identify the Item/Production Areas that have no valid routing.
• Identify the routings that have no Item/Production Areas.
• Report routings that have no planning times.
• Identify items with routings that have no default Production Areas.
Generating the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000)
Usage Use the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) to report any
problems in the planning data.
Object Name RUN_PLS3000
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Report, Planning Data
Inconsistency Report
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
2 - 6 4 S E T T I N G U P P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Process
Name
Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000)
Process Type SQR
Plan Production - Planning Data Inconsistency page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Language, Report
Manager, Process Monitor, and Run.
Select the business Unit for which you want to generate the Planning Data Inconsistency Report.
Click Run to run the Planning Data Inconsistency Report (PLS3000) using Process Scheduler.
For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process SchedulerPeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.
For examples of this and other reports in your application, see the PDF files published on
CD-ROM with your documentation.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 1
C H A P T E R 3
Setting Up the Production DataLink
One of the powerful features of PeopleSoft Production Planning is the ability to link your
enterprise system closely with the advanced planning and scheduling system. PeopleSoft
Production Planning uses data extracted from your PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management
databases. You maintain all data within these associated applications, including static data (such
as item attributes and bills of material) and dynamic data (such as sales, purchase, and production
orders). When you want to generate and analyze a plan, you move the data into the PeopleSoftProduction Planning in-memory engine using the Production DataLink.
Extracting information from your PeopleSoft database is the first step you perform to generate a
production plan. Using the Production DataLink, you extract required data from PeopleSoft
Purchasing, Inventory, Order Management, Production Management, and Bills and Routings.
The Production DataLink creates the data model that drives the planning solvers and algorithms
in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
Overview of the Production DataLink Process
You use the Production DataLink to define which options you want to include in your master or
material plan. These options range from time fences to the types of tasks that you want to include
in your plan. You can set up and rerun the DataLink as often as necessary to create a feasible
plan and to improve the quality of plans that are already feasible.
The Production DataLink generates command files that are sent to Planning servers which, in
turn, process the files and send action messages regarding supply and demand back to PeopleSoftOrder Management, Inventory, Purchasing, and Production Management.
A number of command files exist to set up data for the Planning server, including items and
demand and supply files. For example, an Environment file contains the transactions required to
define general parameters such as time fences for the planning model while a Procurement filecontains the transactions required to set up purchase orders.
Planning servers use solvers to process your plan. These planning tools are designed for you to
automate the planning process, or they assist you in an interactive mode to develop an executable
plan. The capabilities of the solvers range from developing a simple material plan to helping you
produce advanced material- and capacity-feasible plans. Solvers help you make planning
decisions from an enterprise level down to the manufacturing floor.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 2 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
You can run planning solvers several times and in several ways for a given PeopleSoft
Production Planning data model. This includes automatically setting up and running a solver
to generate a plan when you load the initial data or manually specifying parameters and
initiating the solvers. Also, you aren’t limited just to one solver for each planning model. It
might be necessary to control the PeopleSoft Production Planning process by solving
finished-goods material problems before solving lower-level capacity issues.
Using the DataLink, you can define which items you want to plan for in both PeopleSoft
Enterprise Planning and PeopleSoft Production Planning as well as the types of demand andsupply you want to include in your plan.
Flow of data between the PeopleTools transaction system and Planning servers
The Production DataLink is instrumental in bringing together item and inventory data from other
PeopleSoft applications, including Order Management, Purchasing, Inventory, and
Manufacturing. The DataLink creates a planning model that it sends to Planning servers.
Dynamic data that is moved in the example is constantly changing and flexible. This type of data
is made up of demands, such as forecasts, and supplies, such as transfer orders.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 3
PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning servers might contain manufacturing and inventory business
units whereas the PeopleSoft Production Planning servers focus on only a single
manufacturing site.
When the DataLink creates a planning model, it includes but isn’t limited to the following data:
• General planning parameters.
• Business unit definitions and item definitions.
• Inventory balances and policies.
• Production and closure calendar information.
• Transfer and purchasing attributes.
• Manufacturing bills and routings.
• Demand and supply transactions.
After the Production DataLink produces the data model and the Planning solvers generate a
master or material plan, the system returns results in the form of planning messages that you can
use to commit the plan back to PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, Production Management and
Order Management.
For more information about reviewing planning messages, see “Processing Planning
Messages in PeopleSoft Production Management”.
Setting Up Solvers Using the Production DataLink
When you set up the Production DataLink, you can define which solvers you want to use to
process the plan after you load the data model into the Planning engine. The Planning engine
runs the solvers based on the controls you define.
You use solvers to create viable medium-term material and capacity requirement plans that are
easy to understand and use. For medium-term planning, you can use solvers available in the
Production DataLink to determine what is required to meet all demands and make your plansmaterial- and capacity-feasible.
Material feasibility means that the longest cumulative lead-time exists within a doable time frame
where there are no material shortages. Capacity feasibility means that there are no critical
capacity violations for aggregate resources that are marked for repair in the planning time period.
Four solvers are available for you to run automatically during the loading of the data model into
the Planning server. The ultimate goal of the solvers is to produce a plan that doesn’t contain
material shortages or capacity violations. In addition to producing material- and capacity-feasible
plans, solvers identify and report on unavoidable instances in which the plan is jeopardized. For
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 4 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
example, perhaps material cannot be sourced or when there is insufficient lead time to satisfy a
demand.
In determining feasible plans, solvers use pegged chains that tie tasks and top-level demand
together. In doing so, solvers can explicitly track and record which supplies they are using to
satisfy which demands. The Production DataLink uses the following solvers to assist you in
producing a viable plan:
Material Planning Solver Provides a simple plan that resolves material shortages. It
also provides a variety of options, such as capacity
smoothing, generating fixed-period requirements, and
consolidating purchase orders. Using the Material
Planning Solver provides a good starting point for
generating a feasible plan. You can create a material plan
for any combination of master and material-planning
items in Production Planning.
Feasible Planning Solver Tries to resolve all material and capacity exceptions and to
meet all due dates, using demand priority and minimizing
lateness as much as possible. The solver also minimizes
excess inventory and tries to maintain just-in-time
scheduling and preserve existing supply and demand
relationships.
LP Solver (Linear
Programming Solver)
Serves as a more complex planning tool that models the
supply chain and computes schedules that optimize a
selected objective while satisfying a set of specified
constraints on operations. It is especially designed to
work with reasonably large data sets. The modeling
process extracts basic supply chain information from
Production Planning data structures and generates an
aggregated supply chain model in linear programming
form. The solver doesn’t ensure a material- or capacity-
feasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions that feed
into the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a viable plan.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 5
Iterative Repair Also called the Optimizer, this advanced planning tool is
available for creating a plan or detailed schedule. You can
run Iterative Repair by itself or as part of the overall
planning process. Iterative Repair doesn’t use pegged
chains or demand priorities. Although we don’t
recommend it, you can run Iterative Repair as the initial
phase of the Feasible Planning Solver.
During each of its phases, the Optimizer runs a series of
iterations and repairs a series of violations. After you run
an iteration, the Optimizer scores the schedule and
determines whether or not to continue working on that
iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables
Iterative Repair to determine which constraints are
violated as well as the order in which the violated
constraints should be repaired.
Reviewing Time Fences Used by Solvers
Fences play an important role in how solvers analyze supply and demand. These fences represent
points in time before or after which solvers take certain actions. Solvers use fences to determine
how far supply or demand tasks can be moved forward or backward to meet planning needs.
Planning and scheduling problems occur within four periods of time. Time fences help define thefollowing types of planning periods:
• Today’s schedule that has been released to the manufacturing floor.
• Short-term scheduling on a time line with shift or daily bucket planning.
• Medium-term planning.
• Long-term planning.
Solvers are best applied to medium-term planning. This planning period typically focuses on
tactical planning issues such as meeting due dates, managing inventory levels, planning material
deliveries and resource loads, and making sourcing decisions. Capacity- and material-feasible
planning occur across medium- and long-term planning.
You use the following types of fences when using solvers:
Start of Time This is the beginning time boundary, before which time
doesn’t exist. Orders and changes aren’t recognized
before this point in time. Used with the end of time, the
region defines the time period within which the system
recognizes orders and changes. Solvers don’t recognize
times before the start of time.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 6 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Early Fence This is the beginning time of the interval within which
solvers process the elements of the material- and capacity-
feasible plans. You usually set the early fence to the
current date.
Current Time This is the current date and time as set by the system.
This fence is used to define various time offsets respected
by the planning solvers.
Capacity Fence The date and time that solvers begin ignoring capacity
violations. After the date, the Material Planning, Feasible
Planning, and LP Solvers ignore violations; however, the
Optimizer doesn’t use this date when it processes capacity
violations. If the capacity fence intersects an aggregate
capacity bucket, then aggregate capacity violations are
respected for the current bucket interval but ignored for
the succeeding bucket intervals.
Late Fence The LP Solver and Iterative Repair Solver use this fence
as a point to distinguish the planning horizon. They
cannot schedule task after this fence.
End of Time This is the concluding time boundary. Time doesn’t exist
after this date. Solvers don’t recognize orders or changes
after this date.
The planning horizon for the Material Planning and Feasible Planning Solvers spans the time
between the early fence and the end of time. The planning horizon for the LP Solver and the
Optimizer spans the time between the early time fence and the late time fence.
Each solver is designed to behave in certain ways with respect to fences. For example, the
Material Planning Solver is set to respect the early time fence by not rescheduling any tasks
that begin before the fence.
Planning servers also contain several utilities that use time fences. The Expand utility
reschedules tasks as close to the late fence as possible without creating material or capacity
violations. The Compress utility reschedules tasks as close to the early fence as possible withoutcreating material or capacity violations.
The early fence provides a boundary before which solvers, the Optimizer, and the Compress
and Expand utilities cannot move tasks. As a general rule, the region before the early fence
is frozen to the planning solvers.
Each solver and the utilities process planning conditions work with time fences. You also
maintain tasks within time fences.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 7
PlanningConditions
MaterialPlanningSolver
FeasiblePlanningSolver
LP Solver Optimizer Expand/CompressUtilities
ManualResched.
Reschedule
tasks before
Early Fence
No By
Exception
No No No Yes
Move orders
before Early
Fence
No By
Exception
No No No Yes
Create new
orders before
Early Fence
No By
Exception
No By
Exception
No NA
Respect Late
Fence
No No Yes Yes Yes No
Recognize
violations
before Early
Fence
NA No No No NA NA
Respect
Capacity
Fence
Yes Yes Yes No No No
Beginning
Fence
Ending Fence
Boundaries
Early
Fence
End of
Time
Early
Fence
End of
Time
Early
Fence
Late Fence
Early
Fence
Late Fence
Early
Fence
Late Fence
Start of
Time
End of
Time
Pegged Chain Processing for Solvers
In determining feasible plans, the solvers use pegged chains that tie tasks and top-level demand
together. In doing so, solvers can explicitly track and record which supplies they are using tosatisfy what demands.
The following diagram shows an example of how demand is linked with its supply through
pegged chains. Although the diagram suggests a left-to-right flow, pegged chains appear in the
Supply Chain Viewer on a time line that flows backward from how the example appears.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 8 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Pegged chain example
In the example Task A, the sales order shipment represents the top-level demand for the blue
bicycle. The pegging records that Task B supplies this top-level demand by transferring the
supply. Task B, in turn, places the demand for the bicycle on the transferred-from business unit
and is pegged/satisfied by Task C. This relationship continues down the chain as illustrated, so
that all the tasks in the chain are linked and their supply eventually serves the top-level demand
for Task A as recorded in the pegging.
Top-level demand is the highest level in a bill of material (BOM) hierarchy. Independent demand
is a type of top-level demand. Using pegged chains, the planning solvers can:
• Move the entire pegged chain when tasks need to be moved, resolving capacity violations and
fixing late supplies. The movement helps maintain material requirements planning (MRP)-likeproperties, such as lot-for-lot behavior, and minimizes excess inventory.
• Develop more intelligent heuristics that enable you to see the entire cumulative downstream
effects on the plan directly as a task is moved.
• Provide demand priority data to help support manual decisions. For example, if you move a
task manually, you can easily tell which demands the movement affects.
• Provide demand priority data to help make detailed automated decisions. For example, the
system can resolve a capacity overload by selecting candidates to move later based on the
priorities and lateness preferences of the pegged demands.
Using Solvers to Process a Plan
How you use solvers depends on the objectives of your plan. There isn’t a defined order for
running each solver or a predefined set of rules that you must include in a solver run. You can,
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 9
for example, use solvers to determine when you intervene to produce a feasible plan. You can
alter the flow of tasks to meet specific planning needs.
Example of using solvers to process feasible plans
To create a material- and capacity-feasible plan, use the following steps:
1. Use the Roll Forward utility to move past-due tasks to a valid time in the future. You can
automatically roll forward active phases or you can use a Planning server to work with the
task you want to roll forward.
For more information about Roll Forward phases, see “Setting Up Production Planning”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 1 0 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
2. Set up the Production DataLink to generate an initial material plan using one of the following
solvers:
� Material Planning Solver: Use this solver to generate an initial material plan. Because
this is the initial plan, you can run it in either Regenerative or Net Change mode.
� LP Solver: Use this solver to generate an initial plan when there are more complex trade-
off decisions in the supply chain network. These decisions might include sourcing,
alternate resources, item substitution, or material allocations based on demand priority
decisions. This is a regenerative process in which all independent demands are
rescheduled to their due date and all tasks with status of Planned are deleted. You can
run the Feasible Planning Solver after you run the LP Solver to create a plan that isfeasible.
� Feasible Planning Solver: Use this solver to create a plan that ensures material andresource capacity is available to meet the plan.
When the initial plan isn’t created lot-for-lot, such as with the LP Solver or with the Fixed
Period option in material planning, the Feasible Planning Solver may create temporary excess
inventory in the plan.
3. Review and make manual changes to the plan. The system provides you with a number of
options that you can use to review and resolve tasks with late material supplies, to repair
various problems with the plan, and plan for resources. The following options are available:
� Planning workbenches provide a way for you to interact with the plan using an Internet
browser. Using the workbenches, you can change order quantities, dates, and tasks. You can
also freeze tasks, cancel existing orders, or delete new planned orders.
� A Planning Scorecard provides a way for you to review the number of constraint violations,
the score, and counts for each type of constraint. The Planning Scorecard is available
through an Internet browser or through the Advanced Planning Client.
� Gantt and histogram charts and spreadsheets assist you to locate and resolve problems in the
plan. Use a Planning server to access these options. Gantt charts and histograms are
available through the Advanced Planning Client only. Spreadsheets are available through
the Internet browser and the Advanced Planning Client.
� Pegging Gantt charts show you the pegged relationships between the top-level demand and
dependent demand tasks. Right-click a task in the Gantt chart and select Solver Pegging.
You can review the forward, backward, or entire pegged chain for the task. Use a Planning
server to access this option. Pegging Gantt charts are available in the Advanced Planning
Client only.
� Task property sheets are available for you to make changes to a single or multiple tasks. For
example, you can change the duration or the end time of a late purchase order. Use a
Planning server to access this option. Task property sheets are available through the
Advanced Planning Client.
� The Modify Resources to Repair utility makes it possible to define which resources should
be repaired when you run the solvers. You can use this utility before you run the initial plan.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 1 1
Use a Planning server to access this option. You can identify resources to repair persistently
when setting up resources or while working with data using the Advanced Planning Client.
When changing which resources to repair through the Advanced Planning Client, the
changes are only retained for that data model while in-memory within the Planning server.
� The Late Supplies Inquiry enables you to view and define how the Feasible Planning Solver
should handle supplies not available on time to meet demand. Use a Planning server to
access this option. The inquiry is available in the Advanced Planning Client only.
� The Unfulfilled Demand Inquiry enables you to view demand with insufficient pegged
supply and unmet safety-stock requirements. Use a Planning server to access this option.
The inquiry is available in the Advanced Planning Client only.
4. Run the Feasible Planning Solver.
The Feasible Planning Solver uses the existing plan and ensures that it is a material- and,
optionally, a capacity-feasible plan. You can run the solver multiple times using different
options, giving you the opportunity to make manual changes or to view the current state of
the plan. In this way, you use the solver as a powerful net-change mode. Alternatively, all
phases of generating the final plan can be automated into a single run.
5. Develop a detailed plan manually using the Line Schedule Editor. This is an optional step.
You use the Line Schedule Editor primarily for short-term planning. After developing a
detailed plan, you might need to change the early fence date to separate the new short-term
planning horizon from the medium-term horizon. This fence indicates that up to this point
you are satisfied with the plan.
Subsequent solvers assume that you will handle material and capacity exceptions before this
fence and won’t make any short-term planning changes before the fence. While you use the
editor for short-term planning, it may still be useful for intervening in special cases in the
medium-term horizon.
For more information about the Line Schedule Editor, see “Setting Up Production Planning”.
Overview of the Material Planning Solver
The Material Planning Solver creates a simple material plan to give an accurate picture of the
lead-time and materials necessary to satisfy all top-level demands. Material planning handles
production, purchases, and transfer supply task plans in a lot-for-lot manner, unless you use the
fixed period of supply option or order modifiers. Supplies are created just in time to satisfy theirdemand. Before it creates any new planned orders, the solver reschedules or uses existing orders.
The Material Planning Solver uses existing supply or creates supply for all demands in the
system. However, when supply is planned for demand and there isn’t enough lead time or the
demand is before the early fence, the system records the relationship using pegged chains and
creates supply as early as possible after the early fence. When creating this supply, the solver
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 1 2 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
explodes the primary routing using the primary resource and doesn’t consider alternate routings,
alternate resources, or the cost of getting supplies on time.
When you run the Material Planning Solver, it uses backward planning techniques to create
planned orders by exploding them earlier in time and down the bill of material structure while
respecting all relevant task calendars and legal times. The solver uses the following planning
modes:
Regenerative When Material Planning is run in this mode, all tasks or
orders with a status of Planned are deleted from existing
data and a material plan is generated for all inventory
items. With this mode, all previous supply and demand
relationships (recorded in the pegging) are erased and all
independent demand is rescheduled to its original due
date.
Net Change When you use this mode to run the Material Planning
Solver, the system produces a material plan only for those
items that have shortages. This includes subassemblies
and raw materials. When there is a material shortage
recorded by the pegged chain, the entire part that is in
demand is planned again.
When a supply is late for a demand but is pegged, it isn’t considered a material shortage.
When a part is planned for again in the Net Change mode, all planned supplies are deleted
and any end-demands for that part are returned to their due date. In addition, all pegging
history for that part is deleted. All other parts remain unchanged.
The new net change ignores and may cause material shortages due to late demands as orders are
rescheduled to satisfy supply. You can eliminate these shortages by running the FeasiblePlanning Solver or using the Planning server to run the Late Supplies Inquiry.
Overview of the Feasible Planning Solver
The Feasible Planning Solver ensures material feasibility for all resolvable material violations
between the early fence and end of time. If you use the Make Plan Capacity Feasible option, it
ensures capacity feasibility as well. The solver is designed to start from any initial plan and turn
it into an executable plan. It tries to do this while making only minimal changes to the existing
plan.
When the solver is invoked, it checks any current pegging for consistency and maintains that
pegging. The only situation for which the solver modifies the pegging is when it is necessary to
make the plan material- and capacity-feasible. If pegging doesn’t exist, the Feasible Planning
Solver creates the pegging based on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 1 3
If you have frozen tasks, model errors, or insufficient lead time in the planning horizon, the
Feasible Planning Solver may encounter capacity or material violations that cannot be
resolved. In these cases, the solver identifies unavoidable problems and makes the rest of
the plan feasible.
The most basic use of the Feasible Planning Solver is to have all parameters for it unselected.
The following sections describe how the solver processes a plan when you use this mode and all
other modes.
Verifying Current Supply and Demand Quantities
The solver checks to ensure that the current supply and demand quantities aren’t in disagreement
with any existing pegging. If they disagree, the solver adjusts the pegging to make it consistent.
Then it records the supply and demand quantities for the item, inventory constraints, and item
supplies.
Satisfying Unmet Demand
When the solver finds an unmet demand, it does the following:
• Looks for unpegged supply that is earlier in time and pegs it with the demand. If the supply
isn’t already pegged, it rescheduled it just in time for the new demand.
• Checks to see if the Planning server histogram at the end of time (plus a base safety stock,
which is the level of the stock period at the end of time) indicates that the plan is short in
supply. If it is, the solver creates a minimum amount of supply either to move the histogram
up to a positive value or to satisfy the current demand.
• After it makes the histogram positive, the solver schedules and pegs unpegged supplies that
occur later than the unmet demand, avoiding permanent excess stock.
The Inventory histogram provides a representation of the projected quantity for an item. The
histogram may be negative after unmet demand is satisfied. If a previous solver has decided
that a supply is for a demand as reflected by the pegging, the Feasible Planning Solver
respects that demand as met, even if the supply is late. The late supplies are corrected if you
select the Allow Rescheduling check box.
Verifying Demand Priority for Frozen Tasks
At the start of feasible planning runs, the solver verifies that the frozen priorities are assigned
correctly in case the frozen status has changed between Feasible Planning Solver runs.
The demand priority on a task is based on the highest-priority top-level demand that the task
supplies. For example, if a production task supplies a priority 10, 5, and 3 demand, the priority of
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 1 4 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
that production task is 3, the highest priority. The system assumes that all subtasks under a parent
have the same priority.
If you change the priority of a task, the existing pegging, in most cases, won’t recognize the
change. If you regenerate the plan, the change will be recognized only for end demands. All
pegging is erased using the Regenerate mode, so component supplies return to the default 999
priority.
If a task is frozen, it has a system-reserved priority of zero. You can see the priority value by
using the Demand Prioritization option in PeopleSoft Production Planning. As with other
priorities, all component tasks inherit the zero priority. When the plan is processed, the Planning
engine interprets the zero priority as unmovable in the forward direction and these tasks are given
the highest priority. In this case, the system does not assume that all subtasks under the parent
have the same priority. Step 3 of a 10-step production process may be frozen, since the priority
zero means a task cannot be moved forward; only component supply for steps 1 through 3 will
have the zero priority. If step 5 demands a component, that component will reflect the priority of
the highest-priority end demand.
Ensuring Positive On-Hand Quantity at the Early Fence
If a supply ends after the early fence and its pegged demand starts before the early fence, the
Feasible Planning Solver cannot resolve this infeasibility without violating the early fence. In
this situation, the solver uses the demand’s move preference in the Late Supplies Inquiry and
either schedules the supply in or schedules the demand out.
Sourcing Allocations and Options to Reduce Lead Time
If you enable material reallocation, alternate routings, or item substitution, the Feasible Planning
Solver tries to shorten the lead time of pegged chains that are late. The solver goes through the
pegged chains in priority order and tries to make them on time. It selects the highest-level late
demands down each branch of the supply chain and tries to find alternate ways to get the supply
based on the reallocation methods you select.
If the solver fails to find a feasible source of supply for a particular demand down a branch, it
tries to find an alternate way to get that demand’s supply higher up in the pegged chain. For
example, you might build bicycles and have a late supply only for tires. If the solver can’t find an
alternate way to replenish the tires on time, it looks for alternate ways to replenish wheels. If it
can’t find wheels on time, it looks for wheel assemblies, and if the solver can’t find wheelassemblies, it looks for bicycles.
Another example might be when an MRP has a demand for bicycles on the early fence and there
isn’t a supply on the schedule. This means that the bicycles are late, the wheel assemblies are
late, and so on down the chain. However, in this case the solver begins the search at the highestlevel of demand. So it begins and ends the search looking for an alternate source of bicycles.
To make a plan material feasible, the Feasible Planning Solver uses the following steps when youselect all options:
1. First, the solver looks for unpegged supply for the primary item when any options are
selected on the page. This is supply that isn’t pegged to another demand.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 1 5
2. Failing the previous first step, and if Allow Item Substitution is selected, the solver looks for
unpegged supply for substitute items in the full amount required to meet the demand.
3. Failing the second step, and if Allow Alternate Routings is selected, the solver looks at all
transfers, production, and purchases for the supply.
4. Failing the third step, and if the Allow Material Reallocation option is selected, the solver
reallocates the item’s supply on the primary item to the highest-priority demands.
5. Failing the fourth step, and if the Allow Material Reallocation option is selected along with
the Allow Item Substitution option, the solver reallocates all primary and all valid substitutes
to the highest-priority demands.
When supply is reallocated across substituted items, the solver doesn’t consider the priority
of the substitute defined in the bill of materials. For example, a task may lose its primary
item to a higher-priority task that has the reallocated part as a secondary substitute.
Reducing Excess Inventory
At the end of the Feasible Planning Solver run, regardless of the sourcing and allocation options,
the solver tries to reduce excess inventory. Where possible, the solver exchanges a feasible
existing supply for a feasible planned supply and deletes leftover planned tasks and cancels
leftover existing tasks. If you don’t ignore safety stock, the excess clean-up won’t delete suppliessuch that the stock level drops below the current safety limit in the period when the supply ends.
Making the Plan Capacity Feasible
The Make Plan Capacity Feasible option invokes a capacity repair feature when you run the
Feasible Planning Solver. When you make the plan capacity-feasible, the Feasible Planning
Solver resolves aggregate capacity violations by moving tasks, in time, to alternate resources. Or,
if Use Alternate Routings is selected, the solver moves tasks to alternate production options that
have a different bill of resource but the same bills of material.
The capacity-feasible option resolves aggregate capacity violations while maintaining
material feasibility. It doesn’t resolve detailed resource violations.
The Capacity phase of the solver tries to first find opportunities earlier in time to place the task;
failing that, it schedules supplies later to ensure capacity feasibility.
When looking earlier, the solver makes decisions based on the available and alternate resources
and routings, and selects the resource and routings that cause the least change in the backward
direction to the parent task’s start time. For example, if the solver has the choice to schedule a
task on the primary resource two days earlier, on the alternate resource one day earlier, or on the
alternate routing with a primary resource one hour earlier, the solver selects the alternate routing.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 1 6 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
When scheduling tasks later for capacity, the solver tries to keep the highest-weighted priority
items in a bucket when it determines which tasks remain in a resource bucket and which ones are
moved. The Feasible Planning Solver uses the following rules to determine which buckets to
repair:
• Buckets that are under capacity are skipped unless other tasks are moved into them from
previous periods and they are pushed over capacity.
• Resources that are set to ignore capacity violations aren’t repaired.
• Frozen, complete, or canceled tasks are never moved using the capacity-feasible option. Tasks
that are components of frozen tasks in the pegged chain aren’t moved later in time because this
would create a material shortage.
After the solver defines movable tasks in an aggregate capacity bucket, it moves the tasks based
on how the resource is allocated. The resource allocation determines whether the task consumes
the resource at the start of the task, at the finish of the task, or in proportion to the fraction of the
task that overlaps the bucket. The solver uses the following process to move tasks:
• It first looks at resources that can be repaired. These are the ones that are not selected to Ignore
Violations.
• Then it determines which resource to repair in conjunction with the first bucket with a
violation.
• Next, the solver selects which tasks that are assigned to the resource in that bucket to move.
� It first tries to move all the movable tasks and their component chains earlier in priority order.
� If this doesn’t repair the capacity bucket, it then moves the remaining candidates to later
buckets using advanced algorithms based on the bucket allocation strategy, the task
priorities, and the quantity of capacity consumed by the task.
When the solver tries to repair aggregate resources, By Unit implies that the task consumes
multiple resource units over units of time. By Time indicates that only a certain amount of time
can be consumed using that bucket's resource. A Yes indicates that the solver tries to fix the
bucket. A No indicates that it ignores the bucket.
CapacityMeasurement
ResourceAllocation
ResourceAllocation
ResourceAllocation
Start Finish Proportional
By Unit Yes Yes Yes
By Time No No Yes
Buckets for resources that you select to Ignore Capacity violations aren’t repaired, regardless
of the resource allocation or resource bucket size.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 1 7
The next sections describe how the Capacity Feasible Solver moves tasks later using the Start,
Finish, and Proportional allocation strategies.
Using Resource Allocation at Start or Finish (by Unit Only)
The resource allocation method tries to fit the highest sum of weighted priorities into the bucket.
The goal is to get the most product value into the bucket. In this case, value is determined by the
weighted priority, but it is tempered by the size of the task.
Using Proportional Allocation (by Unit or Time)
Using the proportional resource allocation method, tasks might consume resources in several
buckets. The goal of the method is to move lowest-weighted priority tasks first, proceeding until
either the bucket is repaired or the solver has attempted to move all tasks out of the bucket. Itorders tasks one at a time until the bucket’s capacity is filled.
To move tasks, the proportional resource allocation method uses the following steps:
1. By priority, with higher values (999) moving first.
2. By lateness tolerances, where late tasks aren’t moved.
3. By absolute lateness, where the number of days determines what is moved.
4. By tasks with the latest start time.
Determining Weighted Priorities for Capacity Planning
This section describes how the system uses weighted priorities and how weighting interacts with
different resource allocation methods. The Feasible Planning Solver uses weighting and lateness
tolerances to determine which tasks to move.
The demand priority is the placing of importance on independent demand. The lateness tolerance
represents how sensitive your enterprise is to not meeting demand requirements that fall within
the specified priority range. Lateness tolerance data is a table of priorities and a tolerance that
indicate the lateness you are willing to tolerate for that priority of top-level demand. The pegged
chain links the independent demand to tasks associated with dependent demand.
You can set a demand priority from 1 to 999, with 1 as the most important level. Using the
demand priority numerical value, you can then assign a number of days as the lateness tolerance
level your enterprise determines to be acceptable for tasks to fulfill the demand. The following is
an example of how the two values are combined.
A top-level demand with a priority lessthan or equal to:
Is considered tolerably late as long as itslateness tolerance doesn’t exceed thisnumber of days:
19 1
29 2
59 4
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 1 8 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
A top-level demand with a priority lessthan or equal to:
Is considered tolerably late as long as itslateness tolerance doesn’t exceed thisnumber of days:
69 5
99 7
199 14
999 20
When weighted priorities are the same, you usually keep high-priority late tasks in a bucket and
move lower-priority tasks that aren’t as late.
Use the Demand Prioritization option to define prioritization rules and the demand priority.
PeopleSoft Production Planning priorities are set at the business-unit level. This provides more
flexibility to PeopleSoft Production Planning in modeling production runs for different business
units.
Computing Lateness, Lateness Tolerance, and Relative Lateness
Lateness is the amount of time top-level demand is delayed beyond the demand due date. This
measurement isn’t used directly to compute the weighted priority, but it is used to determine the
independent demand's lateness tolerance and the relative lateness.
The lateness tolerance is computed from the tolerances you define and indicates the relative
importance of task priority groups. If the independent demand's lateness is on or beyond this
tolerance, the independent demand is given a higher weighting.
Relative lateness is a scaled, absolute measure of the lateness of a task. The scale is from 1 to
100. For example, if the worst lateness of a task in a bucket is 5 days, then for all tasks in the
bucket, 5 days becomes a relative lateness of 100. If a task is 4 days late, the system assigns it a
relative lateness of 80. If a task isn’t late, the system assigns it a relative lateness of 0. If a task is
2 days late (using the calculation 100 x (2/5) = 40), the system sets the relative lateness value at
40. The system uses the formula to break ties when tasks have equal priority and have the samestatus relative to intolerably late settings.
Weighted Priority
The weighted priority is a number that is a mix between the task priority, the lateness tolerance
data, and the relative lateness of a task. The lateness tolerance data is part of the environment and
is related to the priority of the task. The Planning engine uses the following formula to determine
the most important tasks:
wt = (1000 - pt )*10000 + yt *(1000)+ ((lt / l*)*100)
The following values are a part of the formula:
t Task.
lt Lateness of task t. This is actually the amount of time past
the tolerably late limit for a task.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 1 9
l* Maximum of all lateness values.
pt Priority of task t: 999 for unimportant, 0 for frozen.
wt Weighted priority for task t.
yt Zero if the task isn’t late or is tolerably late, and 1 if the
task is on or beyond the lateness tolerance.
The formula works as follows:
• The weighted priority is a 7-digit number.
• The first three digits represent the relative demand priority of the task. This value ranges from
1 to 999.
• The fourth digit can be 0 or 1. It is set to 1 if the task is at or beyond its lateness tolerance.
• The three right-most digits (the fifth, sixth, and seventh digits) represent the lateness relative to
other late tasks. The maximum lateness value for a task is 100. Tasks that aren’t late are equal
to 0.
Improving Plan Quality
The Lateness and Stock Adjustment Phases help you increase the quality of the material- and
capacity-feasible plan.
Using the Lateness Phase, the solver looks for all possible ways to source end items and to reduce
their overall lateness. It does an exhaustive search for gaps in capacity, substitutes, and alternaterouting options (including production with different BOMs) defined in the model.
The repair first searches on late independent demands in priority order, working on intolerably
late orders first. These demands include transfer, forecasts, and sales orders. The search tries to
get the demand on time, or as close as possible to the due date. If it cannot make the demand ontime, it reduces the lateness of the order as much as possible.
The Lateness Phase potentially creates and deletes multiple orders. It shouldn’t be used if
you are trying to minimize “nervous” behavior in the plan.
The Stock Adjustment Phase tries to reduce temporary excess by scheduling supplies just in time
for their demands. In addition, it tries to restore any missed safety-stock periods by scheduling
late any demands that are a lower priority than safety stock.
To reduce nervousness in this phase, you can set the resolution in the Planning server’s Main
Environment. The Stock Adjustment Phase checks this value and won’t reschedule to reduce
excess or repair safety stock if the distance of the move is less than the resolution.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 2 0 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Checking Effectivities
If you don’t interrupt the Feasible Planning Solver, and the selected options have finished
processing, the system checks to see that all the planned production in the system is placed in aneffective time range.
If a planned task exists outside an effective range, the solver deletes it and the demand is sourced
again with effective options. Any new sourced tasks are made material- and, optionally,
capacity-feasible according to the current solver settings.
Overview of the LP Solver
Linear programming provides a global view of the supply chain problem. The solver models the
planning constraints into a system of linear inequalities and then solves this linearly relaxed
system to obtain an optimal solution. Whereas the solution contains global and optimal
information of the problem, it is a linear estimation, containing little task-specific information.
To address this, the solver automatically runs a post processor that provides a real, task-basedsolution for planning.
The post processor is based on logic and procedures that build a task-level schedule from
aggregate solutions, such as sourcing, equipment selection, and general timing. The aggregate
solution is converted into a task-specific plan on a detailed timeline. This makes it possible forthe features of the LP Solver to work with the other solvers.
The LP Solver modeling process extracts basic supply chain information from the Planning
engine data structures and generates an aggregated supply chain model in linear programming
form. Typical LP objective functions might include; penalties for violations, such as low
inventory or late delivery, minimized cost, and maximized profit. Objective functions are real-
valued mathematical functions that are optimized. These objective functions try to maximize or
minimize a particular objective.
The LP Solver’s global perspective is especially important in PeopleSoft Production and
Enterprise Planning and can also prove helpful in single-facility planning when there are
numerous production alternatives competing for shared resources.
The Feasible Planning Solver and LP Solver complement each other. You use the LP Solver to
generate an initial plan when there are more complex trade-off decisions in the supply chain
network. These decisions might include sourcing decisions, alternate resources use, part
substitution, or allocations. When you have a large amount of data, the LP Solver gives you a
more balanced starting point after which you can use the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain more
detailed solutions.
The LP Solver doesn’t ensure a material- or capacity-feasible plan. You can use LP Solver
solutions to run the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a viable plan.
When you use the LP Solver, an automated procedure extracts all necessary information from
existing planning data structures and constructs an appropriate LP model of the supply chain.You have various controls over the construction of the LP model, that include:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 2 1
• Specifying the number of days, weeks, and months to use in breaking up the planning horizon
into discrete periods.
• Defining standard lot sizes, by item or globally, used in calibrating the average activities
modeled in the LP.
• Providing a number of weighting factors that determine how a monetary unit of cost or profit is
traded off against a violation of constraints, such as stock levels, delivery milestones, and
equipment capacity.
In modeling the supply chain, linear programming simplifies and stylizes real-world operations in
the following ways:
• The LP Solver uses algebraic relations to represent conditions that would be called constraints
or objectives in planning. These relations must be expressed in terms of weighted sums of
variables representing levels of production and distribution activity.
• LP Solver decision variables can take on any value. Activity levels don’t need to correspond to
specific discrete lot sizes. The post processor restores the actual lot sizes during its processing.
• For any activity, the consumption of resources and the production of output are proportional to
the level of activity. For any resource or material, total usage or production is the sum of the
usage/production of all activities.
• In linear programming, time is typically represented as a sequence of discrete time intervals
with durations considerably longer than one second. Computational burden limits the number
of time intervals that can be included in a model. Depending on the time horizon and the
number of items, units, and options in the supply chain, a practical time interval could be, at
best, a day and may have to be as long as a week or a month.
• An LP Solver model of many facilities and options doesn’t explicitly represent individual
tasks. Rather, the LP Solver solves for average rates of production or shipment over each
modeled time interval.
• In return for these approximations, an LP Solver model permits a global view of the supply
chain over a finite time horizon. It explicitly considers differences in production technology
and resources among units and further recognizes the limitations in the distribution network.
With the big picture in mind, the LP model globally sources production and distribution among
units and over time to make the best use of available resources.
Enforcing Constraints
LP Solver supply chain modeling considers and enforces the following major categories of
constraints:
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 2 2 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Material/Inventory Balance If you view supply chain planning as a model to describe
the physical movement of goods, this category of
constraints basically says that in each time period at each
physical location, the goods that go in minus the goods
that go out should equal the accumulation at that location.
The constraints also enforce boundaries on safety and
excess stock.
Resource Capacity The main challenge facing planners is to allocate
resources effectively throughout the enterprise in given
situations such as demand from forecast. It is
fundamentally important to enterprise planners to be able
to produce a plan that is feasible with respect to the
existing resources.
Meet Top-Level Demand Meets sales order, supply, and demand transfer types, and
forecasts demands with or without back-order penalties.
Item Substitution The supplies of the alternate items should meet the
demands of the primary item.
Planning Features Processed by the LP Solver
When you use the LP Solver, you need to set up only a limited number of additional parameters
that determine planning periods and various objective function configurations. Most of the
functions the solver uses aren’t visible to you, but determine the results of your plan. This sectiondescribes PeopleSoft product features that the LP Solver considers during processing.
Objective Function Configurations
The LP Solver finds an optimal aggregate plan with respect to a specified objective function
subject to resource constraints. You can configure the objective function through the LP
parameter settings. For instance, the solver finds a plan with minimum sales order lateness if you
set the carrying cost to zero, or it can solve for a plan to minimize inventory carrying cost if you
set a high carrying cost factor and a low lateness penalty factor.
Item Substitution
The LP Solver uses item substitutions on existing orders for which the task status and the Remap
flag allow substitutions. In post processing, any substitutions made by the solver remain intact.
Substitution choices are based on overall cost. If the priority sequence defined for the item isn’t
by cost, then the solver can decide to create a new supply for a substitute rather than for the
primary item. The solver doesn’t model substitutions on transfers, sales orders, or forecasts.
Use-Up Components
The LP model doesn’t include any purchase or production variables that supply an item in periods
after the item’s phase-out date. When it uses production options with co-products, the solver uses
the latest phase-out date across all co-products. If the date occurs within a planning period, then
the solver enables supplies for the period if most of the period is legal.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 2 3
In the LP model, the safety-stock level is reduced to zero after the phase-out date. If the solver
finds late arriving demand for a phased-out item, it stockpiles supplies to satisfy the demand. It
does so if the cost of stockpiling is less than the cost of substituting and less than the penalty for
leaving the demand unsatisfied.
Alternate BOM and Routings
This makes it possible for the LP Solver to look for the most cost-effective routing for a
production option. You have to define the production option for valid combinations of BOM and
routing.
Co-Products and By-Products
The LP Solver models co-products and by-products but doesn’t make a distinction between the
two. It reflects the appropriate credits and debits for recycle and waste by-products. If the
disposal of a by-product isn’t explicitly modeled in the supply chain, the costs of the production
variables in the solver are increased to include the disposal charge based on output quantity and
the standard cost of the by-product. If the reuse of by-products isn’t explicitly modeled in the
supply chain, the costs of the production variables in the solver are decreased to reflect a recycle
credit.
If the supply chain explicitly models the reuse of by-products, a recycle credit is automatically
recognized by the solver through the avoided cost of additional supplies of the item. However, if
the supply of the recycled by-product can only be partially reused, the solver uses artificial
variables to absorb the supply and creates a cost credit for the excess supply. The cost credits
derive from the standard costs of the by-product.
Multiple Effective Ranges on Production Options
Production options are included in the LP supply chain when the option is available for use in
planned production orders. The LP Solver allows for multiple, intermittent effective ranges on a
production option. The solver calculates an effective range for each alternative mode of aproduction operation, such as a combination of equipment choices and component substitutes.
The effective range for a production mode is the intersection of the current range and the effective
range or ranges for the production option itself. If an effective range for a production option ends
within a solver period, then the period includes only production variables for the effective option
if most of the period is effective.
Variable Capacity Over Time
The solver queries the resource history to determine available capacity over the LP Solver period.
Forecast Fulfillment
The LP Solver uses the forecast fulfillment process to manage forecasted demand over a period of
time. The process makes it possible for the solver to divide the total forecast demand into
portions so that you can meet certain portions of the forecast if the total forecast cannot be met
entirely. The solver can either meet the supply shortage during the same planning bucket in
which the shortage occurs or carry it over into the next bucket.
The LP Solver tries to fulfill forecasts and moves the forecast if it’s not feasible. Using post
processing, it identifies unfixable problems in the plan induced by planning issues such as
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 2 4 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
unmovable tasks and negative on-hand inventory. Post processing sizes and schedules forecast
shipment tasks consistent with the sourcing and timing of the aggregate forecast shipments in the
solver solution, producing a feasible and task-oriented plan.
Minimize Inventory Without Excess Stock Constraints
When reasonable default storage costs are provided for inventory storage, the LP Solver
automatically minimizes inventory carryover by item. You use post processing and other solvers
to review a plan and try to reduce excess inventory and work in progress. The solver’s solution
may contain excess inventory if it is cost-effective or is unavoidable. Tasks created by postprocessing can deliver their supply early if it’s part of the solver’s solution.
Partial-Order Sourcing
The LP Solver models aggregate levels of production and transfers. It allows partial sourcing at
the aggregate level. For the most part, the solver uses only a single aggregate source for an itemin a given solver time period.
As aggregate supplies are turned into individual tasks, some demands may receive partial
sourcing, such as when one aggregate supply becomes exhausted and the sourcing moves to
another aggregate supply. For an item with multiple aggregate sources used in the solver solution
in a solver time period, splitting orders should happen to only one demand for each aggregate
source used.
Firmed-Planned Order
The LP Solver tries to reschedule or cancel an existing order according to its task status and flags.
It cannot move frozen tasks.
Supply and Demand Transfer Types
Supply and demand transfers, also called one-sided transfers, are planned for existing interunit
transfers where the LP Solver processes the transfer item for only a single location, reducing the
time it takes for the Planning engine to run distribution and master plans. During the processing,
the solver doesn’t process data, such as bills and routings, associated with the item from either the
shipping or receiving location.
The solver uses the transfer type value to determine how to model a transfer item. A transfer type
is a transfer option attribute that determines which business unit to use to model the transfer of
the item. You can model an item in the To Unit, From Unit, or both business units.
Overview of Iterative Repair/Optimizer
The PeopleSoft Production Planning Iterative Repair/Optimizer Solver generates schedules and
plans that are material- and capacity-feasible. You control the Optimizer by specifying what is
important in the schedule using weights of constraints you set up with the Control Panel in the
Planning server. The Optimizer is also exception-driven. It only tries to fix the problems. This
enables the plan to remain somewhat static instead of having to be recreated for each planning
session.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 2 5
The Optimizer resolves problems either by adding or rescheduling tasks. Tasks are actions in
your PeopleSoft Production Planning model that create demand or provide supply. Tasks include
purchase order deliveries, forecasts, sales orders, subassembly production, final assembly, and
customer shipments. You can run Iterative Repair Solver by itself or as part of the overall
planning process. Iterative Repair doesn’t use pegged chains or demand priorities. Although it’s
not recommended, you can run Iterative Repair as the initial phase of the Feasible Planning
Solver.
During each of its phases, the Optimizer runs a series of iterations and repairs a series of
violations. After you run an iteration, the Optimizer scores the schedule and determines whether
to continue working on that iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables Iterative Repair
to recognize which constraints are violated as well as the order in which the violated constraints
should be repaired.
PeopleSoft Production Planning provides an optimal solution by solving multi-objective
problems. It also provides a simple way, through the Control Panel, to modify objectives that
match individual and dynamic preferences. The Iterative Repair method examines potential
schedules and chooses among them based on their fitness to multi-objective criteria. When it
reaches a point where it has a schedule that is as good as any that can be distinguished, such as a
zero score, it presents that schedule as an optimal schedule. Among Iterative Repair/Optimizer
features are the following:
• A single integrated solution simultaneously addresses material and capacity feasibility.
• A mix of business objectives, such as sales order performance and changeovers, drives the
optimal solution.
• Incrementally targeting of problems for quick response rather than requiring an MRP
regeneration. This approach is exception-based and based on net-change data.
You initialize an optimization session by loading your command files and setting the Planning
server Control Panel constraints to the desired weights. By setting the weights for the Control
Panel constraints, you identify and rank the restrictions to consider in PeopleSoft ProductionPlanning optimization calculations.
For more information about loading input files into a Planning server, see Setting Up
Command File and Source File Information.
Using the Production DataLink to Create a Master or Material Plan
Using the following set of steps, you can perform the planning requirements for extracting
planning data from PeopleTools, copying the data to a Planning server, loading the server, andreceiving planning messages.
To use the Production DataLink to create a master or material plan, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure item, inventory, and demand planning data from other PeopleSoft applications is
ready for use.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 2 6 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
2. Create a Planning server template and define a Process Scheduler Server. The template is a
one-time setup that you can use again and again. The Scheduler server is needed in order to
run the job.
3. Start the Process Scheduler server.
4. Start a Planning server. Make sure it’s the same one that you defined in the server template.
5. Set up the Production DataLink to create the planning model that you want to use to create
your plans. This includes defining which Planning engine solvers you want to process the
plan.
6. Create a Run Control ID to use to process the DataLink run.
7. Use command files to define a valid directory for storing the planning command files.
8. Run the Production DataLink job, noting the process instance that defines the job.
9. Review the Production DataLink job, using the Process Monitor to verify that the run was
successful.
10. After the job finishes, use available tools such as workbenches, scorecards, reports, and
planning messages to work with the plan. The Advanced Planning Client can also be used to
work with the plan.
11. Use the Generate Plan option to rerun the solvers until your enterprise requirements are
satisfied within the constraints of the plan.
12. Commit the plan by approving and applying planning messages.
Setting Up Run Types, Plan Types, Time Fences, and WIP/RollForward Options
The General page provides a way to define a number of parameters that control how the
Production DataLink processes data in your master plan or material plan. Using the page, you
can add or change the following parameters:
• Run Types define whether the Production DataLink run completely refreshes data in the
Planning engine or refreshes only transactional data created or changed since the last time you
ran a plan using the Production DataLink. Transactional data includes sales, transfer,production, and purchase orders, and quantity on hand.
• Currency code and rate define a single currency for the DataLink run when you have multiple
currencies.
• Plan types indicate how you want to plan with this DataLink setup.
• Previous master-plan information indicates when the last plan was run.
• Time fences establish the appropriate start and end fences of the planning horizon as well as
fences that control the planning process.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 2 7
• Order modifiers verify that the schedule enforces order quantities that fit the minimum,
maximum, multiple, and yield order modifier rules.
• Start-of-time purge removes all of the old planning data that is based on a previous start-time
fence you set during a previous planning session.
• Regenerated sourcing templates replace existing sourcing templates.
• Search depth defines how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine explodes while
solving sourcing and optimization issues.
• Inventory options define carrying cost rates and available balances and enable you to include or
omit inventory that isn’t in an Open status.
• Capacity options define whether you use work centers only, or all resources for capacity
planning purposes.
Defining General Time Fence Information
Usage Use the General: General page to access information about the
Production DataLink. This is the default page, and you use it to add or
change a number of PeopleSoft Production Planning parameters for the
Production DataLink.
Object Name RUN_PLS1000
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, General, General
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 2 8 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Production DataLink - General: General page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
Enter the business Unit for which you want to run the process. This is the inventory business unit
that links to your manufacturing business unit.
The Model ID is an identifier that you create to maintain this specific Production DataLink setup.
In add mode, it defaults to the run control ID. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses this model ID
when you’re ready to transfer the plan back into your PeopleSoft transaction system. The system
uses this along with the version identifier as the filename for the file that it creates during the
export process. For example, if you defined PLAN for the control ID and a version of v1, the
export file created during the export process is named v1_PLAN_export.sql.
Run Type
Select a Run Type from the following options:
Regenerative This run type completely refreshes data in the Planning
engine with input from the PeopleSoft database. Restart
the Planning server to clear all data from previous sessions
before refreshing it with regenerative plan data.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 2 9
Net Change This run type refreshes only planning data created or
changed since the last time you ran a master plan using the
Production DataLink. PeopleSoft Production Planning
applies net-change data to a session already running on the
Planning server. The net-change function applies to only
new items, forecasts, transfer orders, material stock
requests, production orders, production schedules, planned
production, purchase orders, and sales orders. PeopleSoft
Production Planning doesn’t use net change for other
static data such as bills, routings, and calendars.
Plan Type
Use the Plan Type to indicate how you want to plan with this DataLink setup. The following
values are available:
Simulation Plan A plan you use only to perform “what-if” simulations.
You can send a simulation plan back to the PeopleSoft
database only for reporting, not for execution.
Master Plan A plan you intend to execute by returning data to the
transactional system, for example to create orders and
reschedule orders. Running the master plan resets all net-
change data.
Plan Currency
If you want the Planning system to calculate cost values in a single currency when multiple
currency values are valid, use the Plan Currency group box. Use the box to define a single
currency code and currency rate type that you want the Production DataLink to use when it
creates the data model that will be loaded into the Planning engine.
Use the Currency Code field to define the single, common currency that you want the Planning
engine to use to model all costs. All the currency codes you set up using Define General Options
appear in the drop-down list. Use the Rate Type field to define the exchange rate the system
uses to convert costs from other currencies to the single currency code that you selected. You use
the fields if you are transferring stock from a business unit that uses a different currency from the
receiving unit.
The Production DataLink converts cost information that has been set up for the business unit in
terms of the values you specify in the box. For example, if you are transferring stock from
Mexican pesos to Canadian dollars, you can select to convert those values to a single base
currency, such as U.S. dollars. In doing so, you work with only a single base representation of
costs in your planning model.
The currency code and the exchange rate type aren’t sent to the Planning engine. The values
that the DataLink computes for the currency exchange appear in the Cost columns for
transfers, production, and purchase options. You access the option panels in the Planning
engine using the Modeling Options menu in the Data Browser.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 3 0 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Previous Master Plan
The Previous Master Plan group box displays the last Date and Time that the master plan was
run. If the Processed check box is selected, the master plan was run and the planning messages
resulting from that run were received into the PeopleSoft database using the Receive PlanningMessages process.
For more information about production plan processing, see “Committing the Production
Plan”.
Fences
In this group box, you can establish the appropriate start and end fences for the planning horizon
as well as set other time fences that control the planning process. Enter all time fences in
calendar days with respect to the current date.
Start Fence This is the beginning time boundary; no time exists before
this fence. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn’t
recognize any orders or changes before this date. After
the planning session starts, you can’t change this start
fence. Its value will usually be a negative number because
PeopleSoft Production Planning needs to capture past-due
activity. For example, if you use a value of -30,
PeopleSoft Production Planning loads all orders with due
dates up to 30 days or earlier than today’s date.
There may be a large time span between the time a sales order shipment is originally
requested and the time a product is actually shipped. Make sure that the Start Fence you
specify is early enough to include all of the past due sales orders for the demand that you
specify in the plan.
End Fence This is the concluding time boundary; no time exists after
this fence. PeopleSoft Production Planning doesn’t
recognize any orders or changes after this date. Make sure
to define the end fence so that it is equal to or greater than
the longest lead-time of any item in your system.
Purchase Fence The date when the system considers all past due purchase
order deliveries available. For example, if you use a
purchase fence value of 0, PeopleSoft Production Planning
recognizes any past due open purchase order deliveries
available on today’s date. You usually set the purchase
order fence between the early fence and late fence.
However, this setting depends on your company’s
particular scheduling practices.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 3 1
Capacity Fence The number of days after which the capacity for all
resources is no longer considered when you generate a
capacity-feasible plan.
Early Fence The beginning of the interval within which the Planning
engine operates on the schedule. You usually set the early
fence to the current date. However, if you want the
Planning engine to act on past due orders, you can set the
early fence to a negative number. This enables the system
to recognize any late orders or missed promise dates that
occur between the start date and the current date. It is
recommended that the early fence be set to at least one
day later than the start fence.
Late Fence The end of the interval within which the Planning engine
operates on the schedule. The combination of early fence
and late fence identifies the period for which the Planning
engine will plan new supply or reschedule existing tasks.
Level Fence The earliest time that the leveling constraint classes take
effect. You use this fence when you generate an
executable schedule.
Order Modifiers, Start of Time Purge, Regenerate Sourcing Templates, and SearchDepth
Select the Use Order Modifiers check box to verify that the schedule enforces order quantities
that fit the minimum, maximum, multiple, and yield order modifier rules.
Select the Start Of Time Purge Option check box if you want to purge all of the old planning
data that is based on a previous start time fence set during a previous planning session. For
example, if you originally set the start time fence as 1/1/01, and you went back later and reset
your start time fence to 2/1/01, PeopleSoft Production Planning will disregard all planning databefore 2/1/01 if this check box is selected. This is mostly used for net-change run types.
Select the Regenerate Sourcing Templates check box if you want the DataLink run to replace
existing sourcing templates. Sourcing is the process the Planning engine uses to determine how
the supply for an item’s demand is going to be filled. The system sources demand using sourcing
options. These options define parameters for manufacturing, purchasing, or transferring an item
to meet demand. You use sourcing templates to load the options. You can let the system load the
options automatically or set up sourcing templates manually and maintain the options.
Important! If you select the Regenerate Sourcing Templates check box, the system
deletes and refreshes any sourcing options for which you have established priorities and
defaults. The new templates will be prioritized based on low costs. To prevent the
regeneration of templates that you want to maintain manually, use the Sourcing Template
Maintenance page to select the Manually Maintained check box on the template header.
Use the Search Depth field to define how many levels of the supply chain the Planning engine
will explode while solving sourcing and optimization issues. Each routine option represents a
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 3 2 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
single level in the supply chain. For example, part A is made up of part B and part B is made up
of parts C and D. To explode all levels, enter a 3 in the Search Depth field. The search depth
you define is used as the default for DataLink processing.
If an item has a different value defined for its sourcing template, the Planning engine uses
the value at the item level and ignores the DataLink default search depth value you enter
here.
Inventory Options
Indicate a Carrying Cost Rate (%/year), which is the rate you use to calculate the carrying cost
of inventory on hand. The value that appears in the field is a percentage of the annual cost to
keep the item in inventory. This rate could include costs such as building overhead as well as the
cost of capital for items such as an interest rate or breakage.
Select Available Inventory Balances to transfer inventory balances for each item to PeopleSoft
Production Planning. This also includes staged quantities. If you leave this check box clear,
items will have no on-hand beginning quantities in the planning system.
Depending upon how you defined available quantity in PeopleSoft Inventory, this group box
displays either the Incl Non-Open in Avail Qty (include non-open in available quantity) or
Remove Non-Open in Avail Qty (remove non-open in available quantity) check box.
In PeopleSoft Inventory, there are four inventory statuses: Open, On Hold, Rejected, and
Restricted. You have the option, at the business-unit level, to include or not include On Hold and
Restricted (non-open) in the available quantity bucket. PeopleSoft Production Planning never
includes Rejected. The Include/Remove Non-Open in Avail Qty (include/remove non-open in
available quantity) check box enables you to reverse that option either to include or to removethose quantities for a particular run.
• When the Include Non-Open in Avail Qty (include non-open in available quantity) check box
is displayed, select the check box to include non-open inventory at the business-unit level. For
planning purposes, the system increases the quantity on hand by the On Hold and Restrictedamounts.
• When the Remove Non-Open in Avail Qty (remove non-open in available quantity) check
box is displayed, select the check box to exclude non-open inventory at the business-unit level.
For planning purposes, the system reduces the quantity on hand.
For more information about setting up these options, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Inventory
PeopleBook, “Preparing to Implement PeopleSoft Inventory” or PeopleSoft 8.00.01Inventory PeopleBook, “Defining Your Operational Structure in PeopleSoft Inventory”.
Capacity Options
Plan Work Centers Only defines work centers (not machines, crews, or tools) as resources. The
planning system will measure capacity on the work center as a whole and ignore the availability
of individual machines, crews, and tools used to accomplish tasks at the work centers.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 3 3
Plan Detail Resources includes all resources, work centers, machines, crews, and tools in the
plan. When you select this option, the Planning system evaluates capacity for each resource.
Defining Frozen Fence Offsets
Usage Use the General: Frozen Details page to define frozen fence offsets.
You can set frozen time fences in days for several types of supply.
Object Name RUN_PLS1003
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, General, Frozen Details
Access
Requirements
Click the Frozen Details link on the General page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - General: Frozen Details page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
A frozen fence specifies the number of days from the current date during which you don’t want
solvers or Iterative Repair to change that supply type in the current plan.
Frozen Fence Offsets (in days)
Enter a number of days in the following fence fields you want to use:
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 3 4 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Shipment Task Fence Freezes all shipments to customers. Note that PeopleSoft
Production Planning cannot move shipments during the
plan generation process unless you use this fence.
Firm Production Fence Freezes all planned or existing production IDs and
production schedules with a production status of Firm.
Released Production Fence Freezes all existing production IDs and production
schedules with a production status of Released or InProcess.
Purchase Fence Freezes all purchase orders regardless of status.
Transfer Supply Fence The Transfer Supply Fence freezes all transfers from the
shipping business unit after the number of days you enter.
A transfer type is a transfer option flag that determines
which business unit the Planning engine uses to model the
transfer of the item. You can model an item in the To
Unit (Supply Transfer), From Unit (Demand Transfer), or
both (Both) business units.
Transfer Demand Fence The Transfer Demand Fence freezes all transfers to the
destination business unit after the number of days you
enter. A transfer type is a transfer option that determines
which business unit the Planning engine uses to model the
transfer of the item. You can model an item in the To
Unit (Supply Transfer), From Unit (Demand Transfer), or
both (Both) business units.
Freeze Master Items Select this check box to freeze master-planning items.
When you run the Production DataLink, the system
considers supply and demand for the items as frozen.
Defining WIP/Roll Forward Details
Usage Use the General: Wip/Roll Forward Details page if you want to reduce
time between operations, minimize work in process (WIP) inventory,
and indicate if you want to roll past-due tasks forward to a future time in
the plan or to a future plan.
Object Name RUN_PLS1004
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, General, WIP/Roll Forward Details
Access
Requirements
Click the Wip/Roll Forward Details link on the General page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 3 5
Production DataLink - General: Wip/Roll Forward Details page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
Work In Process
If you want to minimize work in process inventory, select the Minimize WIP (minimize work inprogress) check box.
If you do not select the Minimize WIP check box, the other fields on this page aren’t
available for input.
Indicate the maximum amount of time you want to allow between operation sequences in the
Distance Threshold edit boxes. You can set the maximum amount of time by Seconds,
Minutes, Hours, or Days.
Specify the maximum Number Of Routings To Repair. If the number of routings being
optimized by the Planning engine exceeds the number you define here, the system ignores them.
If minimizing WIP is one of your most relevant constraints, make sure that you set this number
high enough to handle all of the routings you might handle during a planning session.
Indicate the Constraint Relevancy for minimizing WIP. Select one of the following options:
Relevant Repair Enterprise Planning tries to repair the task to minimize
WIP.
Relevant Score Enterprise Planning records the violations but does not
repair them.
None Enterprise Planning does not repair or track the violations.
Select the Aggressive Repair check box if you want PeopleSoft Production Planning to fix the
violation regardless of whether the repair violates other constraints.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 3 6 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Roll Forward
Select the Roll Forward Active Phases check box if you want to reschedule tasks that are past
due. You use the Roll Forward utility to move the tasks within the current plan or to a future plan
when you run the solvers. Past-due tasks are tasks that were scheduled to be completed prior to
the current time but that remain open. The Planning engine moves tasks from the past and rolls
them forward into the current or a future schedule or plan. Then, you can view and work with
them before running solvers to fine-tune the plan.
A Roll Forward phase is a set of specifications that determine which tasks are rescheduled and
when they are rescheduled. Any phase that is marked as active is included in the movement.
You define active phases using the Planning engine.
For more information about setting up and using Roll Forward phases, see “Setting Up
Production Planning”.
Including Demand and Supply in the Production DataLink Run
You can use the Demand page to specify the types of demand that you want to include in the
Production DataLink run. You can also specify forecast consumption options for both finished
products as well as assembled components. Forecasts entered for inventory items through
PeopleSoft Inventory and products through PeopleSoft Order Management are passed toplanning, where forecast consumption is performed.
Use the Supply page to specify the types of supply you want to include in the Production
DataLink run.
Defining Demand Options
Usage Use the Demand/Supply: Demand page to specify the types of demand,
such as orders and forecasts that you want to include in the Production
DataLink run.
Object Name RUN_PLS1006
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, Demand/Supply, Demand
Access
Requirements
Select the Demand/Supply tab, then click the Demand link on the
Demand/Supply page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 3 7
Production DataLink - Demand/Supply: Demand page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
Select the Apply Demand Priorities check box if you want solvers to use demand priorities for
scheduling supply to meet the demand. The demand priority places importance on independent
demand. The solvers use the demand priority value to determine the order in which you fulfill the
demand. You can set a demand priority from 1 to 999, with 1 as the most important level. A
priority value of 0 is reserved for the system.
Orders
There are a variety of demand types or orders in PeopleSoft Production Planning. You can
include any of the following in your Production DataLink run: Sales Orders, Transfer Orders,
Planned Transfer Orders, Material Stock Requests, and Quotes.
If you consider sales quotes when you generate your plan, you can specify the Quote Acceptance
Percentage, or the minimum success percentage that you’ll accept as demand as defined on each
sales quotation header. For example, suppose the quote acceptance percentage is 80. There are
1500 sales quotations currently active in PeopleSoft Order Management, 350 of which have a
success percentage of 80% or better. The system considers the 350 quotations as demand but the
sales quotations under 80% won’t be considered because they are less than the quote acceptance
percentage
If you don’t specify a percentage here, such as 0%, PeopleSoft Production Planning automatically
considers that 100% of the quotes will be converted to sales orders.
Forecasts
Select the Forecast check box to include one of your predefined forecast sets.
Select a Planning Bucket Size - Daily, Weekly, or Monthly - to indicate the size of bucketed
time periods you can use for forecasting. We recommend that you use weekly or monthly
buckets, because the forecast is only consumed by sales orders within the same bucket. The
Forecast Set is used to keep multiple copies of forecasts in the system.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 3 8 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Use the Forecast Fulfillment Fence field to indicate the number of days from the start date that
the Planning engine uses as the forecast fulfillment time fence. When a forecasted demand
occurs within (before) the time fence and cannot be met entirely, the forecast tasks representing
portions of the forecast that cannot be met are canceled.
If the forecasted demand that occurs past the time fence (a future time) cannot be met entirely, the
forecast tasks representing portions of the forecast that cannot be met are delayed and rolled
forward to future planning buckets where they can be satisfied. Solvers determine how many
forecast tasks can be satisfied and where to reschedule the unfulfilled forecast tasks. If you donot enter a value in this field, the default is the early fence date.
Forecast fulfillment is the process that the Planning engine uses to manage forecasted demand
over a period of time. The forecast fulfillment feature makes it possible for you to divide the total
forecast demand into portions so that you can meet certain portions of the forecast if the total
forecast cannot be met entirely. The Planning engine can either meet the supply shortage during
the same planning bucket in which the shortage occurs or carry it over into the next bucket.
Solvers delay and cancel forecast tasks based on how the forecast is loaded and on the period start
and end time. If you select the Front Load option, the forecast is front loaded and produces
demand at the beginning of the planning period, so that the supply must be available at the
beginning of the period. If you select the Back Load option, the forecast produces demand at the
end of the planning period, so that supply can be scheduled during the planning period. Front
Load is the default option. To clear it, select the Back Load option.
When forecasted demand cannot be supplied, the solvers look at forecast tasks and how their
forecasts were loaded to determine if forecast tasks are late. When a task is late, the solvers
determine if the task should be delayed or canceled.
Forecast Consumption
Forecast consumption options enable you to control the forecast consumption calculations
performed while loading the planning command files. Use the following options to define how
forecasts should be used when the Production DataLink is run:
Select the Allow Forecast Consumption check box to indicate that you want PeopleSoft
Production Planning to consume the forecast.
If you don’t select Allow Forecast Consumption, you can’t select the Explode Demand
for Consumption option or any forecast consumption method.
When you select the Net Change Forecast check box, all actions that trigger a change in the
forecast consumption equation, such as changing a sales order line quantity, also trigger the
forecast consumption process. If you don’t clear this check box, changes aren’t made to forecast
consumption, and you’ll have to use the Regenerate Forecast Consumption option to update the
forecast tasks.
Select the Stock Request Shipments check box to include these shipments in forecast
consumption.
If you select the Explode Demand for Consumption check box, sales order demand or transfer
demand for forecast consumption will be exploded at the global level. If there were forecasts for
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 3 9
production, you would want to explode sales order demand or transfer demand for some end
items by calculating the production demand to be used for forecast consumption. You should not
select this check box if forecasts exist only for sales order demand or transfer demand.
To explode demand for forecast consumption, complete the following steps:
1. Take the sales order and determine the bucket to which you add the transfer or production
demand based on the promise or request date.
2. Use the default item sourcing option as the primary way to source the item.
� For a purchase option, stop the explosion, since it is at the end.
� For a transfer option, take the source item and add the quantity to the transfer demand
bucket.
� For a production option, look at each component of the BOM and calculate the quantity
before adding to the production demand bucket. The formula to calculate the quantity isQPA * quantity of the sales order line.
3. For a transfer option, take the source item and repeat Step 2. For a production option, take
each component and repeat Step 2.
Select the Sales Order Shipments check box if you want sales order shipments to consume
forecast.
Select the Transfer Demand Shipments check box if you want transfer demand shipments to
consume forecast. Using PeopleSoft Production Planning, the shipped transfers consume
forecast, even if they have not been received.
Select Promise Date when you want the plan to consume the forecast based on the sales order
ship set promise date. The Production DataLink uses the promise date on the sales orders to
determine which forecast to consume by the sales order demand. Promise Date is the default.
Because the Material Planning Solver reschedules the sales orders scheduled shipments based on
the promise date before the netting of demand and supply begins, you may want to set the
forecast consumption method to Promise Date. You must select either Promise Date orRequest Date, but not both.
Select Request Date if you want to use the sales order ship set request date to determine which
forecast will be consumed by the sales order demand. You must select either Promise Date or
Request Date, but not both.
For more information on entering forecasts for inventory items, see “Setting Up Production
Planning”.
For more information on entering forecasts for products, see “Setting Up Production
Planning”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 4 0 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Defining Supply Options.
Usage Use the Demand/Supply: Supply page to specify the types of supply
such as orders and forecasts that you want to include in the Production
DataLink run.
Object Name RUN_PLS1002
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, Demand/Supply, Supply
Access
Requirements
Select the Demand/Supply tab, then click the Supply link on the
Demand/Supply page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - Demand/Supply: Supply page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
Supply Options
You can include any of the following in your Production DataLink run: Purchase Orders,
Planned Purchase Orders, Production Orders (including production IDs and production
schedules), Planned Production Orders, Transfer Orders, and Planned Transfer Orders.
Usually, you’ll want to include all these options when running a regenerative DataLink. When
you run a net-change process using the Production DataLink, you might have a separate run
control to pull net-change data for different types of supply and demand. For example, a net-
change run control can be set up to pull production data over at the end of each shift.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 4 1
Period of Supply (POS) Histogram Period
Select a scale to view the inventory histograms as measured in period of supply (POS). Your
options are Daily and Weekly. The supply is the total new supply, which comes from scheduled
and planned production, purchase, and transfer. You can calculate the POS at each supply pointand at each demand occurrence.
Select the Round Component Demand check box if you want to round the quantity when the
system calculates dependent component demand. You can determine at the business-unit level
whether to round the component based on the item-rounding rule. The Production DataLink
passes the rounding rule and quantity precision with the item to the Planning engine. However,
you can’t change the item rounding rule and quantity precision within PeopleSoft Production
Planning.
Whether the number is a whole number or a decimal may depend on the item’s unit of measureand quantity precision combination as it was defined in Inventory.
For more information about defining rounding rules and quantity precision for items, see
PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Working With
Items”.
You have the option to round or not round depending on demand calculations. You may
decide not to round the dependent demand calculation because rounding inflates the actual
dependent demand. Rounding problems become more visible as the dependent demand
explodes down more levels.
For more information about exceptions to the rounding rules, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Working With Items”.
Select one of the Substitute Options where substitute items are assigned to the business unit:
Off Planning performs no item substitutions or use-up
functions.
Active If an item’s requirement isn’t being met, another supply
for the item will be rescheduled before an alternate item is
substituted.
Aggressive If an item’s requirement isn’t being met, an alternate item
is substituted before other supply for the item is
rescheduled. The alternate item with the highest priority
is substituted first. If, for example, there is insufficient
inventory of the highest priority alternate item, the next
highest priority alternate item with sufficient quantity will
be substituted.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 4 2 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
When the Planning system is using Linear Programming (LP) mode, substitute items and
thus the replacement items aren’t selected based on highest priority, but are instead selected
based on lowest cost. To ensure correct planning of the replacement item, delete all
substitute items in the substitute item list and leave only the replacement item when in LP
mode.
Substitute Options settings apply to manufacturing only and aren’t used for inventory
transfers or shipping.
Setting Planning Run and Solver Options
Solvers are flexible tools that analyze data and attempt to find a feasible master or material plan.
Using solvers, you first produce a plan based on existing supply and demand for an item to arrive
at a feasible material and capacity plan. You then can intervene to manually repair infeasibilities
and run other more comprehensive solvers that provide a plan that is ready to use when it’s
generated.
For more information about using solver options, see Setting Up Solvers Using the
Production DataLink.
Selecting a Solver for Plan Generation
Usage Use the Solvers: Common page to define which solver you want to run
when you generate the master or material plan.
Object Name RUN_PLS1014
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, Solvers, Common
Access
Requirements
Select the Solvers tab, then click the Common link on the Solvers page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 4 3
Production DataLink - Solvers: Common page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
When you set up the Production DataLink, you define which solvers you want to use to process
the plan when you load the data model into the Planning server. The Planning engine runs thesolvers based on the controls you define in this component group.
The solver you select on this page runs the initial master or material plan. Using other pages in
this component, you can indicate that another solver should run immediately after the one you
select on this page.
You can use the Generate Plan option to immediately run a plan. We recommend that you
create initial material and feasible plans using the Production DataLink, then use the
Generate Plan option to run solvers again or to run quality improvement phases for the plan.
Common
Select one of the following Run Solver after Load options:
Feasibility Solver Provides a more complete plan that ensures material and
resource capacity is available to meet the plan.
Iterative Repair Run the Iterative Repair Solver after you create a plan
using the LP, Material, or Feasible Planning solvers. The
Iterative Repair Solver produces plans that show violated
constraints as well as the order in which the violated
constraints should be repaired.
Linear Programming This solver is especially designed to work with reasonably
large data sets. The solver doesn’t ensure a material- or
capacity-feasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions
to feed into the Feasible Planning Solver to obtain a
feasible plan.
Material Solver Provides a simple plan that resolves material shortages.
You can select to have some capacity repaired during the
processing of material shortages. This solver provides
you with a starting point for a plan.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 4 4 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
You can also select to run another solver automatically after you run the initial plan. Use the
solver pages in this component group to indicate whether you want to run another solver
without intervening in the Production DataLink processing.
For more information about each solver, see Setting Up Solvers Using the Production
DataLink.
Defining Material Planning Options
Usage Use the Solvers: Material Planning page to define conditions for
processing a master or material plan. The Material Planning Solver
creates a simple material plan that resolves most material shortages.
Object Name RUN_PLS1011
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, Solvers, Material Planning
Access
Requirements
Select the Solvers tab, then click the Material Planning link on the
Solvers page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - Solvers: Material Planning page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 4 5
For more information about material planning, see Overview of the Material Planning
Solver.
Planning Mode
This group box provides options for defining the data that Production DataLink uses when the
material plan is created. The default value is Regenerative. The following values are available:
Regenerative When you run the Material Planning Solver in this mode,
all tasks or orders with a status of planned are deleted
from existing data and a material plan is generated for all
inventory items. Using this mode, all previous supply and
demand relationships (recorded in the pegging) are erased
and all independent demand is rescheduled back to its due
date.
Net Change When you use this mode to run the Material Planning
Solver, the system produces a material plan only for those
items that have shortages. This includes subassemblies
and raw materials. When there is a material shortage
recorded by the pegged chain, the entire part that is in
demand is planned again.
When a supply is late for a demand but is pegged, it isn’t considered a material shortage.
When a part is planned for again in the Net Change mode, all planned supplies are deleted
and any end-demands for that part are returned to their due date. In addition, all pegging
history for that part is deleted. All other parts remain unchanged.
The new net change ignores and may cause material shortages due to late demands as orders are
rescheduled to satisfy supply. You can eliminate these shortages by running the Feasible
Planning Solver or using the Late Supplies Inquiry in the Planning server to fix them.
After Material Planning Run
Before you run the Production DataLink, you need to define whether you want to consolidate
planned purchase orders (POs) or run the Feasible Planning Solver after the material planning
run. Select the Consolidate Planned Purchase Orders check box to invoke the purchase order
consolidation algorithm automatically after the solver run. This consolidation is the same as
Fixed Period, except that it acts on purchases only. The default value for the box is clear (notselected).
Select the Run Feasible Planning check box if you want to the Feasible Planning Solver to runautomatically immediately after the Material Planning Solver runs.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 4 6 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Material Planning - General Attributes
The Material Planning Solver uses the following information to process a material-feasible plan.
Select the Calculate Low Level Code check box to verify the accuracy of low-level codes. The
code is a number that identifies the lowest level in a BOM at which a component appears. These
codes are maintained on items and calculated by the Planning engine. When this check box is
selected, the low-level code for each item is calculated prior to the Material Planning run.
Since the Material Planning Solver plans items in low-level code order, it is important to
ensure that the low-level code associated with each item is accurate before you run the
Material Planning Solver, especially if there have been BOM changes.
Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate whether you want the Material Planning
Solver to plan for meeting safety-stock levels. When this option is selected, the solver ignores
safety-stock constraints. As a result, the solver won’t plan supply for safety-stock demand. Youcan use this option for “what-if” scenarios.
When you select Include Capacity for the planning run, the Material Planning Solver minimizes
capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence when it generates the plan. This
capacity repair tries to reschedule tasks earlier to find capacity. The solver doesn’t violate the
pegged chain record of supply and demand to reschedule the tasks, nor does it place tasks before
the early fence to reschedule the tasks. As the default, the box is clear.
The Include Capacity option isn’t the same as the Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the
Feasible Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs capacity levels by rescheduling
tasks earlier on the primary resource, regardless of creating late supplies. In doing so, it doesn’t
guarantee material feasibility. By contrast, the Feasible Planning Solver moves the tasks earlier,
searches for alternate resources, and finally moves the tasks later without ever creating late
supplies.
We recommend that you use this repair only when you have a plan that isn’t heavily capacity
constrained. In all other cases, you should use the Feasible Planning Solver to resolve
capacity overages.
Select the Use Fixed Period check box to define whether the fixed period of supply algorithm is
applied during the Material Planning run. When a planned production or purchase order needs to
be created after all existing orders have been used, the Material Planning Solver uses this option
to determine the maximum amount needed between the first demand and a fixed-period amount
of time. The time is defined as a number of days on the item record. The solver creates a single
supply for this amount. The default for this check box is clear.
Select the Material Plan Items check box to include material-planning items in the solver
processing. You can run a plan that includes both material- and master-planning items. Select
the Master Plan Items check box to include any items in solver processing that have been
selected as master-planning items. These values are assigned using the Planned By option on theBusiness Unit Item Definition page.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 4 7
Defining Feasible Planning Solver Options
Usage Use the Solvers: Feasibility Solver page to define the planning elements
that you want to include in material and capacity feasibility planning.
You can use the Feasible Planning Solver to create a master or material
plan.
Object Name RUN_PLS1012
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, General, General,
Access
Requirements
Select the Solvers tab, then click the Feasibility Solver link on the
Solvers page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - Solvers: Feasibility Solver page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
The Feasible Planning Solver ensures material feasibility for all resolvable material violations
between the early fence and end of time and is designed to start from any initial plan and turn it
into an executable plan. The solver generates an executable plan that contains no tasks in the
past, no material shortages, and, optionally, no capacity violations. The solver guarantees
material feasibility for all resolvable material violations between the early fence and end time,
regardless of the settings.
For more information about how the Feasible Planning Solver processes a plan, see
Overview of the Feasible Planning Solver.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 4 8 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Feasibility Solver
Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate you do not want the system to respect
safety-stock constraints during the processing of the Feasibility Planning Solver. As a result, the
solver doesn’t plan supply for safety-stock demand. If supply was created for safety stock by an
earlier solver, the Feasible Planning Solver recognizes it as excess. As the default, the box is
clear, so that safety-stock levels are accounted for in the planning process.
Select the Allow Material Reallocation check box to allow the Feasible Planning Solver to
correct material inversions by reallocating supply. These inversions occur when a supply task is
late for the demand that it supplies. When you allow material allocation, the solver tries to
reallocate supply from a lower-priority pegged chain before trying to reschedule the demand later
or the supply earlier.
Select the Allow Rescheduling check box to control the rescheduling of tasks to resolve late
supplies by the Feasible Planning Solver. The pegged chains are rescheduled only after the
Feasible Planning Solver searches for any allowed alternate sources of supply.
If the Allow Rescheduling check box isn’t selected, only the material phase of the Feasible
Planning Solver runs and the solver cannot ensure a material-feasible plan.
You must select Allow Rescheduling in order to use the Make Plan Capacity Feasible and
phase options in plan processing.
The Feasible Planning Solver uses the move preference that you define in the Planning server’s
Late Supplies Inquiry to decide if the demand should be made late or the supply should be
rescheduled before the early fence to resolve any remaining late demands. In case of frozen
demand, the supply is scheduled earlier if the demand cannot be made on time. In all other cases,the default behavior schedules the demand later.
Select the Make Plan Capacity Feasible check box to indicate that you want the Feasible
Planning Solver to resolve capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence. When
the box is clear, the Feasible Planning Solver considers only material feasibility, not capacityfeasibility, when you run the plan.
The Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the Feasible Planning Solver isn’t the same as the
Include Capacity option in the Material Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs
capacity level by rescheduling tasks earlier on the primary resource regardless of creating late
supplies. In doing so, it doesn’t guarantee material feasibility. By contrast, the Feasible Planning
Solver moves the tasks earlier, then searches for alternate resources, and finally moves the task
later without ever creating late supplies.
The Feasible Planning Solver resolves aggregate resource violations, not detailed resource
violations.
For more information about how the Feasible Planning Solver processes a plan to make it
capacity-feasible, see Making the Plan Capacity Feasible.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 4 9
Select the Allow Alternate Routing check box to allow the Feasible Planning Solver to source
material again to resolve material infeasibilities. When you allow alternate routings, the solver
tries to explode the supply for a violated demand again, using either alternate purchase or transfer
options. The Feasible Planning Solver tries to use alternate purchases or transfers to resolve a
material infeasibility before it tries to reschedule the demand or supply. Enabling alternate
routings also controls if alternate routings are used when the Make Plan Capacity Feasible and
Run Lateness Phase check boxes are selected.
Select the Allow Item Substitution check box to indicate that the Feasible Planning Solver can
use substitute items to correct material inversions. When you select this option, the solver tries to
reallocate the supply of a valid substitute item from a lower-priority pegged chain before it tries
to reschedule the demand or supply. Item substitution is used if it helps make a late supply on
time, and if it helps during all reschedules to reduce excess inventory. If the box is clear,
substitutions are not made during solver processing. For example, the Run Lateness Phase
won’t use item substitution.
If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Lateness Phase of the Feasible Planning
Solver executes after a material- or capacity-feasible plan is in place. This phase maintains the
feasibility of the schedule while searching for opportunities to reduce the lateness of demands that
have been delayed past their due date. As the default, the box is clear. This phase adds quality to
your plan.
If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, you must also select the Allow
Rescheduling check box.
Use the Time Limit field to define the maximum number of minutes the Lateness Phase is run.
When the Planning engine reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and provides you with a
plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60 minutes. You cannot
enter a negative number.
Run Lateness Phase potentially creates and deletes multiple orders. You should not use it if
you want to change the existing schedule minimally.
Select the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of
the Lateness Phase by entering a smaller time period. If this option isn’t selected, the system
considers all late demands between the early fence and end of time in this phase. As the default,
the box is clear.
You use the days after Current Time field to indicate how long after the current time the solver
should begin to ignore the Lateness Phase. The system considers this field if you have selected
the Ignore problems later than check box. The value of this field represents a number of days
after current time. This offset from current time defines a boundary after which late demands are
ignored by the Lateness Phase. An attempt isn’t made to reduce the lateness of demands that start
outside this boundary. The default value for the field is 30 days.
The Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box maintains the feasibility of the schedule while
searching for opportunities to reduce excess inventory that occurs between the early fence andend of time. It also searches for opportunities to satisfy unfulfilled safety-stock requirements.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 5 0 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The Stock Adjustment Phase check box causes numerous reschedules and should not be
selected if you want to change the existing schedule minimally.
If the Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box is selected, the Planning engine invokes this
feature when you run the Feasible Planning Solver after a material- or capacity-feasible plan is in
place. As the default, the box is clear.
If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Feasible Planning Solver executes the
Run Stock Adjustment Phase after the Lateness Phase.
Use the Time Limit field to enter the maximum number of minutes you want the Run Stock
Adjustment Phase to run. When the solver reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and
provides you a plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60 minutes.
You cannot enter negative numbers.
Select the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of
the Stock Reduction Phase by entering a smaller time period. If this check box isn’t selected,
excess inventory and unfulfilled safety stock that exists between the early fence and end of time
are considered in this phase. As the default, the check box is clear.
When you type a value in the days after Current Time field, the solver doesn’t attempt to
reduce excess inventory or fulfill safety-stock requirements outside the time periods. The defaultvalue for this field is 30 days.
This field is considered if the Ignore problems later than check box is selected. The value of
this field represents a number of days after the current time. This offset from current time defines
a boundary after which excess inventory and unfulfilled safety-stock requirements are ignored bythe Stock Reduction Phase.
For more information about the Lateness and Stock Adjustment Phases, see Improving Plan
Quality.
Defining Linear Programming Options
Usage Use the Solvers: LP Solver page to define the parameters that you want
linear programming to apply to the master or material plan.
Object Name RUN_PLS1007
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, Solvers, LP Solver
Access
Requirements
Select the Solvers tab, then click the LP Solver link on the Solvers page.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 5 1
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - Solvers: LP Solver page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
When you have complex sourcing decisions to make or when you want a plan that considers your
business objectives in a global sense, then you should use the LP Solver. Through its realistic
modeling, this solver enables you to include factors in planning that other solvers cannot process
or do not process to the extent that the LP Solver does. Effective dates, calendars, and penalty
calculations are examples of extended modeling.
The LP Solver uses an aggregate approach to consider different objectives, factors, and
alternatives simultaneously to develop a plan with the minimum cost. The solver first constructs
an LP model based on the settings you define on the LP page, and then it finds an aggregate
optimal planning solution. Finally, the LP post-processor takes the aggregate solution and creates
a task-based executable plan.
The LP Solver doesn’t ensure a material- or capacity-feasible executable plan. If you want
to take the task-based solution produced from the LP post-processor and turn it into a
feasible and executable plan, run the Feasible Planning Solver after you run the LP Solver.
For more information about how the LP Solver processes a master or material plan, see
Overview of the LP Solver.
Linear programming works best for period planning or planning by week, not for detailed
planning. It is particularly effective for sourcing decisions.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 5 2 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
LP Solver
Select the Modify LP Parameters (modify linear programming parameters) check box if you
want to change options for how the solver creates your plan.
If you do not select the Modify LP Parameters check box, the other fields on this page
won’t be available for input.
You can use the default values that appear on this page or enter new values. These values specify
your aggregate bucketed data and enable the linear programming process to provide greaterprecision.
Use the Carrying Cost Rate (%/year) field to define the annual percentage rate the solver uses
to calculate the cost of maintaining the inventory. The cost is based on a percentage of the
average inventory value for the year. The default value for the field is 10 percent if values have
not been defined using PeopleSoft Enterprise or Production Planning. You cannot change the
value.
Use the Late Shipment Penalty (%/day) field to define the percentage it costs your business on
a daily basis to miss a shipment date. The percentage is based on the standard cost of the item.The default value for this field is 0.1%; however, you can change the value for an LP Solver run.
The Number of Daily Periods represents the total daily periods from the early fence that you
want to include in the plan. The default value for this field is 7. The smaller the number of
periods you plan for, the more realistic you make your plan.
The Number of Weekly Periods represents the total weekly periods following daily periods that
you want to include in your plan. The default value for this field is 4. You can use this field to
plan implicitly for monthly buckets as well. When the late fence exceeds the last weekly period,
then the LP Solver uses monthly buckets for the rest of the periods.
We recommend that you do not enter more than 30 total periods so that the LP Solver can
find optimal plans for large-scale problems. The total is the sum of daily and weekly
periods.
Select the Run Feasible Planning After LP check box to automatically invoke the Feasible
Planning Solver after the LP Solver is run.
Defining Iterative Repair Settings
Usage Use the Solvers: Iterative Repair page to select parameters for using the
Iterative Repair/Optimizer to run a master or material plan. Iterative
Repair scores the schedule and determines whether to continue working
on an iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables Iterative
Repair to recognize which constraints are violated, as well as the order
in which the violated constraints should be repaired.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 5 3
Object Name RUN_PLS1013
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, General, General
Access
Requirements
Select the Solvers tab, then click the Iterative Repair link on the Solvers
page.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - Solvers: Iterative Repair page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager, and
Process Monitor.
Iterative Repair is the most extensive tool available for creating a master plan or material plan.
Also called the Optimizer, Iterative Repair is an advanced planning tool for creating a plan or
detailed schedule. Iterative Repair performs a series of iterations. During iterations, it applies a
set of standard repair rules (heuristics) to the constraint violations. Each constraint class has a
series of standard repairs that the system follows. If these repairs do not meet your needs, thenyou can modify the repair.
You can run Iterative Repair by itself or as part of the overall planning process. Iterative Repair
doesn’t use pegged chains or demand priorities. Although we do not recommend it, you can run
Iterative Repair as the initial phase of the Feasible Planning Solver.
During each of its phases, Iterative Repair runs a series of iterations and repairs a series of
violations. After you run an iteration, Iterative Repair scores the schedule and determines
whether to continue working on that iteration. The process of scoring constraints enables
Iterative Repair to recognize which constraints are violated, as well as the order in which the
violated constraints should be repaired.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 5 4 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about the Iterative Repair tool, see Overview of Iterative
Repair/Optimizer.
Iterative Repair
Select the default Optimization Template that you want to use to load into the planning model.
When you run the Production DataLink and select a template, PeopleSoft Production Planning
automatically creates the appropriate planning model. Standard optimization templates include:
All Constraints This is the default template. It enables you to build a
planning model and generate a plan based on all the
constraints that you select when you create your plan.
Material & Aggregate
Capacity
In PeopleSoft Production Planning, this template is
identical to the All Constraints template. It enables you to
build a planning model and generate a plan based on all
the constraints that you select when you create your plan.
In PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, this template enables
you to build a planning model and generate a plan without
changeover or detailed capacity.
Material Only Selecting this template enables you to build a planning
model and generate a plan without taking capacity into
consideration.
The Min. Stock Violation (hrs) (minimum stock violation in hours) field defines the minimum
number of hours that PeopleSoft Production Planning considers to be a stock violation. For
example, you can accumulate excess inventory that causes a temporary surge in inventory when
you build an item. If you set the minimum violation to three hours, then a temporary surge of two
hours during a build process won’t cause a violation.
Select the Iterations for optimizer field to define the number of times, or iterations, you wantthe Planning engine to search for an optimal schedule.
Depending on the size of your model, Iterative Repair may take a substantial amount of time to
create a schedule. You set optimization stopping rules before running the repair. The
optimization stopping rules cause Iterative Repair to stop and return the best schedule or thecurrent schedule upon termination.
In the Stop optimizer after minutes field, you can enter a time limit to indicate the number of
minutes you want the Planning engine to search for an optimal schedule. Use the Stop
optimizing at this score field to enter an acceptable score at which the Planning engine shouldterminate its search.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 5 5
Setting Up Command File and Source File Information
Usage Use the Command Files page to view the command files used by the
Production DataLink for a Planning server template. You can edit the
file names on this page. All command files are created for each
DataLink.
Object Name RUN_PLS1009
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, Command Files
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - Command Files page (1 of 2)
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 5 6 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Production DataLink - Command Files page (2 of 2)
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager,
Process Monitor, and Schedule.
There are two File Name columns. The first column contains fields you can edit and controls the
name given to the command file created by the Production DataLink. The second column is for
display only and lists the type of information the Production DataLink includes in the file,
regardless of the name in the first column, during processing.
Important! Don’t leave any of the field values blank if you override the current names in
the first column.
The file names, as currently configured, include the following:
File Name Includes
Environment Data for your PeopleSoft Production
Planning environment, which includes time
fence, solver, attribute, date penalty, linear
programming, PeopleSoft Order Promising
(if installed), lateness tolerance, and forecast
consumption data. The system label in the
right column is always Env.
Attributes Data for your planning attributes. The
system label in the right column is always
Attributes.
Calendars Data for your work period, holiday, calendar
spec, and work calendars. The system label
in the right column is always Calendars.
Items Data of the items for which you will be
planning. The system label in the right
column is always Items.
Resources Data for your rough-cut planning resources.
The system label in the right column is
always Resources.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 5 7
File Name Includes
Production Options Data for the bills of material and routing
definitions you use to manufacture items.
The system label in the right column is
always Prdn Opts (production options).
Planning BOMs Data for your planning bills of material. The
system label in the right column is always
Pln BOMs (planning bills of material).
Sourcing Data for your sourcing templates and
sourcing options. The system label in the
right column is always Sourcing.
Procurement Data for your existing purchase orders, as
well as any unapplied new purchase orders
from a previous planning run. The system
label in the right column is always PO
(purchase orders).
Productions Data for your existing production IDs and
production schedules, as well as any
unapplied new production messages from a
previous planning run. The system label in
the right column is always Prdn
(production).
Transfers Data for your existing transfer orders, as well
as any unapplied new transfer order messages
from a previous planning run. The system
label in the right column is always
Transfers.
Forecasts Data for your forecasts. The system label in
the right column is always Forecasts.
Sales Orders Data for your sales orders and sales quotes.
The system label in the right column is
always Sales.
Stock Requests Data for your existing material stock
requests. The system label in the right
column is always MSR.
Inventory Balances Data for your quantity-on-hand inventory
balances. The system label in the right
column is always QOH (quantity on hand).
Line Schedule Editor Data for the line schedule editor. The system
label in the right column is always LSE.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 5 8 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
File Name Includes
User Defined Data that you might have defined in other
parts of the system to use in the Production
DataLink process. The system label in the
right column is always User.
Load Data for loading all the generated command
files. By loading this one command file, all
other command files are automatically loaded
into the Planning engine. The system label in
the right column is always Load.
Generate Plan Data for running a specific solver after all
other data is loaded into the Planning engine.
The system label in the right column is
always Gen plan.
In the Write DataLink Output To field, indicate the network path where you want the command
files to be created. The network path must end with a back slash (\) for Windows NT or a
forward slash (/) for UNIX.
Because you control the name of the command files and the network path to which they are
written, you should consider how the files are named and the location to which they should
be written. If you are running the Production DataLink for multiple business units, make
sure that the command files aren’t overwriting themselves. You should create a strategy to
identify command files by name (such as the business unit name in the file name) or by
network path, for example, a unique network path for each business unit, such as:
\\<server>\scp80\data\<business unit>.
Click Run to run this request. Process Scheduler runs the Production DataLink process at user-
defined intervals.
For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process SchedulerPeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.
Verifying Planning Server Connection Settings
Usage Use the Planning Server page to change Planning server templates.
These templates enable you automatically to transfer the transaction data
and plan parameters directly to the Planning engine to generate and
analyze your plan.
Object Name RUN_PLS10010
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Production
DataLink, Planning Server
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 5 9
Prerequisites To make Planning server templates available, you need to use General
Options to create a template and set up its parameters. You use the
Planning Server Definition page to create permanent server templates.
You can define a template only temporarily by using the Planning
Server page.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLPPCL, PLPPCTL, PL_LOAD, PLS1000, PLS9000
Process Type SQR, PSJOB, Application Engine
Production DataLink - Planning Server page
You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you
might have established a test database or a different set of data that you work with. Using this
page, you can change among your host machines without navigating to the Define Business Rules
option, where you also define server settings. To access the latter page, use the following link:
Planning Server Definition page.
You use Planning server templates to define how and where the Supply Chain Planning server is
installed and runs. The Planning server definition enables you automatically to transfer the
transaction data and planning parameters directly to the Planning engine to generate, analyze, and
maintain your planning data model.
These templates make it easy for you to change which Planning server you are linked to. For
example, you might have a test model established on one server and a production model defined
on another machine and server. You can also establish logical definitions of Planning servers for
use by PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning, Production Planning, and Order Promising. As you work
with your plans, you select a server by only its template name rather than having to establish allthe technical Planning server information each time you use a plan.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
3 - 6 0 S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
You can link to a server either by using the Planning Server group box to select the server or by
completing fields on this page. The Planning server is also available on the Planning Scorecard
page and can be selected directly from there.
Planning Server
When you want to change a template temporarily, the Server Template Name identifies the
template.
Host
To establish a link between PeopleTools and the Planning engine, use the Host Name field to
define the machine or device that runs the Planning server. The value you enter must represent a
valid host machine. These values aren’t established as part of your PeopleSoft application
installation or maintenance, so make sure that you type the name as it corresponds to the host
machine.
Use the Host User Name field to define a valid user on the host machine you entered. If you use
File Transfer Protocol routines to copy files to and from the Planning server and a password is
required, you need to enter that password in the Host Password field. When you type the
password, wildcard characters appear in the field instead of the password.
Select the Platform on which the Planning server is running. You can select either PSNT (for
Windows NT machines) or PSUNX for (UNIX machines).
Server
Type the Server Name to define the logical name that has been given to the Planning server.
Planning server names are established when you start a Planning server and specify the -idparameter.
If the -id parameter wasn’t specified, the default server name is “Server.” These values aren’t
established as part of your PeopleSoft application installation or administration, so make sure you
type the name as it corresponds to the host machine. Server names are case-sensitive.
The Timeout (Seconds) field defines how long you want the connection to a Planning server to
wait before automatically timing out when you retrieve or update information in the Planning
server. This means that PeopleSoft Production Planning searches this amount of time before
returning an incomplete operation message. For example, the system may have lost its
connection to the server, found no rows of data, or couldn’t connect to the server. The time isentered as a number of seconds.
The User Name defines a unique ID used to access the Planning server if the Server has been set
up to use security. Enter the Server Password established for the user name. Use the Port field
to define a valid port to use to connect to the Planning server.
Use the Load Command Files From field to define the path to the location of the data model
command files on your network file system so that the Planning server can access them. In most
cases this is a path on the host machine where the Planning server runs. If you are using a shared
file system between Process Scheduler and the Planning server, this path can be the same as the
path used during the DataLink process for creating the command files.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P T H E P R O D U C T I O N D A T A L I N K 3 - 6 1
The Planning engine looks for the command files in the path specified here when it loads the
Planning server automatically using the Production DataLink process. The path name must end
with a forward slash (/) for Unix or a back slash (\) for Windows NT. Otherwise, the file transfer
won’t take place.
For example, a Unix path name would look like this: /data/command/
A Windows NT name would look like this: \data\command\
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 4 - 1
C H A P T E R 4
Generating the Production Plan
After you build and define your planning model using the Production DataLink, you can generate
a master or material plan using the Generate Plan process. Typically, the master or material plans
are automatically created as a part of the DataLink process. The Generate Plan option enables
you to rerun any of the solvers after you have made manual changes to the plan using the master
plan, material plan, or capacity plan workbenches.
The generation process overrides any values that you have set up for solvers in the Planning
server while making it possible to run a plan specifically for master- or material-planning items.
To invoke the process, you use buttons to start the solver that you want to run.
Overview of the Production Plan Process
Before you begin to generate your master plan or material plan, you need to make sure that youhave a Planning server defined and loaded for the model you will use to create the plan.
Generating your plan can be an iterative process. You can run a plan a number of times until you
have a higher-quality plan. When you define your model, PeopleSoft Production Planning passes
the data you identify as part of the planning process to the Planning engine using the Production
DataLink. If the data is incomplete, for example your forecast numbers are inaccurate or one of
the time fences isn’t set properly, we recommend that you stop your generation process and use
the transaction system to change your model or any incomplete or incorrect data
You can change plan data using the Planning engine; however, only planned orders, ordercancellations, and dates changes are transferred back to the PeopleSoft transaction system.
During processing, the system generates master and material plans using the following rules:
• Master-planning items can only be a component of another master-planning item.
• A master plan can be generated in the production-planning model for any business unit, such as
a feeder plant. Using the plan a more defined view of production can be evaluated. In this
model, production routings used in production management are passed to planning. Alternate
routings are also passed to planning providing a closer view at the capacity for a singleproduction facility.
• If the master plan has been generated using an enterprise-planning model, the master plan is
passed in as a part of the material plan in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
• Material-planning items can be components of either material- or master-planning items.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
4 - 2 G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
You can change plan data using the Planning engine; however, only new orders and dates
changes are transferred back to the PeopleSoft transaction system.
Before You Begin
The following are the prerequisites to generating a master or material plan:
• Verify that your forecast and on-hand inventory is accurate and that items are correctly defined
for inclusion in the planning process.
• Understand fully the solver and optimization approaches and the constraint settings you’ll be
using to take full advantage of PeopleSoft Production Planning. Constraint settings are made
in the Planning server, while you can make solver settings using either the DataLink or theGenerate option.
For more information about using the constraints, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 AdvancedPlanning Client PeopleBook, “Managing Constraints”.
For more information about solvers and optimization, see “Setting Up the Production
DataLink”.
• A Planning server must be running.
• Make sure the command file has been generated and loaded into the Planning server.
• A Process Scheduler server must be running. When you click a solver button, the generation
process picks up any running server tied to an application engine.
Generating the Production Plan
When you generate a master or material plan in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you use a series
of solvers. Solvers are flexible tools that analyze data and attempt to find a feasible plan based on
your planning needs. Using solvers, you first produce a plan based on existing supply and
demand for an item to arrive at a feasible material and capacity plan. You then can intervene to
manually repair infeasibilities and run other more comprehensive solvers that provide a plan that
is ready to use when it’s generated.
For more information about the generation process, see “Setting Up the Production
DataLink”.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 4 - 3
Running Planning Solvers
How you use solvers depends on the objectives of your master or material plan. There isn’t a
defined order for running each solver or a predefined set of rules that you must include in a solverrun. You alter the solver flow to meet specific planning needs.
Using planning solvers, you generate plans using a set of parameters for each solver. You can
run a single solver or all of them at different intervals. Using the Generate Plan option, you can
run iterations of your plan, analyzing your plan and making manual changes between iterations.
For more information about using solvers and suggestions for running them, see “Setting Up
the Production DataLink”.
Defining Global Preferences
Usage Use the Global Preferences page to review the time fences the
Production DataLink uses to create a master or material plan. The
Global Preferences page is the default page for the component group.
Object PL_GEN_GLOBAL_PREF
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan,
Global Preferences
Prerequisites If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and
Process server must be running.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Generate Plan - Global Preferences page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
4 - 4 G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Fences are points in time before or after which solvers take certain actions. Solvers use fences to
determine how far supply or demand tasks can be moved forward or backward to meet planning
needs.
Planning and scheduling problems occur within four periods of time. Time fences help define the
following types of planning periods:
• Today’s schedule that has been released to the manufacturing floor.
• Short-term scheduling on a time line with shift or daily bucket planning.
• Medium-term planning.
• Long-term planning.
Solvers are best applied to medium-term planning. This planning period typically focuses on
tactical planning issues such as meeting due dates, managing inventory levels, planning material
deliveries and resource loads, and finally making sourcing decisions. Capacity-feasible and
material-feasible planning can occur across the last two planning periods but normally occur just
within the medium-term-planning region. The planning horizon is the time between the early
time fence and the end of time, both of which you can define. The planning algorithms are
applied to only those tasks that reside within this horizon.
You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you
might have established a test database or a different set of data that you work with. Using the
Planning Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server
containing the database that you want to use to generate the plan. You don’t have to use the
Define Business Rules option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been
defined by that option are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, usethe Planning Server Definition page.
Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily.
For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see “Managing the
Master and Material Plans”.
You use the following types of fences when using solvers:
Start of Time This is the beginning time boundary. Time doesn’t exist
in the Planning server before this fence. Orders and
changes aren’t recognized before this point in time. Used
with the end of time, the region defines the time period
within which the system operates. Solvers don’t
recognize times before the start of time.
Current Time This is the current date and time as seen by the Planning
server. The current date and time are static values that are
initially set by the Production DataLink process. This
fence is used to define various time offsets respected by
the planning solvers.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 4 - 5
Early Fence This is the beginning date and time of the interval within
which the solver processes the elements of the material-
and capacity-feasible plans. You’ll usually set the early
fence to the current date.
Capacity Fence The date and time that solvers begin ignoring capacity
violations. After the date, the Material Planning, Feasible
Planning, and LP Solvers ignore violations; however, the
Optimizer doesn’t use this date to process capacity
violations. If the capacity fence intersects with an
aggregate capacity bucket, then aggregate capacity
violations are respected for the current bucket interval but
ignored for the succeeding bucket intervals.
Late Fence The LP Solver and the Optimizer use this fence as a point
to distinguish the planning horizon. They can’t schedule
tasks after this fence.
End of Time This is the concluding time boundary. Time doesn’t exist
in the Planning server after this date. Solvers and the
Optimizer don’t recognize orders or changes after this
date.
Creating a Material Plan
Usage Use the Material Planning page to set up parameters for creating a
material feasible plan. This solver creates a simple material plan for
your master- or material-planning items.
Object PL_GEN_MATERIAL_PL
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan,
Global Preferences
Prerequisites If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and
Process server must be running.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
4 - 6 G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Generate Plan - Material Planning page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID.
The Material Planning Solver creates a simple material plan that resolves most material shortages.
After you make your selections on this page, click the Run Material Planning button if you
want to generate a plan.
You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you
might have established a test database or work with a different set of data. Using the Planning
Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server that contains the
database you want to use to generate the plan. You don’t have to use the Define Business Rules
option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been defined by that option
are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, use the Planning Server
Definition page.
Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily.
For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see “Managing the
Master and Material Plans”.
For more information about using the Material Planning Solver to generate a master or
material plan, see “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
Planning Mode
This group box provides options for defining which data the Production DataLink uses when the
material plan is created. The following values are available:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 4 - 7
Regenerative This is the default value. When you run the Material
Planning Solver in this mode, all tasks or orders with a
status of planned are deleted from existing data and a
material plan is generated for all inventory items. Using
this mode, the system erases all previous supply and
demand relationships (recorded in the pegging) and
reschedules all independent demand back to its original
due date.
Net Change When you use this mode to run the Material Planning
Solver, the system produces a material plan only for those
items that have shortages. This includes subassemblies
and raw materials. When there is a material shortage
recorded by the pegged chain, the entire part that is in
demand is planned again.
When a supply is late for a demand but pegged, the system doesn’t consider it a material
shortage. When you plan for a part again in the Net Change mode, the system deletes all
planned supplies and returns any end-demands for that part to their due date. In addition, all
pegging history for that part is deleted. All other parts remain unchanged.
The new net change ignores and may cause material shortages due to late demands as orders are
rescheduled to satisfy supply. You can eliminate these shortages by running the Feasible
Planning Solver or using the Late Supplies Inquiry in the Planning server to fix them.
The Material Planning Solver uses the following information to process a material feasible plan.
Select the Calculate Low Level Codes check box to verify the accuracy of low-level codes. The
code is a number that identifies the lowest level in a bill of material (BOM) at which a component
appears. The Planning engine maintains and calculates these codes for items. When you select
this check box, the system calculates the low-level code for each item prior to the MaterialPlanning run.
Because the Material Planning Solver plans items in low-level code order, it is important to
ensure that the low-level code associated with each item is accurate before you run Material
Planning, especially if there have been BOM changes.
Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate whether you want the Material Planning
Solver to plan for meeting safety-stock levels. When this check box is selected, the solver
ignores safety-stock constraints. As a result, the solver doesn’t plan supply for safety-stock
demand. You can use this option for “what if” scenarios.
When you select the Include Capacity check box, the Material Planning Solver minimizes
capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence when it generates the plan. This
capacity repair tries to reschedule tasks earlier to find capacity. The solver doesn’t violate the
pegged chain record of supply and demand to reschedule the tasks, nor does it place tasks beforethe early fence to reschedule the tasks. As the default, this check box is clear.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
4 - 8 G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The Include Capacity option isn’t the same as the Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the
Feasible Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs capacity level by rescheduling
tasks earlier on the primary resource, regardless of whether this action creates late supplies. In
doing so, it doesn’t guarantee material feasibility; on the other hand, the Feasible Planning Solver
moves the tasks earlier, then searches for alternate resources, and finally moves the task later
without ever creating late supplies.
We recommend that you use this repair only when you have a plan that isn’t heavily
capacity-constrained. In all other cases, you should use the Feasible Planning Solver to
resolve capacity overages.
Select the Use Fixed Period check box to define whether the fixed period of supply algorithm is
applied during the Material Planning run. When you select this option and a planned production,
transfer, or purchase order needs to be created, the Material Planning Solver determines the
maximum amount needed between the first demand and a fixed-period amount of time after all
existing orders have been used. The time is defined as a number of days on the item record. The
solver creates a single supply for this amount. The default value for this check box is clear.
Select the Material Plan Items check box to include material-planning items in the solver
processing. You can run a plan that includes both material- and master-planning items. Select
the Master Plan Items check box to include any items in Material Planning Solver processing
that have been selected as master-planning items. These values are assigned using the Planned
By option on the Business Unit Item Definition page.
After Material Planning Run
Before you run the Production DataLink, you’ll need to define whether you want to consolidate
planned purchase orders (POs) or run the Feasible Planning solver after the material planning run.
Select the Consolidate Planned PO (consolidate planned purchase orders) check box to invoke
the purchase order consolidation algorithm automatically after the solver run. This consolidation
behavior is the same as fixed period, except it acts on purchases only. The time period is defined
using purchasing order modifiers on the item definition. The default value for the check box is
clear.
Select the Run Feasible Planning check box if you want to automatically run the FeasiblePlanning Solver immediately after running the Material Planning Solver.
Creating a Feasible Plan
Usage Use the Feasible Planning page to set up parameters for generating an
executable plan that contains no tasks in the past, no material shortages,
and, optionally, no capacity violations. This solver ensures a feasible
plan for your master- or material-planning items.
Object PL_GEN_FEASIBLE_PL
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan,
Feasible Planning
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 4 - 9
Prerequisites If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and
Process server must be running.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Generate Plan - Feasible Planning page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of thisPeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID.
The Feasible Planning Solver ensures material feasibility for all resolvable material violations
between the early fence and the end of time. If you select the Make Plan Capacity Feasible
option, it ensures capacity feasibility as well. The solver is designed to start from any initial plan
and turn it into an executable plan. It tries to do this while making only minimal changes to the
existing plan.
When the solver is invoked, it checks any current pegging for consistency and maintains that
pegging. The only time the solver modifies the pegging is as necessary to make the plan
material- and capacity-feasible. If pegging doesn’t exist, the Feasible Planning Solver creates the
pegging based on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis.
After you make your selections on this page, click the Run Feasible Planning button if you want
to generate a plan immediately. PeopleTools uses the current settings in the DataLink along with
any changes you made to solvers in the Generate Plan option to run the plan.
You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you
might have established a test database or work with a different set of data. Using the Planning
Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server containing the
database you want to use to generate the plan. You don’t have to use the Define Business Rules
option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been defined by that option
are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, use the Planning ServerDefinition page.
Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
4 - 1 0 G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see “Managing the
Master and Material Plans”.
For more information about using the Feasible Planning Solver to generate a master or
material plan, see “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
Select the Allow Material Reallocation check box to enable the Feasible Planning Solver to
correct material inversions by reallocating supply in the solver’s pegged chain. These inversions
occur when a supply task is late for the demand that it supplies. When material reallocation is
enabled, the solver tries to reallocate supply from a lower-priority pegged chain before trying to
reschedule the demand later or the supply earlier.
Select the Allow Item Substitution check box to indicate the Feasible Planning Solver can use
substitute items to correct material inversions. When you select this option, the solver tries to
reallocate the supply of a valid substitute item from a lower-priority pegged chain before
attempting to reschedule the demand or supply. You use item substitution if it helps make a late
supply on time, and during all reschedules to reduce excess inventory. If the check box is clear,
no substitutions are made during solver processing. For example, the Run Lateness Phase
doesn’t use item substitution.
Select the Allow Alternate Routing check box to enable the Feasible Planning Solver to source
material again to resolve material infeasibilities. When alternate routings are selected, the solver
tries to explode the supply for a violated demand again, using either alternate purchase or transfer
options. The Feasible Planning Solver will try to use alternate purchases or transfers to resolve a
material infeasibility before attempting to reschedule the demand or supply. Selecting alternate
routings also determines whether the system uses alternate production routings when the Make
Plan Capacity Feasible and the Run Lateness Phase check boxes are selected.
Select the Ignore Safety Stock check box to indicate that you don’t want the system to respect
safety-stock constraints during the processing of the Feasibility Planning Solver. As a result, the
solver won’t plan supply for safety-stock demand. If supply was created for safety-stock by an
earlier solver, the Feasible Planning Solver will recognize it as excess. As the default, the box
isn’t selected, meaning that safety-stock levels are accounted for in the planning process.
Select the Allow Rescheduling check box to control the rescheduling of tasks to resolve late
supplies by the Feasible Planning Solver. The pegged chains are rescheduled only after the
Feasible Planning Solver searches for any allowed alternate sources of supply.
Select the Make Plan Capacity Feasible check box to indicate you want the Feasible Planning
Solver to resolve capacity violations between the early fence and capacity fence. When the box
isn’t selected, the Feasible Planning Solver considers only material feasibility, not capacity
feasibility, when you run the plan.
The Make Plan Capacity Feasible option in the Feasible Planning Solver isn’t the same as the
Include Capacity option in the Material Planning Solver. The Material Planning Solver repairs
capacity level by rescheduling tasks earlier on the primary resource regardless of whether the
action creates late supplies. In doing so, it doesn’t guarantee material feasibility; on the other
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 4 - 1 1
hand, the Feasible Planning Solver moves the tasks earlier, then searches for alternate resources,
and finally moves the task later without ever creating late supplies.
The Feasible Planning Solver resolves aggregate resource violations, not detailed resource
violations.
If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Lateness phase of the Feasible Planning
Solver is executed after a material-or capacity-feasible plan is in place. This phase maintains the
feasibility of the schedule while searching for opportunities to reduce the lateness of demands that
have been delayed past their due date. As the default, the check box is clear. This phase adds
quality to your plan.
If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, you must also select the Allow
Rescheduling check box.
Use the Time Limit (minutes) field to define the maximum number of minutes the system runs
the Lateness Phase. When the Planning engine reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and
provides you with a plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60
minutes. You can’t enter a negative number.
The Lateness Phase potentially creates and deletes multiple orders. You shouldn’t use it if
you want to change the existing schedule minimally.
Use the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of the
Lateness Phase by entering a smaller time period. If the check box is clear, all late demands
between the early fence and end of time are considered in this phase. As the default, the check
box is clear.
You use the days after Current Time field to indicate how long after the current time the solver
should begin to ignore the Lateness Phase. The system considers this field if the Ignore
problems later than check box is selected. The value of this field represents a number of days
after current time. This offset from the current time defines a boundary after which late demands
are ignored by the Lateness Phase. An attempt isn’t made to reduce the lateness of demands that
start outside this boundary. The default value for the field is 30 days.
When you select the Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box the system maintains the
feasibility of the schedule while searching for opportunities to reduce excess inventory that
occurs between the early fence and end of time. It also searches for opportunities to satisfy
unfulfilled safety-stock requirements.
The Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box causes numerous reschedules and shouldn’t
be used if you want to change the existing schedule minimally.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
4 - 1 2 G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
If the Run Stock Adjustment Phase check box is selected, the Planning engine invokes this
feature when you run the Feasible Planning Solver after a material- or capacity-feasible plan is in
place. As the default, the check box is clear.
If you select the Run Lateness Phase check box, the Feasible Planning Solver executes the
Run Stock Adjustment Phase after the Lateness Phase.
Use the Time Limit field to enter the maximum number of minutes you want the Run Stock
Adjustment Phase to run. When the solver reaches the limit you set, it stops processing and
provides you with a plan up to the point that it stopped. The default value for this field is 60
minutes. You can’t enter negative numbers.
Select the Ignore problems later than check box to indicate that you want to limit the scope of
the Stock Reduction Phase by entering a smaller time period. If the check box is clear, the system
considers excess inventory and unfulfilled safety-stock that exist between the early fence and end
of time in this phase. As the default, the check box is clear.
When you enter a value in the days after Current Time field, the solver doesn’t attempt to
reduce excess inventory or fulfill safety-stock requirements outside of the time periods. Thedefault value for this field is 30 days.
This field is considered if the Ignore problems later than check box is selected. The value of
this field represents a number of days after the current time. This offset from current time defines
a boundary after which the Stock Reduction Phase ignores excess inventory and unfulfilled
safety-stock requirements.
For more information about the Lateness and Stock Adjustment Phases, see “Setting Up the
Production DataLink”.
Generating a Plan Using Linear Programming (LP)
Usage Use the LP Planning (linear programming planning) page when you
want to model your supply chain and compute schedules that optimize a
selected objective while satisfying a set of specified constraints on
operations. The LP Solver doesn’t ensure a material- or capacity-
feasible plan. You can use LP Solver solutions to feed into the Feasible
Planning Solver to obtain a feasible plan.
Object PL_GEN_LP Component
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Process, Generate Plan,
LP Planning
Prerequisites If you are going to generate a plan immediately, a Planning server and
Process server must be running.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 4 - 1 3
Generate Plan - LP Planning page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of thisPeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: User ID and Run Control ID.
Linear programming provides a global view of the supply chain problem. The LP Solver models
the planning constraints into a system of linear inequalities and then solves this linearly relaxed
system to obtain an optimal solution. While the solution contains global and optimal information
about the problem, it is a linear estimation, containing little task-specific information. To address
this, the solver automatically runs a post-processor that provides a real, task-based solution forplanning.
The post-processor is based on logic and procedures that build a task-level schedule from
aggregate solutions, such as sourcing, equipment selection, and general timing. The aggregate
solution is converted into a task-specific plan on a detailed timeline. This makes it possible for
the features of the LP Solver to work with the other solvers.
After you make your selections on this page, click the Run LP button if you want to generate a
plan immediately. PeopleTools uses the current settings in the Production DataLink along with
any changes you make to solvers in the Generate Plan option to run the plan.
You can temporarily change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you
might have established a test database or work with a different set of data. Using the Planning
Server option, you can change among your host machines to select the server containing the
database you want to use to generate the plan. You don’t have to use the Define Business Rules
option to make the change; however, only server templates that have been defined by that option
are available here. If you want to define a new server setting template, use the Planning Server
Definition page.
Click the Change Server Settings button to change the settings for a server temporarily.
For more information about using the Change Server Settings button, see the “Managing
the Master and Material Plans”.
Use the Carrying Cost Rate (%/year) field to define the annual percentage rate the solver uses
to calculate the cost of maintaining the inventory. The cost is based on a percentage of the
average inventory value for the year. This value is set during the Production DataLink process.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
4 - 1 4 G E N E R A T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The default value for the field is 10 if values haven’t been defined using PeopleSoft Enterprise or
Production Planning. You can’t change the value using the Generate Plan page.
Use the Late Shipment Penalty (%/day) field to define the percentage it costs your business on
a daily basis to miss a shipment date. The percentage is based on the standard cost of the item.
The default value for this field is 0.1; however, you can change the value for an LP Solver run.
The Number of Daily Periods field represents the total daily periods from the early fence that
you want to include in the plan. The default value for this field is 7. The smaller the number ofperiods you plan for, the more realistic you make your plan.
The Number of Weekly Periods field represents the total weekly periods following daily periods
that you want to include in your plan. The default value for this field is 4. You can use this field
to plan implicitly for monthly buckets as well. When the late fence exceeds the last weekly
period, then the LP Solver uses monthly buckets for the rest of the periods.
We recommend that you don’t enter more than 30 total periods in order for the LP Solver to
find optimal plans for large-scale problems. The total is the sum of daily and weekly
periods.
After the LP Run
Select the Run Feasible Planning after LP check box to invoke the Feasible Planning Solver
automatically after you run the LP Solver. Use the LP Solver to generate an initial plan when
there are more complex trade-off decisions in the supply chain network. These decisions might
include sourcing decisions, alternate resources, item substitution, or material allocations based on
demand priority. This is a regenerative process where the system reschedules all independent
demands to their due date and deletes all tasks with a status of Planned. We recommend that yourun the Feasible Planning Solver after you run the LP Solver to create a plan that is feasible.
For more information about using the LP Planning Solver to generate a master or material
plan, see “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 1
C H A P T E R 5
Managing the Master and Material Plans
The master plan enables you to plan for finished goods and key component materials. You can
use the master plan to ensure that top-level material and capacity requirements have been
accounted for before exploding lower-level material and capacity requirements. With PeopleSoft
Supply Chain Planning, you can create and maintain the master plan in either Enterprise Planning
or Production Planning.
The material plan enables you to plan for subassemblies and lower-level raw material
requirements. The material plan uses the results of the master plan to determine the requirements
for meeting the master plan.
You use PeopleSoft Production Planning to create and maintain the master and material plans.
Because a Production Planning model contains both master- and material-plan items, the plans
are similar in the information they produce and display. This chapter uses the material-plan pages
to describe how you use both plans; however, differences between the two plans are noted whenthey occur.
Overview of the Master and Material Planning Process
PeopleSoft Production Planning helps you manage the planning process by dividing it into a
series of sequential and incremental processes. Each plan in the process appears as a menu item,
enabling you to analyze item data at different planning levels as it progresses through the
planning process.
The master plan is designed for use in either the PeopleSoft Production Planning or Enterprise
Planning applications. When you use it for Enterprise Planning, the plan provides you a high-
level overview of your manufacturing plan. For example, it checks that you generally have
enough capacity and material to produce the total demand. In PeopleSoft Production Planning,
the master plan provides more detailed manufacturing data. We’ll focus on the master plan’s usewith the Production Planning application.
The material plan is the second in a series of plans. It is designed to provide you a means to
manage inventory levels, schedules, and availability of selected items, either manufactured or
purchased.
PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a model for both master planning and material
planning. You can control the generation of a material plan just for master-plan items or just
for material-plan items, or you can simultaneously generate a plan considering both master-
and material-plan items.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 2 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
PeopleSoft Demand Planning and Inventory Planning feed both the master and material plan.
Forecasts and inventory replenishment policies provide the basis that PeopleSoft Production
Planning uses to calculate its plans. Forecast quantities define the totals for both plans, while
inventory policies determine how items are planned and stocked.
A final plan in this series is the capacity plan. Data from the master and material plans feeds the
capacity plan. The capacity plan provides you an early warning about any major capacity
shortages with the current material or master plan.
For more information about the using the capacity plan, see “Managing the Capacity Plan”.
You can classify the same item differently across business units. For example, a service part
ordered on a sales order line might be defined as a distribution-plan item at a distribution
center and as a material-plan item at the plant where it is manufactured.
You can control the content and viability of master and material plans using solver controls. For
example, you can generate a plan that produces a simple plan for material but does not attempt to
solve certain types of resource capacity problems. Or, you can generate plans using several
iterations of solvers to produce plans that are material- and capacity-feasible.
After you generate a master or material plan, you can use a number of inquiries to review the
plans. You can also use the workbench to adjust your plan.
The following master and material plan inquiries are available:
Workbench You can use the Master or Material Plan Workbenches to
make changes to the plans. First, you determine which
items to work with using the respective workbenches.
From a link associated with an item, you can access the
Plan Summary page, from which you initiate changes
including production, purchase, and transfer order dates
and quantities. In addition, you can also review related
demand and supply information.
Plan Summary • The Master or Material Plan Summary provides you
with an aggregate (bucketed) view of the supply and
demand for a business unit item. You can use the
summary as part of the workbench, where you can
make changes to the plan or review information.
Details • The Master or Material Plan Detail Inquiry displays the
sequence of supply and demand over time for an item.
You use the inquiry when you want to review the time-
phased list of demand and supply for an item.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 3
Exceptions • Use the Master or Material Plan Exceptions Inquiry to
review exceptions for individual items in a plan. An
exception is a condition that prevents the master or
material plan from being feasible. The Exceptions
Inquiry and Planning Scorecard display similar data.
The main difference is that the Exceptions Inquiry lets
you review all exceptions for an item in the same grid,
while the Scorecard provides some summary features
by exception type.
Planning Scorecard • Use the Planning Scorecard to review the efficiency of
your overall enterprise plan. It shows you constraint
violations, the number of violations, and a score for the
violations. In PeopleSoft Production Planning, a score
is the weighted sum of constraint violations in a
schedule. The score gives you an idea of how valid, or
acceptable, the schedule is.
Master Plan Process Flow
You begin the master-planning process by ensuring that items you want to include in the plan
have been set up for master planning. You can select Master Planning from the Planned By field
available options on the Planning page in the Item Attributes by Units component of PeopleSoft
Inventory. The Production DataLink plans for only those items that have a Planned By value set
to Master Planning or Material Planning.
To implement a master plan, perform the following steps:
1. After you define the business unit and classify the items for master planning, use the Plan
Production menu option to set up planning options that include item source code, time fences,
aggregate items, promise dates, and demand priorities. A master-plan item can only be a
component of another master- plan item and can only supply a master- or distribution-plan
item through a transfer.
Master plan items must have their parent items defined as Master Planning.
2. Use the Production DataLink to establish parameters for the master plan.
3. Generate the initial master plan, defining which solvers you want to run with the plan.
4. Review and make changes to the master plan. After you make changes, you can run as many
iterations of the plan that you need to achieve the most viable plan, using the workbench and
solvers to continue to improve the plan.
5. Commit the plan. For master plan items, you can select whether you want to extract planning
messages for the item.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 4 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Material Plan Process Flow
You begin the material-planning process by ensuring that items you want to include in the plan
have been set up for material planning. You can select Material Planning from the Planned By
available options on the Planning page in the Item Attributes by Units component of PeopleSoft
Inventory.
To implement a material plan, perform the following steps:
1. After you define the business unit and classify the items for material planning, use the Plan
Production menu option to set up planning options that include item source code, time fences,
aggregate items, promise dates, and demand priorities. A material-plan item can be a
component of either material- or master-planning items and can supply a master- or material-
plan item through a transfer.
2. Change the Production DataLink to establish parameters for the material plan.
3. Generate the initial material plan, defining which solvers you want to run with the plan.
4. Review and make changes to the material plan. After you make changes, you can run as
many iterations of the plan that you need to achieve the most viable plan, using the
workbench and solvers to continue to improve the plan.
5. Commit the plan. For material-plan items, you can select whether you want to extract
planning messages for the item.
For more information about preparing to create a master plan, see Before You Begin.
For more information about setting up Production Planning data, see “Setting Up Production
Planning”.
Before You Begin
There are several prerequisites to include specific items in a master or material plan. The
following lists highlights those prerequisites:
• Define if you want an item to be sourced by transfer, make, or buy during the planning process,
and set the corresponding Planned By value (Master Planning or Material Planning) within the
Item Attributes by Unit page.
• Define a Planning server using the Planning Server Definition page in the General Options
component of the Define Business Rules menu.
• Ensure a Planning server is running. Using the Production DataLink, the server processes your
plan and returns the results to PeopleSoft Production Planning pages for you to review and
change.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 5
Maintaining Master and Material Plans
In order to effectively maintain the master plan and material plan, you need to have the ability to
view the plan details based on certain selection and filtering criteria, modify the plan as needed,
and save the plan. PeopleSoft Production Planning responds to this need by providing you with a
robust set of workbench and inquiry pages.
You use the Master and Material Plan Workbenches to view plan details based on certain
selection criteria, change plan elements as needed, and save the plan after reviewing the effects of
the changes. The workbenches display exceptions, planned actions, and planned transfers for the
replenishment of material or mater items.
After you identify an item to work with in the Master or Material Plan Workbenches, you can
drill down on the item by clicking the Item ID link from the Item tab of the Plan Summary page.
You can then perform the following tasks using workbench drill-down pages:
• Add production, purchase, and transfer orders.
• Change current task quantities and dates.
• Freeze tasks.
• Show all related supply and demand tasks.
Defining the Master or Material Workbench Search Parameters
Usage Use the Item page to retrieve and work with material- or master-plan
item data. After you access the workbench, you can link to other tools
to maintain the item.
Object Name PL_WBENCH_SRCH
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench
Prerequisites A material or master plan must have been created.
Access
Requirements
Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the workbench with
material- or master-plan data
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 6 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Material Plan Workbench - Item page
Select a Unit from the prompt to use in the workbench. To limit the list of items, use the Item ID
field to define a specific item to work with. The Config Code (configuration code) provides a
way to define a configured item further. The Planner Code defines the person or group
responsible for an item, while the Family and Category display the production planning
classification for the item.
Use the Planned By group box to indicate if you want to include only item data for the material
plan or for the master plan or for both.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Unit Shows the business unit to which the item belongs.
Item ID Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track and
retrieve the item. The remaining data relates to this item.
If you want to see additional material- or master-plan
details for the item, double click it to access summary
information. If you don’t define a single item, then all
items in the business unit appear in the workbench.
Item tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Description A brief description of the material- or master-plan item
you selected to work with.
Planner Cd (planner code) Displays the person who is responsible for the item.
Planned By Displays the type of planning item: Material or Master.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 7
Family Displays the group of products to which this item belongs.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Config Code (configuration code) provides a way to define a configured item further. The
method is based on the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled. When you click an Item ID,
the system takes you directly to the Master or Material Plan Summary page.
Using the Master or Material Plan Summary
Usage Use the Master or Material Plan Summary page to retrieve data for the
material or master plan. You can access this page through either the
Material or Master Plan Workbench.
Object Name PL_MRP_HORIZONTAL
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, Master or Material Plan Summary
Prerequisites A master or material plan must have been created.
Access
Requirements
Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with
material- or master- plan data.
Material Plan Summary page
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 8 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The Material or Master Plan Summary provides you with a horizontal aggregate (bucketed) view
of the supply and demand for a business unit item. Using the Master or Material Plan Summary,
you first define the general parameters such as the Start Date, Period Duration, Number of
Periods, and Planning Server. After you define the parameters, you use the Search button topopulate the summary.
The summary includes row types, past-due quantities, and dates that represent the period
duration. The maximum number of columns for the summary is 54: one column for the row type,
one for the past-due quantity, and 52 date columns for all the weeks in one year. To maintain
data for the plan, you select the row type on the date you want to work with. The system provides
drill-down pages and links you use to access and change data for scheduled receipts and planned
orders.
Click the Scheduled Receipts row value on the date you want to work with to performmaintenance functions.
The Unit is the business unit that contains the item for which you want to perform a Material or
Master Plan Summary. It is a required field. You also are required to select an Item ID for the
summary. To define the specific instance of a configured item you want to review, select a
Configuration Code.
The Start Date provides an exact starting time for the period of time you want to review in the
material or master plan. You can review data from the start of the plan or at different intervals in
the plan. If you do not enter a date, the default is Sunday of the current week. For example, if the
current date is Tuesday, the 10th of October, the start date that appears in the field would be
Sunday, the 8th of October.
The Period Duration defines the measurement of time for which you want to review summary
information. Valid values are Day, Week, and Month, with Week being the default value. When
you define the Number of Periods, the value is measured by the value you define for the
duration. The default value for the number of periods is 7. The number of periods you define
determines the number of tabs that appear in the summary. Each tab contains seven planningperiods.
Each time you change a value such as the period duration, item ID, or row type, you must
click the Search button to refresh the page with data from your selection.
Use the available options for the Planning Server to select a different Planning server template
name. This is the server from which you want to extract summary data.
Click the Change Server Settings button to connect to another Planning server
temporarily.
Row types appear in the summary with the following information:
Row Type This is a kind of planning data for the item. The data can
be cumulative or calculated on a period-by-period basis.
You use the Scheduled Receipts and New Planned
Orders row types to make changes to your plan. These
rows provide links to drill-down pages.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 9
Past Due Displays any quantities that are past due on the start date.
Date These sequential dates correspond to the period duration
you define for the page. The dates can be at daily,
weekly, or monthly intervals. You select the Scheduled
Receipts and New Planned Orders row type dates to
make changes to your master or material plan.
For more information about changing row types, see Changing Row Types.
The Change Row Types button provides a means for you to add, delete, or change the display of
data for the summary. The changes you make are temporary. When you exit the workbench and
return, the system uses the default values, not the row types you changed. After you change row
types, use the Search button to refresh the list.
The following row types are available for the Master and Material Plan Summaries:
Actual Supply The scheduled receipts from existing purchase orders,
inventory transfer orders, or production orders.
The actual supply = scheduled production supply +
scheduled purchased supply + scheduled transfer supply.
Customer Orders Displays the quantity of orders generated by customers.
Dependent Demand Displays the demand quantity that occurs when the item is
required to meet demands of another transfer or
production task.
Excess Inventory The maximum amount of inventory that is allowable. The
planned inventory on hand should never exceed this
number.
Independent Demand Displays the total amount of planned production,
purchases, and transfers for this period.
New Planned Orders The sum of planned production, purchases, and transfers
for an item in a period.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 1 0 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Periods of Supply A forward-looking calculation of a period’s planned on-
hand balance, which determines how many days into the
future that a period’s planned on-hand balance covers the
total demand. When planned on-hand quantities are not
enough to cover all of the total demand for a particular
bucket, Production Planning prorates the number of days
by the ratio of the planned on-hand quantity available over
total demand. When there isn’t enough total demand
through the periods reported, the Periods of Supply bucket
displays 99999.
Planned On Hand Displays a cumulative inventory balance from the
beginning of the planning horizon. This includes the prior
period’s ending on-hand balance plus the total supply,
minus the total demand for the current period. The total
includes planned orders as well.
Planned Production Displays the suggested production orders created for this
period when you generated the material or master plan.
Planned Purchases Displays the suggested purchase orders created for this
period when you generated the material or master plan.
Production Demand Displays the total amount of demand from production for
this time period.
Production Supply Displays the scheduled receipts from manufacturing for
this time period. The receipts are in the form of
production orders.
Projected On Hand Displays the cumulative projected inventory balance from
the beginning of the planning horizon. This includes the
prior period’s ending on-hand balance plus the total
supply, minus the total demand for the current period.
Purchase Supply The scheduled receipts from vendors for this period. The
receipts are in the form of purchase orders.
Safety Stock The minimum quantity of stock planned to always be in
inventory to protect against fluctuations in demand or
supply.
Scheduled Production The total amount of demand from production, with
statuses of Firmed, Released, Dispatched, or In-Process.
Scheduled Purchases The sum of purchases, with statuses of Firmed or Open.
Scheduled Receipts Displays the total quantity for this period from the
following row types: Scheduled Production, Scheduled
Purchases, and Scheduled Transfers.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 1 1
Scheduled Transfers Displays the total amount of demand from transfer orders
placed on the source business unit for this time period.
Starting On Hand The cumulative inventory level at the beginning of the
period you defined for the Material or Master Plan
Summary. The history begins with the starting quantity
for the planning horizon.
Target Inventory Level Displays the average of safety stock plus excess inventory.
Total Demand Defined as the sum of Net Forecast, Customer Orders,
Inter-Unit Orders, and Dependent Demand. The total
demand consists of both independent and dependent
demand. The actual forecast is included as independent
demand.
Total Forecast Displays the original forecast quantity in the planning
period, before forecast consumption occurs.
Total Orders Displays the sum of customer orders and interunit orders.
Total Supply Displays the total quantity of actual supply and new
planned orders.
Transfer Demand Displays the scheduled transfers to other business units in
the form of transfer orders.
Transfer Supply Displays the scheduled receipts from other business units
in the form of transfer orders.
Changing Server Settings
Usage Use the Server Configuration Settings page to define the Planning server
from which you want to extract material- or master-plan data or to
review or change the current server settings temporarily. You need to
use this page only if a Planning server has not been defined that meets
your requirements. Use the Planning Server field to select an existing
server.
Object Name PL_CHG_SERVERS_SP
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Material or Master Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Change Server Settings button
Prerequisite A valid server and user name must exist for a host in order to link to the
Planning engine.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 1 2 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Server Configuration Settings page
You can change which host machine or database you are linked to. For example, you might have
a simulation server established or a different set of data that you work with. Using this page, you
can change among your host machines without navigating to the Define Business Rules option,
where you also define server settings.
You can link to a server either by using the Planning Server field to select the server or by
completing fields on the page.
To establish a link between PeopleTools and the Planning engine, use the Host Name field to
define the machine or device that runs the Planning system. Type the Server Name to specify
the logical name of the Planning server instance. Use the Port field to define a valid port to use
in connecting to the Planning system.
The Timeout field defines how long the system will wait for a response from the Planning server.
This means Production Planning will wait for this duration before returning an incomplete
operation message. For example, the system may have lost its connection to the server, may have
found no rows of data, or could not connect to the server. You enter the time as seconds.
Changing Row Types
Usage Use the Change Row Types page to define which types of planning data
you want to include in the Material or Master Plan Summary. The data
is extracted from the Planning engine.
Object Name PL_ROW_TYPES_POPUP
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master
Plan or Material Plan Workbench, Master or Material Plan
Summary, Change Row Types
Prerequisite A valid Server and User Name must exist for a host to link to the
Planning engine.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 1 3
Change Row Types page
You can retrieve information with row types that display additional details about the master or
material plan item. Row types enable you to choose which reporting variables you want to
display in the summary. This is specific information that can be displayed on a row of the
summary. The information is calculated for specified periods and in some instances is
cumulative for the planning period.
Values that appear on this page are those that already appear in the summary. The values also
appear in the order in which they appear in the summary. To select a new value for the summary
and to define its placement in the summary, use the down arrow. Select the down arrow of the
row type that you want the new row type to follow in the summary list.
To add a row type, click the Add Row Type button after the row type has been defined.
To remove a row type, click the Remove Row Type button.
To save selections you make, click the OK button.
To remove or add row types for the inquiry, click the Search button to refresh the page after
you return to the Material or Master Plan Summary page.
Drilling Down to Maintain Scheduled Receipts
Usage Use the Plan Summary: Scheduled Receipts page to view material- or
master-plan item receipt details. You use this page to review current
orders for the item that you selected to work with in the workbench.
Object Name PL_SCHED_RCPT
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, click a value on the Scheduled Receipts row
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 1 4 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Prerequisites A planning task must exist.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Material Plan Workbench - Plan Summary: Scheduled Receipts page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Item ID, Configuration Code, and Std
UOM (standard unit of measure).
The Max Rows (maximum rows) field displays the maximum number of rows of data that can be
retrieved from the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single planning task. The
system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page
in Application Designer.
The Start Date and End Date display the time period that you selected using the Plan Summarypage. This period is based on the period duration you define for the plan’s summary.
Click the Return button to return to the previous page and update the changes you make when
you add planned orders or link to the existing orders and make changes. For example, if you
decide to change the order quantity using the Order Type link, then you must click the Return
button to see the change in this page.
You can’t make changes to data that appears on the Scheduled Receipts page. When you
return from other links, click the Return button to update the page.
The following information also appears on the Scheduled Receipts page:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 1 5
Planning Task Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track the
task to which the planned order is related. This might be a
production, purchase, or transfer task.
Show Supply Use this link to access all supply tasks related to this item
for this period. Supply tasks include production,
purchase, and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with
supply tasks.
Show Demand Use this link to access all demand tasks related to this item
for this period. Demand tasks include forecasts and sales
orders. Select the link to work with supply tasks.
Order Type Use this link to access any of the planned production,
purchase, or transfer orders for this item for this period.
Select the type of order you want to link to.
Start Qty Displays the quantity that currently exists for the
corresponding planning task. The quantity can be a
production, purchase, or transfer amount. You can change
the value by linking to the order type.
End Date Time Displays when the quantity from the planning task will be
available. You can change the quantity by linking to the
order type.
Order Status Displays the status of the order: Entered, Released, In
Process, Planned, Canceled, and Completed.
Frozen Flag When you select this, the planning task is frozen,
indicating that the system does not consider it when it
processes the material or master plan.
Showing Supply
Usage Use the Task Supply - Type/Item page to access all supply tasks related
to this item for this period. Supply tasks include production, purchase,
and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with supply tasks.
Object Name None
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, click a value on the Scheduled Receipts row, click Show
Supply
Prerequisites A planning task must exist.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 1 6 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Task Supply: Type/Item page
The Task ID identifies the task that is supplying the item.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Sequence Displays the order in which this task belongs in the
pegged-chain sequence.
Level Displays the BOM level in the pegged chain at which this
task occurs.
Type Displays the type of task this entry represents in the
pegged demand.
Type/Item tab
See the exhibit above for a view of this tab.
Unit Displays the business unit in which the task takes place.
Item ID Defines the item that the supply task is producing.
Quantity Displays the amount of the item that the supply task is
producing.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 1 7
UOM Displays how the item is measured.
Dates/Vendor/Task Name tab
Viewing the Dates/Vendor/Task Name tab
Start Date Displays when the task is currently scheduled to begin.
End Date Displays when the task is currently scheduled to end.
Vendor Defines the person or organization providing the order.
Task Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track a
task that appears in the pegged chain.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 1 8 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Showing Demand
Usage Use the Pegged Demand - Type/Item page to access all demand tasks
related to this item for this period. Demand tasks include production,
purchase, and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with demand tasks.
Object Name None
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, click a value on the Scheduled Receipts row, click Show
Demand
Prerequisites A planning task must exist.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 1 9
Viewing the Type/Item tab
A pegged-chain ties tasks and top-level demand together. In doing so, Production Planning can
explicitly track and record what supplies are being used to satisfy what demands. Through this
process the system first determines which independent or top-level demand has the highest
demand priority. Then, it determines the lateness preference ranking for dependent demand tasks.
The result is a sequencing of tasks to reach the demand. The Show Demand page shows these
tasks and information about the tasks.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Sequence Displays the order in which this task belongs in the
pegged chain sequence.
Level Displays the BOM level in the pegged chain at which this
task occurs.
Type Displays the type of task this entry represents in the
pegged demand.
Type/Item tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this page.
Unit Displays the unit in which the item is being planned.
Item ID Displays the identifier the system uses to track the item.
Quantity Displays the amount of the item to be produced by this
task.
UOM (unit of measure) Displays how the item is measured. This is the
stockkeeping unit of measure for the item.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 2 0 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Dates/Task Name tab
Viewing the Dates/Task Name tab
The Start and End Date values display when the task begins and ends. The Task is the unique
identifier the system uses to track a task that appears in the pegged chain.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Drilling Down to Add or Change Planned Orders
Usage Use the Plan Summary: Planned Orders page to add, change, or review
planned production, purchase, and transfer orders in the material or
master plan. You use this page to review current orders for the item that
you selected to work with in the workbench.
Object Name PL_PLANNED_ORDERS
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row.
Prerequisites You must select an item that is planned by the current material or master
plan.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 2 1
Material Plan Workbench - Plan Summary: Planned Orders page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, Configuration Code, and Std
UOM (standard unit of measure).
The Max Rows (maximum rows) field displays the maximum number of rows of data that can be
retrieved from the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single planning task. The
system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page
in Application Designer.
The Start Date and End Date display the time period that you selected using the Plan Summary
page. This period is based on the period duration you define for the plan’s summary. Click the
following buttons to create new orders:
The Add Production button opens the Planned Production
page, where you can create a new production order.
The Add Purchase button opens the Planned Purchase
page, where you can create a new purchase order.
The Add Transfer button opens the Planned Transfer page,
where you can create a new transfer order.
Use the Return button to return to the previous page and update the changes you make when you
add planned orders or link to the existing orders and make changes. For example, if you decide to
change the order quantity using the Order Type link, then you must click the Return button to see
the change in this page.
You can’t make changes to data that appears on the Planned Orders page. When you return
from other links, click the Return button to update the page.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 2 2 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The following information also appears on the Planned Orders page:
Planning Task Displays the unique identifier the system uses to track the
task to which the planned order is related. This might be a
production, purchase, or transfer task.
Show Supply Use this link to access all supply tasks related to this item
for this period. Supply tasks include production,
purchase, and transfer tasks. Select the link to work with
supply tasks.
Show Demand Use this link to access all demand tasks related to this item
for this period. Demand tasks include forecasts and sales
orders. Select the link to work with supply tasks.
Order Type Use this link to access any of the planned production,
purchase, or transfer orders for this item for this period.
Select the type of order you want to link to.
Start Qty (start quantity) Displays the quantity that currently exists for the
corresponding planning task. The quantity can be a
production, purchase, or transfer amount. You can change
the value by linking to the order type.
End Date Time Displays when the quantity from the planning task will be
available. You can change the quantity by linking to the
order type.
Frozen Flag When you select this check box, the planning task is
frozen, meaning the system does not consider it when it
processes the material or master plan.
Adding Production Orders
Usage Use the Planned Orders - Planned Production page to add a production
order for the current material- or master-plan item.
Object Name PL_ADD_PLAN_PROD
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, click the Add
Production button.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 2 3
Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Planned Production page
When you select to add a new production order, you use the Planned Production page. The order
you create is entered into the Planning server as a planned order. After you enter orderinformation, click the Apply button to create the order.
Click the Return button to return to the Planned Orders page without creating a production order,
or click it after you click the Apply button to create the order. Remember to click Return to
view the production order you create on this page.
You can’t add a production order unless the item is the same as its associated primary item.
If it isn’t, a message alerts you that you can add production orders for primary items only.
This prevents you from creating orders for co-products.
The Business Unit, Item ID, and Config Code (configuration code) fields are the selections you
made to use the Master or Material Plan Workbench and are for display only.
When you add a production order, you complete the following information:
End Date Defines when the quantity from this task will be available.
This field is required.
Production Area Defines where the production is taking place. Use the
drop-down list to obtain valid areas.
Order Qty (order quantity) Defines the amount of the item you want to produce. This
field is required.
Std UOM (standard unit of
measure)
This value is a display-only value and represents how the
item is measured.
Frozen Select this check box to freeze the production task. This
means the system does not consider it when it processes
the material or master plan.
Production Option Defines how the item is manufactured. Use the drop-
down list to obtain valid options. This field is required.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 2 4 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Adding Purchase Orders
Usage Use the Planned Orders - Planned Purchase page to add a purchase order
for the current material- or master-plan item.
Object Name PL_ADD_PLAN_PURCH
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, click the Add
Purchase button
Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Planned Purchase page
The new purchase order you create is entered into the Planning server as a planned order. After
you enter order information, click the Apply button to create the order. Click the Return button
to return to the Planned Orders page without creating a purchase order, or click it after you click
the Apply button to create the order. Remember to click Return to view the purchase order you
create in this page.
The Business Unit, Item ID, and Config Code (configuration code) fields are defaults from the
workbench.
When you add a purchase order, you complete the following information:
Purchase Option Defines how the item is purchased, including the vendor.
Use the drop-down list to obtain valid options. This field
is required.
Delivery Date Defines when the quantity from this task will be available.
This field is required.
Frozen Select this check box to freeze the purchase task. This
means the system does not consider it when it processes
the material or master plan.
Order Qty (order quantity) Defines the amount of the item you want to purchase.
This field is required.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 2 5
Std UOM (standard unit of
measure)
This value is a display-only value and represents how the
item is measured.
Adding Transfers
Usage Use the Planned Orders - Planned Transfer page to add a transfer order
for the current material- or master-plan item.
Object Name PL_ADD_PLAN_TFR
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, click the Add
Transfer button
Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Planned Transfer page
If you want to add a new transfer order, you use the Planned Transfer page to define another
business unit (source unit) that can supply the item you need. The order you create is entered into
the Planning server as a planned order. After you enter order information, click the Apply button
to create the order. Click the Return button to return to the Planned Orders page without creating
a transfer, order or click it after you click the Apply button to create the order. Remember to
click Return to view the transfer order you create in this page.
The Dest Unit (destination unit) is the unit for which you want to create supply. The Source Bus
Unit (source business unit) is the unit that is going to supply the item. The field is required. The
Item ID and Config Code (configuration code) fields are for display-only values for the transfer.
When you add a transfer order, you complete the following information:
End Date Defines when the quantity from this task will be available.
This field is required.
Frozen Select this check box to freeze the production task. This
means the system does not consider it when it processes
the material or master plan.
Order Qty (order quantity) Defines the amount of the item you want to produce. This
field is required.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 2 6 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Transfer Option Defines how the item is processed during its movement.
Data appearing in the field is based on transfer options
you create or on the transfer type. A transfer type is a
planned or existing interunit transfer task where the
system processes the transfer item for only a single
location. Use the drop-down list to obtain valid options.
This field is required.
Maintaining Production Orders
Usage Use the Production Orders page to view or make changes to an existing
production order for the current material- or master-plan item.
Object Name PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, select a
production Order Type
Prerequisite A planned production order must already exist.
Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Production Orders page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Config Code
(configuration code), Std UOM (standard unit of measure), Production Area, and Production
Status.
The Planned Production page displays the production tasks for the order type you selected on the
Planned Orders page. You can delete the order, freeze it, change its quantity, or change the start
and end times of the production tasks used to complete the order.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 2 7
The item that appears on the page may not be the same item you accessed in the workbench.
The item ID is based on the item associated with the production ID. If you are using co-
products, the item will always be the primary item.
Select the Cancel Production check box to remove the order from the plan. When you cancel an
order, you make it inactive so that the system does not consider it when processing the material or
master plan. Select the Frozen Flag check box to change the status of the order to Frozen,meaning the system does not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. The
difference between deleting an order and freezing an order is that you can unfreeze and use afrozen order. Use the Order Qty field to change a production order quantity.
The lower portion of the page displays tasks associated with the production order. The Step and
Operation values display the order in which a specific task is performed, while the Start Date
Time and End Date Time values display the beginning and ending times for each task. You can
change these values to a valid time in the planning period, whether the task is frozen or not. You
receive a warning message when you change the time for a frozen task. The Status displays the
current state of the task, not the production status that appears in the top portion of the page. You
can also change the status of a production order’s task by selecting the Frozen Flag check box
for the task.
Use the following buttons to work with production orders:
The View Outputs button links to the View Outputs page,
where you can review the output type and remaining
quantities.
You must click the Apply button after you complete your
changes for the planned production order and tasks. This
enters you changes into the system. You still must use the
Refresh button when you return to the Planned Orders
page to view the changes you made in this page.
Click the Return button to go back to the Planned Orders
page. If you made changes, you must first click the Apply
button to enter the changes before you return to the
Planned Orders page.
Viewing Outputs
Usage Use the Planned Production - View Outputs page to view the end items
for a production order.
Object Name PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Material or Master Plan, Use, Material or
Master Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search button,
select a date in the Planned On Hand row type, select a production
Order Type, View Outputs
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 2 8 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Access
Requirements
To access the View Outputs page, click the View Outputs button on the
Production Orders page.
Material Plan Summary - Planned Production: View Outputs page
Information on the View Outputs page is for display only. You can view the Output Type for
the Item ID. Output types include the following:
Primary Item The main item being produced on a given piece of
production or production option. One primary item can
exist on a given production or production option. Primary
items must be produced at the last operation.
Co-product An item that is produced on a given piece of production or
production option. Multiple co-products can exist on a
given piece of production or production option. Co-
products must be produced at the last operation.
Recycle by-Product An item that is produced incidentally on a given piece of
production or production option. A by-product is
considered recycled when it can be used in some way,
either by its own or another operation, by another
production option, or by selling it.
Waste by-Product An item that is produced incidentally on a given piece of
production or production option. A by-product is
considered a waste when it isn’t reused in any fashion and
might have to be disposed of.
Teardown A teardown production order enables the breaking up of
an assembly and returning its reusable components to
inventory.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 2 9
Maintaining Purchase Orders
Usage Use the Purchase Orders page to view or make changes to an existing
purchase order for the current material- or master-plan item.
Object Name PL_VIEW_PURCHASE
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, select a
purchase Order Type
Prerequisites A planned purchase order must already exist.
Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Purchase Orders page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Std UOM (standard unitof measure), and Purchase Order.
The Purchase Orders page displays the purchase order you selected on the Planned Order page.
You can delete the order, freeze it, change its quantity or change the delivery date. Select the
Delete check box to remove the order from the plan. When you delete an order, you make itinactive so that the system does not consider it when processing the material or master plan.
Select the Frozen check box to change the status of the order to Frozen, meaning the system does
not consider it when it processes the material or master plan. The difference between deleting an
order and freezing an order is that you can unfreeze and use a frozen order. The Status displays
the current state of the purchase order. Use the Order Qty (order quantity) field to change a
production order quantity.
The lower portion of the page displays the Adjusted Schedule Qty (adjusted schedule quantity),
Release Date, and Schedule Qty (schedule quantity). You can change the schedule quantity.
The Delivery Date displays when the order is due to arrive. The date is based on the Receiving
Calendar value so that the order will arrive at the receiving business unit during valid operating
hours. The Vendor ID displays the person or organization that is providing the item.
After you make changes, click the Apply button to enter the changes into the system, then click
the Cancel button to return to the Planned Orders page. Remember that you have to click the
Return button to see the changes you make to the purchase order.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 3 0 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Maintaining Transfer Orders
Usage Use the Transfer Orders page to add a view or make changes to an
existing production order for the current material- or master-plan item.
Object Name PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, select an Item ID, click the Search
button, select a value on the New Planned Orders row, select a
transfer Order Type
Prerequisites A planned transfer order must already exist.
Material Plan Workbench - Planned Orders: Transfer Orders page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Config Code (configuration code), Std
UOM (standard unit of measure), and Status.
The Transfer Orders page displays the transfer order you selected on the Planned Orders page.
You can cancel the order, freeze it, and change its quantity or delivery date. The Transfer Name
defines the unique ID the system uses to track the movement of an item from one business unit to
another. The Source Bus Unit (source business unit) is the shipping unit to which the itembelongs. The Destination Unit is the receiving business unit.
Select the Cancel check box to cancel the order. When you cancel an order, you make it inactive
so that the system does not consider it when processing the material or master plan. Select the
Frozen check box to change the status of the order to Frozen, meaning the system does not
consider it when it processes the material or master plan. The difference between canceling an
order and freezing an order is that you can unfreeze and use a frozen order.
The lower portion of the page displays information about the transfer task. The Start Qty (start
quantity) field displays the original amount of the transfer. Use the Order Qty (order quantity)
field to change the amount of the transfer. The Start Date Time and Delivery Date values
display when the item leaves the source business unit and arrives at the destination business unit.
You can change the delivery date value to a valid time in the planning period, whether the task is
frozen or not.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 3 1
The Shipping Calendar and Receiving Calendar fields display the calendars this transfer uses.
When you use shipping and receiving calendars with each other, the Planning system schedules
task start and end times so that they begin within valid calendar dates and times for the sending
unit and so they end in valid dates for the receiving unit. As the system determines valid calendardates, it adjusts the duration of the task to fall within these dates.
Data appears in the Transfer Option field based on the transfer type value. A transfer type is a
planned or existing interunit transfer task where the system processes the transfer item for only a
single location.
After you make changes, click the Apply button to enter the changes into the system, then click
the Cancel button to return to the Planned Orders page. Remember that you have to click theReturn button to see the changes you make to the purchase order.
Analyzing the Master or Material Plan
After you create a material or master plan, you can use four options to review and work with the
plan. The options provide you with different methods for reviewing the plans. You can generate
the plan again to incorporate your changes and to improve the quality of your plan.
The options for analyzing the material or master plan include:
Material or Master Plan
Summary
Provides you with an aggregate (bucketed) view of the
supply and demand for a business unit item. You can use
the summary as part of the workbench where you can
make changes to the plan or as a stand-alone, display-only
detailed review. You mainly want to see that an item’s
supply meets the demand for the item in any given period.
Material or Master Plan
Detail Inquiry
Displays the sequence of supply and demand over time for
an item. Use this inquiry when you want to review the
time-phased view of demand and supply for an item.
Material or Master Plan
Exceptions
Displays exceptions for individual items in a plan. An
exception is a condition that prevents the material or
master plan from being feasible. The Exceptions Inquiry
and Planning Scorecard display similar data. The main
difference is that the Exception Inquiry enables you to
review all exceptions for an item in the same grid,
whereas the Scorecard provides some summary features
by exception type.
Material or Master
Planning Scorecard
Displays constraint violations, the number of violations,
and a score for the violations. In PeopleSoft Production
Planning, a score is the weighted sum of constraint
violations in a schedule. The score gives you an idea of
how valid, or acceptable, the schedule is.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 3 2 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reviewing the Master or Material Plan Summary
Usage Use the Material or Master Plan Summary page to view and analyze the
current status of the material- or master-plan data for a specific item.
Object Name PL_MRP_HORIZONTAL
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master
or Material Plan Summary
Prerequisites A material or master plan must have been created.
Access
Requirements
Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with
material- or master-plan data.
Plan Summary Page
The objective of the Material or Master Plan Summary is to provide you with an aggregate
(bucketed) horizontal view of the supply and demand for a business unit item.
Using the Material or Master Plan Summary, you first define the item parameters to create the
summary. After you define the parameters, you click the Search button to populate the summary.
You can’t change summary information using the Plan Summary page.
If you are maintaining a material or master plan, you use the Material or Master Plan
Workbench to access the Plan Summary page. Using the workbenches, you can maintain
item data, add orders, and work with tasks in a pegged chain.
The Unit is the business unit that contains the item for which you want to perform a Material or
Master Plan Summary. It is a required field. You also are required to select an Item ID for the
summary. To filter on a specific instance of a configured item you want to review, select a
Configuration Code.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 3 3
The Start Date provides an exact starting time for the period of time you want to review in the
material or master plan. You can review data from the start of the plan or at different intervals in
the plan. If you do not enter a date, the default is Sunday of the current week. For example, if
today is Tuesday the 10th, the start date that appears in the field would be Sunday the 8th.
The Period Duration defines the measurement of time for which you want to review summary
information. Valid values for the option are Day, Week, and Month, with Week being the default
value. When you define the Number of Periods, the value is measured by the value you define
for the duration. The default value for the number of periods is 7. The number of periods you
define determines the number of tabs that appear in the summary. Each tab contains seven
planning periods.
Use the Planning Server field to select a different Planning server template name. This is the
server from which you want to extract Scorecard data.
The Change Row Types button provides a means for you to add, delete, or change the display of
data for the summary. The changes you make are temporary and do not replace the defaultvalues.
For more information about the available row types and their uses and about using the
summary, see Using the Master or Material Plan Summary.
Viewing the Master or Material Plan Detail
Usage Use the Material or Master Plan Detail page to retrieve and work with
material- or master-plan item data.
Object Name PL_MRP_HORIZONTAL
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Use, Master or
Material Plan Workbench, Master or Material Plan Summary
Prerequisites A material or master plan must have been created.
Access
Requirements
Define the group code, unit, and item ID to populate the summary with
material- or master-plan data.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 3 4 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Material Plan Detail: Details page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, Configuration Code, Start Date,
End Date, and UOM (unit of measure). The Unit and Item ID values are required to access item
details.
The Material or Master Plan Detail Inquiry displays the sequence of supply and demand over
time for an item. You use the inquiry when you to review the phased list of demand and supply
for an item, a feature that is not available through the Material or Master Plan Summary Inquiry.
The demand and supply information appears along with the running balance for a singleinventory item; you can’t change item information using the inquiry.
The On Hand value in the top portion of the page defines the quantity of the item that is
available on the start date of the material or master plan. If the Safety Stock check box is
selected, safety stock exists for the item and will be displayed in the details. The Maximum
Rows to Retrieve field displays how many rows of data will be retrieved from the Planning
engine. The system displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field
Properties page in Application Designer. When more than 500 detail rows exist for an item, usethe Start Date and End Date fields to view specific ranges for an item.
Use the available options for the Planning Server to select a different Planning server template
name. This is the server from which you want to extract plan detail data.
Click the Change Server Settings button override connection information for a Planning
server temporarily.
To use the inquiry, define the item that you want to review and generate the inquiry using the
Search button.
The detail rows are sorted by required date. If the demand and supply have the same required
date, supply data appears before demand. The following supply and demand row types are
available in the Material or Master Plan Details Inquiry:
Production This represents a specific production operation where the
item is either a component or an output for the operation.
Production operations from both production IDs and
production schedules are displayed.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 3 5
Transfer This represents a specific transfer task where the item is
either shipped from a business unit (demand) or received
at a business unit (supply).
Planned Purchase Order This represents a planned purchase order delivery of
inventory.
Purchase Order This represents an existing purchase order delivery of
inventory.
Sales Order This represents either a customer order or customer quote.
It also represents material stock requests that are not
interunit transfers.
Forecast This represents the net forecasted quantity for an item.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Type The type of task for the detail row. See the list above for a
list of types included in the inquiry.
Required Date The required date for the quantity for the associated task.
Details tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Qty The quantity associated with the task type displayed.
Balance The time-phased balance as determined by adding or
subtracting supply and demand.
Unit For demand tasks, this will be the business unit associated
with the item ID for which the demand task is associated.
For supply tasks, this field will be blank.
Item ID For demand tasks, this is the item associated with the
demand. For transfers and forecasts, this will be the same
item ID for which the inquiry is run. For Production
tasks, this will be the primary item being supplied by the
production ID or schedule.
Description Displays a description of the item.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 3 6 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Task tab
Viewing the Task tab
The Status defines the current state of the item. If the Frozen Task check box is selected, the
task is frozen. When the task is frozen, the system won’t reschedule it when processing the
material or master plan.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method isbased on the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Reviewing Master or Material Plan Exceptions
An exception is a condition that prevents the material or master plan from being feasible. You
use the Material or Master Plan Exceptions option to review exceptions for individual items in a
plan.
The Exception option and Planning Scorecards both display information about current exceptions
that exist within the plan. Both could be used to find anomalies within the plan that need to be
corrected. The main difference is that the Exception Inquiry enables you to look at all exceptions
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 3 7
for an item in the same grid, while the Planning Scorecard has some nice summary features by
exception type. It will really be up to you to choose which page to use.
You can link to the Material or Master Plan Workbench if, during your review, you want to makechanges to either plan.
Selecting Exceptions for Review
Usage Use the Selection Criteria page to define filters that you want to use to
limit the material- or master-plan exceptions that appear in the inquiry.
You define selection criteria to reduce the size of the inquiry for a single
item at a time.
Object Name PL_MX_INQ_PNL1
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master
or Material Plan Exceptions, Selection Criteria
Prerequisites A material or master plan must have been created.
Access
Requirements
Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with
material- or master-plan data.
Material Plan Exceptions - Selection Criteria page
The following fields are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, Config. Code (configuration
code), Category ID Family, and Planner Code.
Use the Planned By group box to indicate if you want to include exceptions that have been
defined in either the material plan or master plan or both. Use the Exception Type group box to
define the types of order and operation exceptions you want to include in the inquiry. You can
include the following types of exceptions in the inquiry:
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 3 8 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Request Date Violations Displays when a sales order line is going to ship after the
customer's request date.
Promise Date Violations Displays when a sales order shipment is going to ship after
the date you committed to ship it.
Safety Stock Violations Displays when stock level drops below the safety limit for
the item you define.
Material Shortages Displays when a supply is not going to be available for the
item you define.
Forecast Fulfillment
Violations
Displays when a forecast has been partially filled and any
remaining or canceled quantities.
Sch Rcpts before Current
Time (scheduled receipts
before current time)
Displays receipts of inventory that are scheduled before
the current time, making them past due. This exception is
available on the Exception Inquiry only and not on the
Scorecard.
Planned Order before PTF
(planned order before
planning time fence)
Displays when a planned order is scheduled within the
planning time fence defined for the item. The planning
time fence is an offset from current time and is defined at
the business unit item level. It is typically set to a value
that represents a time frame when it is difficult to react to
changes. This exception is available on the Exception
Inquiry only and not on the Scorecard.
Transfer Shipment Dt
Violations (transfer shipment
date violations)
Displays when demand transfer has been rescheduled and
used by the Optimizer or a solver to repair missed due
dates.
Use the Planning Server field to select a different Planning server template name.
For more information about changing the server settings, see Changing Server Settings.
You can define additional filters for extracting constraint violation information from the Planning
engine. Click the Advanced Filters tab to access filters that help you reduce the amount of
information contained in the Scorecard Inquiry.
The Maximum Rows to Retrieve field displays how many rows of data will be retrieved from
the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single constraint violation. The system
displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in
Application Designer.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 3 9
Defining Advanced Filters
Usage Use the Advanced Filters page to define specific customer promise and
request date data and the types of orders and operations that you want to
include in an exceptions inquiry.
Object Name PL_MX_ADV_FILTERS1
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master
or Material Plan Exceptions, Advanced Filters
Prerequisites A material or master plan must have been created.
Access
Requirements
Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with
material- or master-plan data.
Material Plan Exceptions - Advanced Filters page
Use the Promise/Req. Date Excp. Filters (promise/required date exception filters) group box to
select the Customer ID that you want to include in the inquiry. The promise date and required
date exceptions the system displays will belong to only the customer that you select. You can
also limit the exceptions to a date range using the Date From and Date To fields. This date
range is different from the ranges you define for orders and operations.
In addition, you can select a Vendor ID to limit the exceptions displayed to a specific vendor.
This filter is helpful to identify specific purchase orders that are past due (before current time) ormay need to be expedited (before the planning time fence).
Use the Order/Operation Type group box to limit the inquiry to specific types of orders or
operations. Select the corresponding check box to include your option. If a check box is
selected, the system includes that type of order or operation in the inquiry.
You can also set up a date range for orders and operations. Using the Order/Operation Start
Date and Order/Operation End Date group boxes, you can limit an inquiry to within certain
dates.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 4 0 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reviewing the Results
Usage Use the Results page to retrieve and review material- or master-plan
item data.
Object Name PL_MX_RESULT_PNL
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire, Master
or Material Plan Exceptions, Results
Prerequisites A material or master plan must have been created.
Access
Requirements
Define the Business Unit and Item ID to populate the summary with
material- or master-plan data.
Material Plan Exceptions - Results page
The Results page displays the Exception Types that you originally defined for the inquiry. If the
check boxes are selected, then that exception type is included in the inquiry. Selecting the Max
Rows Limit Hit check box indicates that the number of exceptions is greater than the maximum
rows to retrieve (500). You can also select a Sort Order for the data contained in the inquiry
pages.
For more information about using workbenches, see Defining the Master or Material
Workbench Search Parameters.
As you review item data, you can switch to the Material or Master Plan Workbench to makechanges to the item.
Click the Workbench Link button to access the workbench.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 4 1
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Exception Date Displays when the exception to the material or master plan
occurs. An exception is a constraint violation in a plan.
Exception Type Displays the kind of exception (such as promise date) that
occurs.
Business Unit Defines the business unit within which the exception
occurs.
Item ID Displays the item for which the exception occurs.
Exceptions tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this page.
Description Provides an extended description of the item.
Req Qty (required quantity) Displays the total amount of the item required.
UOM (unit of measure) Displays the unit of measure in which the quantity is
expressed. This is the stockkeeping unit of measure for
the item.
Order/Operation Details tab
Viewing the Order/Operations Details tab
Order/Operation Type Displays what kind of task the exception belongs to. For
example, it might be a production operation or a transfer
order.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 4 2 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Status The status indicates the state or condition of the order or
operation. While you can define the statuses, the
following ones are provided by the system: Planned,
Entered, Firmed, Pending, Dispatched, Active, Frozen,Complete, and Canceled.
Frozen If this check box is selected, then the order or operation is
frozen, meaning the system can’t automatically move the
order.
Start Time Defines the date and time that an order or operation is to
begin.
End Time Defines the date and time that an order or operation is to
end.
Order/Operation Defines the unique ID the system uses to retrieve and
process this order or operation.
Exception Specific Details tab
Viewing the Exception Specific Details tab
Customer/Vendor Displays the person or organization that is going to
receive (customer) or ship (vendor) the item for which the
exception was created.
From Unit Displays the shipping business unit for the item.
To Unit Displays the receiving business unit for the item.
Forecast Delayed Displays the amount of a forecasted quantity that has been
delayed. A forecast quantity can be delayed when partial
quantities can be produced. This column is populated for
forecast fulfillment exceptions only.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 4 3
Forecast Canceled Displays the amount of a forecasted quantity that has been
canceled. When a forecast quantity is canceled, the
system does not include that quantity in processing. This
is populated for forecast fulfillment exceptions only.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Master or Material Plan
The PeopleSoft Production Planning Scorecard is a tool that evaluates the efficiency of your
overall enterprise plan by showing you constraint violations, the number of violations, and a score
for the violations. In Production Planning, a score is the weighted sum of constraint violations in
a schedule. The score gives you an idea of how valid, or acceptable, the schedule is.
You use the Planning Scorecard to view the scorecard information for an existing plan.
You use the data in the Planning Scorecard for review purposes only. You don’t maintain
data using the Scorecard.
Along with displaying Planning engine data, you use the Scorecard page to filter the type and
quantity of information you want to display and the Planning server you want to connect to.
Overview of the Planning Scorecard
The Planning Scorecard page contains similar information to that in the Scorecard available in the
Planning engine. Both scorecards display summary information (score/count) for the constraints
that are selected using the Control Panel option in the Planning engine. The DataLink creates the
initial model with all constraints selected so that the scorecard displays all violated constraints. If
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 4 4 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
you turn off a constraint through the Planning Client, the constraint won’t be scored nor will
details be retrieved in the Planning Scorecard pages.
For more information about using the Control panel, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 AdvancedPlanning Client PeopleBook, “Managing Constraints”.
The Planning Scorecard uses an early fence that displays the beginning of the time interval that
the Planning engine evaluates and then produces the Planning Scorecard. A late fence displays
the end of the interval and is usually set at the end of the planning horizon. These fences
determine the time interval in which the Scorecard counts constraints to the schedule.
Each constraint has a filtered count, a total count, and a score. The filtered count represents the
number of violations that match any filtered criteria that were defined using the Filters page. The
total count represents the number of violations for a particular type of constraint. The total score
for each type of constraint is based on several weight factors that represent the relative
importance of a constraint. The total count and score do not use filters; they show you all
constraint violations.
A score of zero indicates that the constraint either is not violated or has been cleared. Penalty is a
function that expresses the degree to which the constraint is violated.
Before you send data to the Planning engine and begin to use the Planning Scorecard, you must
setup several pieces of information that PeopleSoft Production Planning uses to populate theScorecard with the type of data that you want.
To process the material and master plan and retrieve Scorecard data, use the following steps:
1. Define DataLink options you that want the Planning engine to use in identifying material- or
master-plan modeling parameters. This includes the solvers that you want to run and the
types of data you want included in the processing.
2. Define a Planning server template name so it can be selected on the Scorecard Summary
page, eliminating the need to enter user, server, and port data each time you access the
Planning Scorecard. A prerequisite to using the Planning Scorecard is that you have a
Planning engine running on a server.
3. Generate the plan. The data goes to the Planning engine and the system starts the solvers you
defined.
4. Use the Planning Scorecard page to review the counts and scores of constraint violations that
exist in the Planning engine. Then, you can determine the types of violations that you want to
work with.
Using the Planning Scorecard Page
Usage Use the Planning Scorecard page to review high-level information about
constraint violations for your current planning model. You can also drill
down to more detailed data, define the extent of data for review, and
connect to different servers in the Planning engine.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 4 5
Object Name PL_SCARD_SUMMARY
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard
Prerequisites You must have generated a plan by running one of the solvers.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port to import Scorecard data from the Planning engine.
Planning Scorecard page
Information on the Planning Scorecard page displays the filtered count, the total count, and the
total score for each type of constraint class in the current plan or schedule. The system pulls this
information from the Planning engine and it appears as display-only data. To see specific
constraint violations, select the Filtered Count field.
The following information appears on the Planning Scorecard page, regardless of the constraint
you select to work with:
Early Fence Displays the beginning of the time interval in which
constraint violations are calculated.
Late Fence Displays the ending of the time interval in which
constraint violations are calculated.
Filtered Count Displays the number of violations that match any filtered
criteria that were defined using the Filters page. You
select this value to see additional details about the count.
Total Count Displays the number of violations for a particular type of
constraint.
Total Score Displays the total score for each type of constraint. The
score is based on several weight factors that represent the
relative importance of a constraint.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 4 6 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
From the Planning Scorecard page, you can access detail pages associated with the following
types of constraints:
Request Dates A sales order line is scheduled to ship at the customer's
request date. This constraint strives to keep a sales order
delivery scheduled to meet the customer request date. The
constraint exists on each shipment scheduled for a sales
order. It's created automatically by the order processing
transactions.
Promise Dates A sales order shipment is scheduled to ship at the date you
committed to ship. This constraint strives to keep a sales
order delivery scheduled to meet the promise date. The
constraint exists on each shipment scheduled for a sales
order. It's created automatically by the order processing
transactions.
BI Shortages (buildable
inventory shortages)
A buildable inventory shortage occurs when there is a
material shortage for an end item. This constraint tries to
make sure that there is enough available inventory to meet
all of the demands for finished good items.
Aggregate Capacity The aggregate capacity constraint is violated when a
production operation overloads an aggregate capacity
resource. This constraint tries to make sure that the
production does not overallocate the aggregate capacity
buckets.
Safety Stock When stock level drops below the safety limit, existing
supplies must be moved or new supplies must be
generated to bring the stock back to the desired level.
This constraint keeps inventory at a desired level during
user-defined time intervals. Deviation from this desired
level is tolerable within a margin defined by the safety
limit.
Excess Stock When stock level exceeds the excess limit, movement or
deletion of supplies is necessary to bring the stock down
to the desired level. This constraint keeps inventory at a
desired level during user-defined time intervals.
Deviation from this desired level is tolerable within a
margin defined by the excess limit.
RM Shortages (raw material
shortages)
A raw material shortage occurs when there is a material
shortage for a purchased item. This constraint tries to
make sure that there is enough available inventory to meet
all of the demands for purchased items.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 4 7
Forecast Fulfillment Any forecast task that is not met or is partially met
represents a constraint to the production plan. This
constraint displays all the violated forecast fulfillment
constraints, including the total quantity of filled forecast
tasks for all planning periods, the total quantity of delayed
forecast tasks, and the total quantity of canceled forecasts.
Transfer Ship Date The transfer shipment date is a constraint linked to the
transfer type. This constraint displays any demand transfer
task that has been rescheduled and used by the Optimizer
or a solver to repair missed due dates for a demand
transfer task.
Use the Planning Server field to select a different Planning server template name. This is theserver from which you want to extract Scorecard data.
For more information about changing the server settings, see Changing Server Settings.
You can define additional filters for extracting constraint violation information from the Planning
engine. Use the Filters button to access filters that help you to reduce the amount of information
contained in the Scorecard Inquiry.
For more information about defining filters for the Planning Scorecard, see Filtering
Material or Master Plan Scorecard Data.
The Maximum Rows to Retrieve field displays how many rows of data will be retrieved from
the Planning engine. Each row of data represents a single constraint violation. The system
displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in
Application Designer.
You receive a warning message if more than 500 violations are going to be extracted and
returned to the Scorecard.
Reviewing Request Date Constraint Violations
Usage Use the Request Dates page to review Scorecard constraint violations
that relate to shipments requested by customers.
Object Name PL_SC_REQ_DATE
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Request Dates Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the request date
information that appears in the Scorecard.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 4 8 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Planning Scorecard - Request Dates: Date/Customer page
Request dates are the dates that a customer has requested to receive a shipment. A sales order
line is scheduled to ship based on this request date. The request date constraint strives to ensure
that a sales order delivery schedule meets the customer’s request date. The constraint exists on
each shipment scheduled for a sales order. It's created automatically by the order processing
transactions.
When you have violations, you can move the shipment date earlier or later in time so that it is
closer to the request date, assuming that such a shipment would be supported by the required
finished goods inventory. This doesn’t change the sales order’s request date.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Request Date displays the date and time that the customer has requested for the arrival of
stock at the customer location. If the date and time are earlier than the Shipment End date andtime, there is a violation to the material or master plan.
Date/Customer tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 4 9
Customer Displays the person or organization that is going to
receive the shipment and whose request date is going to be
missed.
Shipment Start Date/Time Defines when the shipment task is to begin. This is the
date and time that the stock is scheduled to leave the
business unit.
Shipment End Date/Time Defines when the shipment task is to end. This is the date
and time that the stock is scheduled to arrive at the
customer location.
Shipment Displays the identifier for the shipment. This ID is used to
track the movement of stock for the sales order.
Sales Order Displays the sales order code the PeopleSoft Production
planning system uses to track a sales order through its
production and shipment. This sales order is the one with
the constraint violation.
Item ID tab
Viewing the Item ID tab
The Unit column indicates the business unit that is shipping the stock to meet the sales order
demand, and the Item ID identifies the item ordered by the customer. An item may have a
different ID from business unit to business unit. The Planner Code identifies the person
responsible for the item and for completion of the sales order.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 5 0 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reviewing Safety Stock Constraint Violations
Usage Use the Safety Stock page to review items in your plan that drop below
their safety-stock level.
Object Name PL_SC_SAFETY_STOCK
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Safety Stock, Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that
appears in the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Planning Scorecard - Safety Stock: Item ID page
When items in the material or master plan drop below their safety-stock limit during the planning
horizon, they appear on this page. When the stock level drops below the safety limit, existing
supplies must be moved or new supplies must be produced to bring the stock back to the desired
level.
This constraint keeps inventory at a desired level during user-defined time intervals. Deviation
from this desired level is tolerable within a margin defined by the safety limit.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 5 1
Common Page Information
Unit Indicates the business unit in which the planned on-hand
inventory level for this item falls below safety levels.
Item ID Identifies the item for which the planned on-hand
inventory falls below safety-stock levels.
Item ID tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Description Describes the item that has the safety-stock violation.
Start Date/Time Defines the first date on which the item’s planned on-hand
inventory falls below the set safety-stock level. Used with
the End Date/Time column, this column displays the
length of time that the inventory is below the safety-stock
level.
End Date/Time Defines the last date that the item’s planned on-hand
inventory is below safety-stock levels.
Max Deviation Displays the maximum amount the item’s planned on-
hand inventory level is below safety stock during the
planning horizon. While the inventory level may remain
below safety-stock levels for a week, the maximum level
might only last for a single day.
Planner/Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab
The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The
Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based onthe use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Reviewing Promise Date Constraint Violations
Usage Use the Promise Dates page to review Scorecard information that relates
to shipments that have been promised to customers.
Object Name PL_SC_PROM_DATE
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Promise Dates, Filtered Count
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 5 2 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that
appears in the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Planning Scorecard - Promise Dates: Date/Customer page
Promise dates are the dates and times that you promise a customer that a shipment will arrive.
The sales order shipment is scheduled to ship on the date you committed to ship. This constraint
strives to keep a sales order delivery scheduled to meet the promise date. The constraint exists on
each shipment scheduled for a sales order. It's created automatically by the order processingtransactions.
When you have violations, you can move the shipment date earlier or later in time so that it is
closer to the promise date, assuming that such a shipment would be supported by the required
finished goods inventory. This doesn’t change the sales order’s promise date.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Promise Date displays the date and time when stock has been committed to arrive at the
customer location. If the date and time are earlier than the Shipment End date and time, there is aviolation to the production plan.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 5 3
Date/Customer tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Customer Displays the person or organization that is going to
receive the shipment and to whom the promise
commitment was made.
Shipment Start Date/Time Defines when the shipment task is to begin. This is the
date and time when the stock is scheduled to leave the
business unit.
Shipment End Date/Time Defines when the shipment task is to end. This is the date
and time when the stock is scheduled to arrive at the
customer location and the promised date that is going to
be missed.
Shipment Displays the identifier for the shipment. This ID is used to
track the movement of stock for the sales order.
Unit Indicates the business unit that is shipping the stock to
meet the sales order demand.
Sales Order Displays the sales order code the PeopleSoft Production
Planning system uses to track a sales order through its
production and shipment.
Item ID tab
Viewing the Item ID tab
The Unit column indicates the business unit that is shipping the stock to meet the sales order
demand, and the Item ID identifies the item ordered by the customer. An item may have a
different ID from business unit to business unit. The Planner Code displays the personresponsible for the item and for the completion of the sales order.
Configuration tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 5 4 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item (for example, how it’s assembled).
Reviewing Excess Stock Constraint Violations
Usage Use the Excess Stock page to review production plan violations for
excessive levels of stock.
Object Name PL_SC_EXCESS_STOCK
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Excess Stock, Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that
appears on the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Planning Scorecard - Excess Stock: Item ID page
Excess stock exists when an item’s inventory level is higher than limits set for the item. The
movement or deletion of supplies is necessary to bring the stock level down to within limits.
This constraint keeps inventory at a desired level during user-defined time intervals. Deviation
from this desired level is tolerable within a margin defined by the excess limit.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 5 5
Common Page Information
Unit Indicates the business unit in which the planned on-hand
inventory goes above excess stock limits.
Item ID Identifies the item for which the planned on-hand
inventory goes above excess stock levels. A Description
follows the item.
Item ID tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Start Date/Time Defines the first date on which the item’s planned on-hand
inventory is above the set excess stock level. Used with
the End Date/Time, the two values display the length of
time that the inventory is above the excess level.
End Date/Time Defines the last date on which the item’s planned on-hand
inventory is above safety-stock levels.
Max Deviation (maximum
deviation)
Displays the maximum amount that the planned on-hand
inventory level of the item is above excess stock levels.
While the stock level may be in excess for a week, the
maximum level might last for only a single day
Planner/Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab
The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The
Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on
the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Reviewing BI Shortage Constraint Violations
Usage Use the BI Shortages page to review Scorecard information relating to
buildable inventory shortages.
Object Name PL_SC_BI_SHORTS
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, BI Shortages, Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that
appears on the Scorecard.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 5 6 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Planning Scorecard - BI Shortages (buildable inventory shortages): Item ID page
A buildable inventory shortage occurs when there is a material shortage for a manufactured item.
This constraint tries to make sure that there is enough available inventory to meet all of thedemands for manufactured items.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Unit Indicates the business unit that will experience the
inventory shortage of this item.
Item ID Identifies the manufactured item for which there is not
going to be enough inventory supply to meet a particular
demand. A Description follows the item.
Item ID tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this page.
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the item is required.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 5 7
Quantity Displays the total amount of the item that is required.
Quantity Short Displays the amount of the item that is going to be short in
the current plan.
Details tab
Viewing the Details tab
The Operation column displays the type of operation that requires the item, such as a production
task or transfer and the Planner Code column identifies the person responsible for the item.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Reviewing RM Shortage Constraint Violations
Usage Use the RM Shortages page to review production plan violations that
relate to raw materials purchased to meet orders in the plan.
Object Name PL_SC_RM_SHORTAGES
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, RM Shortages, Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that
appears in the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 5 8 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Planning Scorecard - RM Shortages (raw material shortages): Item ID page
A raw material shortage occurs when there is a material shortage for a purchased item. This
constraint tries to ensure that there is enough available inventory to meet all of the demands forpurchased items.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Unit Indicates the business unit that will experience the raw
material shortage.
Item ID Identifies the purchased item for which there is not going
to be enough planned on-hand inventory to meet a
particular demand. The item’s Description also appears.
Item ID tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Date/Time Displays the date and time that the item is required.
Quantity Displays the total amount of the raw material required.
Quantity Short Displays the cumulative amount of raw material that is
going to be short.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 5 9
Details tab
Viewing the Details tab
The Operation column displays the type of operation that requires the item, such as a production
task, and the Planner Code displays the person responsible for the item and for completion of itsproduction.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item (for example, how it’s assembled).
Reviewing Aggregate Capacity Constraint Violations
Usage Use the Aggregate Capacity page to review Scorecard constraint
violations for overloaded aggregate resources.
Object Name PL_SC_AGG_CAP
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Aggregate Capacity, Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that
appears in the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port. Also, Scorecard violations must exist before the page
is populated.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 6 0 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity: Resource page
aggregate resource planning, the system combines capacity loads for resources in daily, weekly,
or monthly planning buckets. The number of tasks scheduled in this bucket can be unlimited as
long as there are available hours in the bucket.
Aggregate capacity represents the total capacity available to perform tasks in a given time bucket.
This constraint tries to make sure that the production does not overallocate the aggregate capacity
buckets.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Unit Defines the business unit where the aggregate resource is
located.
Assigned Resource Displays the aggregate resource that is overloaded.
Aggregate capacity violations identify production
operations that are scheduled at times that exceed the
available capacity on the assigned aggregate resource.
Resource tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Start Date/Time Identifies when the resource is scheduled to begin
producing the item.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 6 1
End Date/Time Identifies when the resource is scheduled to complete the
production of the item.
Load Start Date/Time Displays the start time the system uses to calculate and
allocate the remaining capacity requirement for the
production task when a portion of the task has been
completed. The system calculates a load duration value
based on the remaining task quantity, then uses that value
with the task end time to establish the load start time.
Details tab
Viewing the Details tab
The Resource Class identifies the type of resource, either aggregate by time or aggregate by unit.
The Operation identifies the production operation that is scheduled on the resource.
Item ID tab
Viewing the Item ID tab
The Item ID column displays the item that the resource is producing, and the Description
provides a brief description of the operation. The system uses this identification to track the flow
of the requirement and plan for its material needs. The Planner Code displays the personresponsible for the item and completion of its production.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is
based on the use of the item such as how it’s assembled.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 6 2 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reviewing Forecast Fulfillment Constraint Violations
Usage Use the Forecast Fulfillment page to review violations relating to
unfulfilled forecasts.
Object Name PL_SC_FCST_FILL
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Forecast Fulfillment, Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters that you want to use to limit the information that
appears on the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Planning Scorecard - Forecast Fulfillment: Item ID page
Forecast fulfillment is the process the Planning engine uses to meet forecasted demand when
there is not enough supply to meet all of the demand at once. During the process, net forecasts
are divided into tasks that are associated with the original planning period. For example, each
forecast is associated with a planning period, and planning periods are defined to be either daily,weekly, or monthly.
Each task represents a portion of the quantity required to meet the forecasted demand. Constraint
violations that appear on this page are those that are associated with a delayed or canceled
forecast task. The forecast fulfillment score is the number of violated forecast fulfillmentconstraints divided by the total number of forecast fulfillment constraints.
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 6 3
Common Page Information
Unit Indicates the business unit that has a forecasted demand
for the item.
Item ID Identifies the item associated with the forecast fulfillment
violation. A Description of the item follows.
Item ID tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Filled Displays the item’s total forecast quantity that can be met
in the original planning period. If the entire forecast can’t
be met, values appear in either the Delayed or Canceled
columns.
Delayed Displays the total forecast quantity that has been delayed.
If a forecast is front loaded, it is considered to be delayed
if any of its tasks start after the planning period start time.
If a forecast is back loaded, it is considered to be delayed
if any of its tasks start after the planning period end time.
Canceled Displays the total forecast quantity that has been canceled.
Within the forecast fulfillment fence, if a forecast task
can’t be satisfied in its original planning period, then
solvers cancel the task. After the fence, solvers roll over
any unfulfilled forecast task demand to later planning
buckets.
For more information about defining the forecast fulfillment fence, see “Setting Up the
Production DataLink”.
Planner/Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab
The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The
Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on
the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 6 4 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reviewing Transfer Shipment Date Constraint Violations
Usage Use the Transfer Ship Dates page to review material and master-plan
constraint violations for demand-transfer type tasks that have been
rescheduled by the Planning engine.
Object Name PL_SC_TRSFR_MST
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Master or Material Plan, Inquire,
Planning Scorecard, Transfer Ship Date, Filtered Count
Prerequisites Click the Filters button to define any filters that you want to use to limit
the information that appears in the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port.
Planning Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates: Transfer Details page
This page displays transfer shipment date constraint violations for demand transfer tasks that have
been rescheduled and used by the Planning engine to repair missed due dates for demand transfer
tasks.
A transfer type is a planned or existing interunit transfer in which the system only processes the
transfer item for a single location. This reduces the time it takes for the Planning engine to run
material and master plans. For example, you might model and manufacture an item in one plant
and define a demand transfer of the item to another location. During the processing, the DataLink
and Planning engine do not process data, such as bills and routings, associated with the item from
the shipping location.
Transfers result from either demand or supply requirements. In a single manufacturing
environment, you can set up transfers supplying the plant as the supply side of the transfer and set
up transfers placing a requirement on the plant as the demand side of the transfer. Existing and
planned transfers for an item for each business unit will have the supply side, the demand side, or
both sides modeled in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 6 5
For more information about the remaining constraints and using this page, see Using the
Planning Scorecard Page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Original Shipment Date/Time defines the date and time that a demand transfer task was
originally scheduled for shipment. The demand transfer was rescheduled by a solver to repairanother problem.
Transfer Details tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Shipment Date/Time Defines the date and time the transfer will be shipped from
the From Unit.
Receipt Date/Time Defines the date and time the transfer should arrive at the
To Unit.
Unit Defines the shipping unit.
Item ID Defines the item at the From Unit. Using demand transfer
shipments, the Optimizer reduces processing time by
using item data from only one business unit. The
Planning engine does not process item information
associated with the To Unit.
To Unit Defines the destination unit. The item information is
associated with the From Unit.
Shipment Quantity Indicates the amount of the item that the task is scheduled
to transfer.
Transfer Task tab
Viewing the Transfer Task tab
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
5 - 6 6 M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The Transfer Tasks column displays the identifier of the transfer task that is moving the item.
The Planning engine uses the ID to track the transfer during processing.
Planner/Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Planner/Configuration Code tab
The Planner Code identifies the person responsible for the item and its inventory. The
Configuration Code provides a way to define a configured item further. The method is based on
the use of the item, such as how it’s assembled.
Filtering Material or Master Plan Scorecard Data
Usage Use the General Filters page to limit the amount of data the system
extracts from the Planning engine. You use filters to define specific
ranges of data for the current material or master plan.
Object Name PL_SC_FILTERS_SP
Navigation Plan Production, Process Production Plan, Inquiry, Planning
Scorecard, Filters
Prerequisites Define any filters you want to use in limiting the information that
appears on the Scorecard.
Planning Scorecard - General Filters page
Using this page, you can limit the amount of data contained in the Planning Scorecard, reducing
the time it takes to generate the Scorecard and making information easier to review. You use
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E M A S T E R A N D M A T E R I A L P L A N S 5 - 6 7
these filters to extract manageable amounts of data from the Planning engine. No fields are
required on the General Filters page. After you define the filters, click the OK button. The
summary page is then refreshed with the new filtered counts.
If you do not define filters, PeopleSoft Production Planning extracts all constraint violations
from the Planning engine, which may require additional processing time.
Enter the Business Unit from which you are going to extract production plan violations for the
Scorecard. You can also use the Planner Code field to limit the extracted data to a single
planner ID. If you do not enter a unit or planner, then all violations for units or planners are
included in the Scorecard results.
Use the Item ID fields to define an alphanumeric range of items that will be extracted from the
Planning engine. The From item is the first item in the range and the To item is the last in the
range. The Config Code (configuration code) fields make it possible to limit the number of items
in the Scorecard to a specific configuration code. These are IDs that you use instead of part
numbers to define a particular arrangement or assembly of components.
Use the Date From field to select the beginning date for Scorecard data and use the To field to
select the ending date. Only constraint violations that occur within these dates appear in the
Scorecard.
You can also filter data to view promise and request date violations for a specific Customer, or to
view aggregate capacity violations for a specific Aggregate Resource. Only the violations for
the customer or the resource you define appear in the Scorecard.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 1
C H A P T E R 6
Managing the Capacity Plan
After you decide the amount of resources available, you need to determine the amount of capacity
required to produce products in the future. You can use a capacity plan to manage your
resources. With the capacity plan, you can view capacity by user-specified buckets and drill
down to production details where you can add, delete, cancel, or reschedule capacity
requirements.
Overview of the Capacity Planning Process
In planning for capacity, you need to:
• Determine the amount of available resources in a specific business unit.
• View the resource load and the production associated with it.
• Identify the required capacity and the overloaded capacity.
• Adjust the order as needed by adding, deleting, or canceling production, rescheduling tasks, or
changing quantity.
Before You Begin
Before you can create a capacity-feasible plan, you must:
• Establish a resource using the Planning Option page in the Define Resources component and
Define Work Centers component in PeopleSoft Manufacturing.
• Start a Planning-server session and generate a production plan. The resources in the Planning
server must correspond to the resources in the workbench.
Maintaining the Capacity Plan
To effectively maintain the capacity plan, you need to easily display information about the
overloaded resources in a bucketed format. PeopleSoft Production Planning responds to this need
by providing you with a robust set of inquiry pages.
You can first use the Resource Workbench to view the capacity-plan details based on certain
selection and sort criteria. After you’ve identified the overloaded resources, you can then view
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 2 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
the loads in a bucketed format over time from the Capacity Summary. Consequently, you can
make manual adjustments to the capacity plan to resolve capacity problems.
Defining the Resource Workbench Search Parameters
Usage Use the Resource Workbench page to search all resources and identify
those that have capacity violations.
Object Name PL_CWB1_RI
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Use, Capacity Plan
Workbench, Resource Workbench
Prerequisites Establish a business unit, a resource, and a Planning server.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
Resource Workbench page
Using the search feature, select a Business Unit. Then, select a Resource Type from the
available options: Crew, Machine, Rough Cut Resource, Tool, Work Center, and Workcenter
(subcontract).
You can’t select rough-cut capacity resources from the Capacity Plan Workbench as they
apply to the rough-cut capacity plan in PeopleSoft Enterprise Planning. You must enter a
resource type to return a list of available resources.
Select a Violation Rule from the available options as a criterion to display the violations. Thedefault is All Resources. Your options are:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 3
Consider Violations Select this option if you want to display only resources
with the Ignore Violations check box clear.
Ignore Violations Select this option if you want to display only resources
with the Ignore Violations check box selected.
All Resources Select this option if you want to display all resources
regardless of whether the Ignore Violation check box is
selected or not.
The Ignore Violations functionality is determined on a resource-by-resource basis.
For more information about Ignore Violations, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills and RoutingsPeopleBook, “Maintaining Work Centers” and “Defining Resources”.
The Max Rows (maximum rows) field displays how many rows of data the Planning engine will
retrieve for the inquiry. Each row of data represents a single constraint violation. The system
displays up to 500 rows of data. The value is set using the Record Field Properties page in the
Application Designer.
A resource class identifies what type of resource that you are planning. There are two types of
resource planning: detailed and aggregate. In detailed resource planning, the system assigns
specific times for a specific resource to start and finish a task. In aggregate planning, the system
combines capacity loads for resources in daily, weekly, or monthly planning buckets. The
number of tasks scheduled in this bucket can be unlimited as long as there are available hours in
the bucket.
Select a Resource Class from one of the following options:
Detail Select Detail if you want to do detailed resource planning,
where the system tracks resource usage down to specific
times.
Time Select Time if you want to do aggregate resource planning
based on the amount of time available in the time bucket
that you select.
Unit Select Unit if you want to do aggregate resource planning
based on the number of units the resources can produce in
a given time bucket.
Select a Utilization state for the resources. Your options are All, Overloaded, and Not
Overloaded. The default is All. Use Overloaded to focus in on resources that are currently over
capacity. Select Not Overloaded to see underutilized capacity.
Select a Resource Code. To define resource codes, you use the Define Resources page and
Define Work Centers page on the Structure Engineering menu. This is an optional field. When it
is left blank, all resources matching the other filter criteria will be loaded into the page for furtherreview.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 4 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Select a Planning Server from the available options. To define a Planning server, you use the
Planning Server Definition page in the General Options component of the Define Business Rules
menu. Click the Search button to retrieve the data. All the data that appears in the grid comes
from the Planning server.
If you have selected Ignore Violation as the violation rule and Overloaded as the utilization state,
the respective check boxes will be selected in the row corresponding to the resource.
Allocation Strategy is used only for aggregate resources to determine how you are going to
spread the time/unit capacity over the bucket for the resource. Your options are Start, Finish,
and Proportional. This answers the following question: If the task is stretched across two or
more buckets, should the task, in its entirety, be placed in the first bucket or in the last bucket, or
should it be spread proportionally across all buckets? The default is Proportional. This field is
unavailable for detailed resources.
When you click a Resource Code, the system takes you directly to the Capacity Summary page.
Using the Capacity Summary
Usage Use the Capacity Summary page to inquire about the current status of a
capacity plan. The summary displays horizontal capacity information
for a selected resource.
Object Name PL_CAP_PLAN_SUMM
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Capacity Plan
Workbench, Capacity Summary
Prerequisites Establish a business unit, a resource, and a Planning server.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 5
Capacity Summary page
The Capacity Summary mimics the Capacity Spreadsheet, the Aggregate Capacity by Time
Spreadsheet, and the Aggregate Capacity by Unit Spreadsheet available in the Planning engine.
You use the summary to view the required resource in different time buckets. The Unit,
Resource Type, and Resource Code are display-only fields.
This page also enables you to filter your data. After you’ve displayed the capacity summary, you
can define the search criteria further by specifying values in the following fields:
Start Date Default value: round down to Sunday of the current week.
Number of Periods Default value: 7.
Period Duration The option is only available for detailed resources.
Default value is Weekly for detailed resources. For
aggregate resources, this value represents the defined
bucket size for the resource. If you select Weekly, the
system rounds the start date to the Sunday before the start
date that you entered. If you select Monthly, the system
rounds the start date to the first day of the month. If you
select Daily, the system leaves all of your selections alone.
If you select an aggregate resource, then you can’t change the Period Duration.
Use the Planning server field to temporarily change the current server settings.
For more information about connecting to the Planning engine, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Enterprise Planning PeopleBook, “Setting Up the Enterprise DataLink”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 6 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Click the Search button after you have modified the search criteria. The system displays data
related to your search criteria. The Row Types are hard-coded, and you can’t select which ones
to display. The default row types are:
Available Capacity The total capacity available for utilization.
Required Capacity The amount of capacity being utilized for production.
Down Hours A form of unused capacity that is not occupied (for
detailed resources only). An example is machine
shutdown.
Unused Capacity The leftover capacity (Available Capacity, Required
Capacity, Down Time).
Overloaded Capacity The amount that exceeds the available capacity.
Utilization The ratio between required capacity and available
capacity.
The Past Due column displays data prior to the start date specified in the search criteria.
The dates represent time periods that you specify based on the values in the Start Date and
Number of Periods fields. If you enter the number of periods as 7 and the duration is Weekly,
then there should be seven weekly time periods in the grid. A maximum of 52 periods can bedisplayed for each search.
Click a Required Capacity row type value to display production details that are placing capacityload on the resource for a given time bucket.
Viewing the Resource Load
Usage Use the Resource Load page to display the individual production
operations that make up the load on that resource during that time
bucket.
Object Name PL_CWB3_RL
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Capacity Plan
Workbench, Capacity Summary
Prerequisites Create a Required Capacity on the Capacity Summary page.
Access
Requirements
Click the Required Capacity link on the Capacity Summary page.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 7
Capacity Summary - Resource Load: Operation Details page
The top portion of the page displays search parameters you defined for the summary.
For more information about the parameters, see Defining the Resource Workbench Search
Parameters.
The Start Date/Time, End Date/Time, and Percent Utilization fields show the planning periodfor the resource you selected along with its percentage of use.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Production This is the ID for a production task. The remaining
information in the row relates to this task. When you click
the value, the system displays the Production Details page
containing all operations for the associated production ID
or schedule.
Op Seq (operation
sequence)
This is the routing sequence number on which the
resource is used.
For more information about Production, see Viewing the Production Details.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 8 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Operation Details tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this page.
Start Date/Time This is the currently scheduled start date and time for the
operation.
Load Start Date/Time This is the start time the system uses to calculate and
allocate the remaining capacity requirement for the
production task when a portion of the task has been
completed. The system calculates a load duration value
based on the remaining task quantity, then uses that value
with the task end time to establish the load start time.
End Date/Time This is the currently scheduled end times for the
production operation
Actual Load This is the number of hours for all resource types and
represents the capacity requirements for the production
operation.
Percent Load This is the percentage obtained using the formula
operations usage divided by the resource’s capacity in the
bucket.
Status The field displays the current status for the production
operation.
Frozen Flag If this check box is selected, you can’t reschedule the
operation.
Item/Qty tab
Viewing the Item/Qty tab
You can view the Item ID, Item Description, and Remaining Qty (remaining quantity) for this
production. When you click a Production, the system takes you to an update page, where you
can make changes to the production order.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 9
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
If the production consists of configurable items, the Configuration Code will display in the grid.
If you want to take advantage of unused capacity, you can click the Add Production button to
display a page to add production.
Adding Production
Usage Use the Add Production page to add a production to the Planning server.
Object Name PL_CWB3_RL
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Capacity Plan
Workbench, Capacity Summary, click a Required Capacity, Add
Production
Prerequisites Create a Required Capacity on the Capacity Summary page.
Access
Requirements
Click the Add Production button on the Resource Load page.
Add Production page
The Business Unit defaults from the previous page. Specify an item by selecting an Item ID
from the prompt. Select a Config Code (configuration code) from the prompt.
Enter the End Date/Time, and Order Qty (order quantity) of the production. The Std UOM
(standard unit of measure) represents how the item is quantified. Select a Production Area and
Production Option from the available options.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 1 0 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
If you select the Frozen check box, then you can’t change the date and quantity of the
production.
Click the Apply button to add the production. Click the Return button to return to the previous
page without adding a production task. All production that is added through this workbench is
considered “planned” production.
Viewing the Production Details
Usage Use the Production Details page to display the individual orders that
make up the load on that resource during the specified time bucket.
Object Name PL_VIEW_PRODUCTION
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Use Capacity Workbench,
Capacity Summary
Prerequisites Display the Resource Load.
Access
Requirements
Click a Production value on the Resource Load page.
Production Details page
Click the Apply button to move the production to a different time bucket by changing the dates.
The system automatically returns you to the Production Summary page. Click the Return button
to go back to the previous page without updating any information within the Planning server.
You can change the quantity only if the production status is Planned. You can change thestart/end dates for all production.
If the Frozen Flag check box is selected, you should not make any changes regardless of thestatus.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 1 1
Existing Production Orders
If an order is an existing production order, you can make the following changes:
• Reschedule the order.
• Change the order status to Cancel.
• Select or clear the Frozen Flag check box.
Planned Production Orders
If an order is a planned production order, you can make the following changes:
• Reschedule the order.
• Delete the planned order.
• Select or clear the Frozen Flag check box.
• Change the Order Qty.
Viewing the Production Outputs
Usage Use the View Outputs page to display the production outputs.
Object Name PL_VIEW_OUTPUT
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Use, Capacity Workbench,
Capacity Summary
Prerequisites Create a production order.
Access
Requirements
Click the View Outputs button on the Production Details page.
View Outputs page
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 1 2 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For Output Type, Primary is the main output. Other output types are Co-product, By-product
Waste, and By-product Recycled.
For more information about the types of output, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills and RoutingsPeopleBook, “Maintaining Bills of Material”.
The Item ID represents the item you are working with. The Schedule Qty (scheduled quantity)
represents the number of units originally scheduled for production and the Remaining Qty
(remaining quantity) displays the number of the original quantity that is left to produce.
The Completed Qty (completed quantity) displays the number of units that have been completed.
The Std UOM (standard unit of measure) represents how the item is counted.
Analyzing the Capacity Plan
When you analyze the capacity plan, you can view the Capacity Summary via the Capacity
Workbench. You can also drill down on a resource to display the production details, add a
production order, change the order quantity, and reschedule tasks. However, if you just want to
view the data without attempting to change it, you can simply access the Capacity Plan Summary.
The difference between the Capacity Summary Workbench and the Capacity Plan Summary isthat the latter is for inquiry only.
Viewing the Capacity Plan Summary
Usage Use the Capacity Plan Summary page to enter search criteria to retrieve
resource information.
Object Name PL_CAP_PLAN_SUMM
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Inquire, Capacity Plan
Summary
Prerequisites Establish a business unit, a resource, and a Planning server.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 1 3
Capacity Plan Summary Page
The top portion of the page displays search parameters you defined for the summary. To further
define your search criteria, you can change the Start Date, Number of Periods, and Planning
Server. Click the Search button to retrieve the capacity summary data.
For more information about how to enter the search criteria, see Defining the Resource
Workbench Search Parameters.
The Row Types are hard coded, and you can’t select which ones to display. The default row
types are:
Available Capacity This is the total capacity available for utilization.
Required Capacity This is the amount of capacity being utilized for
production.
Down Hours This is for detailed resources only and is a form of unused
capacity that is not occupied. An example is machine
shutdown.
Unused Capacity This is the leftover capacity (Available Capacity -
Required Capacity - Down Time).
Overloaded Capacity This is the amount that exceeds the available capacity.
Utilization This is the ratio between Required Capacity and Available
Capacity.
Past Due represents data prior to the start date specified in the search criteria.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 1 4 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The dates represent time periods that you specify based on the Start Date and Number of
Periods. If the number of periods is 7 and the duration is Weekly, then there should be seven
weekly time periods in the grid. A maximum of 52 periods can be displayed per search.
Using the Planning Scorecard to Review Your Capacity Plan
An alternate method to review the capacity plan is through the Scorecard Inquiry page, which
displays the number (counts) of violations relating to Aggregate Capacity. The violations identify
production operations that are scheduled at times that exceed the available capacity in hours orunits on the aggregate resource.
Once you’ve identified the violations, you can address them in many ways. You can run one of
the solvers (Material Planning, Feasible Planning, or Linear Programming) with the parameters
for solving capacity included. You can resolve the capacity problem manually by reschedulingthe over capacity resource or adjusting the available capacity for the period in violation.
For more information about the solving capabilities of the solvers, see “Setting Up the
Production DataLink”.
To reschedule the task manually, you can use the Capacity Workbench to drill down to the
overloaded resource and reschedule or cancel production during overloaded periods.
For more information about the Capacity Workbench, see Defining the Resource Workbench
Search Parameters.
Filtering Capacity Plan Scorecard Data
Usage Use the Planning Scorecard page to enter search criteria to retrieve
aggregate capacity violation counts.
Object Name PL_SCARD_SUMMARY
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Inquire, Planning
Scorecard
Prerequisites You must have generated a plan running either the Optimizer or one of
the solvers.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port to import Scorecard data from the Planning engine.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 1 5
Planning Scorecard page
Select a Planning Server from the available options to display the Aggregate Capacity
violations. Click the Filters button to filter the data and display the Scorecard Filters page, where
you can further define your search criteria.
For more information about changing filters, see “Managing the Master and Material Plans”.
Viewing Capacity Violations
Usage Use the Aggregate Capacity page to review Scorecard constraint
violations for overloaded aggregate resources.
Object Name PL_SC_AGG_CAP
Navigation Plan Production, Manage Capacity Plan, Inquire, Planning
Scorecard, click Aggregate Capacity Filtered Count
Prerequisites Define any filters you want to use in limiting the information that
appears in the Scorecard.
Access
Requirements
You must have a valid link to the Planning server along with an
established port. Also, Scorecard violations must exist before the page
is populated.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 1 6 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Capacity Plan Summary - Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity Violations: Resource page
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
Unit The business unit at which the resource is located.
Assigned Resource This is the aggregate resource that is overloaded.
Resource tab
See the previous exhibit for a view of this tab.
Start Date/Time This is the currently scheduled start date and time for the
operation.
End Date/Time This is the currently scheduled end times for the
production operation
Load Date/Time This is the time the system uses to calculate and allocate
the remaining capacity requirement for the production task
when a portion of the task has been completed. The
system calculates a load duration value based on the
remaining task quantity, then uses that value with the task
end time to establish the load start time.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N 6 - 1 7
Details tab
Viewing the Details tab
This tab displays the Resource Class and the Operation (task) involved in the overload.
Item ID tab
Viewing the Item ID tab
This tab includes the Item ID, Description, and Planner Code for the assigned resource in a
specific business unit.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
6 - 1 8 M A N A G I N G T H E C A P A C I T Y P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
If the assigned resource contains configurable items, the Configuration Code appears in the grid.
For more information about the Planning Scorecard and other constraint violations, see
“Managing the Master and Material Plans”.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 1
C H A P T E R 7
Committing the Production Plan
After you create and solve a plan in the Planning engine, you’ll need to transfer the plan, in the
form of planning messages, back to your PeopleSoft database. Once the data is back in the
PeopleSoft transactional system, the planning messages are available for further review and
processing by production control managers, master schedulers, planner/buyers, and stockroom
managers.
Overview of the Commit Plan Process
Once you create a workable plan in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you bring back the
recommendations into the PeopleSoft transactional system using the Receive Planning Messages
(PLS2000) process. There, the recommendations are distributed into the various components as
planning messages, where they are reviewed and can be acted upon. You can also select to have
messages automatically approved, where applicable, and you only need to apply them wherenecessary.
The information transferred from the Planning engine includes:
• Production Messages: You can select, review, approve, and apply production data.
For more information about production messages, see “Processing Planning Messages in
PeopleSoft Production Management”.
• Production Exceptions: You can select and review exception information for the production
messages.
For more information about production exceptions, see “Processing Planning Messages in
PeopleSoft Production Management”.
• Inventory Transfer Messages: You can select, review, approve, and apply inventory transfer
data.
For more information about inventory transfer messages, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 2 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
• Inventory Exceptions: You can select and review exception information for the inventory
transfer messages.
For more information about inventory exceptions, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory”.
• Material Stock Request Messages: You can select and review material stock request data.
For more information about material stock request messages, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory”.
• Material Stock Request Exceptions: You can review exception information for the material
stock request messages.
For more information about material stock request exceptions, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Inventory”.
• Purchasing Messages: You can select, review, approve, and apply purchasing data.
For more information about production messages, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing”.
• Purchasing Exceptions: You can review exception information for the purchasing messages.
For more information about purchasing exceptions, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Purchasing”.
• Sales Order Messages: You can select and approve sales order data.
For more information about production messages, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management”.
• Sales Order Exceptions: You can review exception information for the sales order messages.
For more information about sales order exceptions, see “Processing Planning
Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management”.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 3
Receiving Planning Messages (PLS2000)
To transfer the data from the Planning server to the PeopleSoft database, you run the Receive
Planning Messages (PLS2000) process to populate each of the components used to review and (in
some cases) apply the planning messages. You can also generate planning reports with your new
data.
PeopleSoft Production Planning can maintain up to two plans for each business unit at any time.These two plans include:
• One master run of a production plan.
• One simulation run of a production plan.
As PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a new simulation or master plan for the same business
unit group and brings it into the PeopleSoft transactional system, the old simulation or masterplan data is deleted for the business unit.
The Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process involves exporting the planning information
out of the Planning server, getting the export information in a file where Process Scheduler can
access it, and writing the information to the PeopleSoft transactional system for further
processing. To facilitate this process, you can set up the Receive Planning Messages run control
to automatically perform these steps. You can optionally perform each of the steps one at a time.
Identifying Planning Message Options
Usage Use the Receive Planning Messages page to identify the planning
message file and approval options for the planning message run.
Object Name RUN_PLS2000
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Receive
Planning Messages, Receive Planning Messages
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process Name PLAN_EXPORT, PLS9001, PLS2000
Process Type Application Engine, SQR
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 4 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Receive Planning Messages - Receive Planning Messages page
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report
Manager, Process Monitor, and Run button.
Select the PeopleSoft Production Planning business unit Group Code for which you want to
retrieve planning messages.
Receive/Rpt (receive/report) Planning Messages
To receive the planning messages, enter the File Name with the complete path for the location of
the file that is created when exporting the planning information from the planning server. For
example:
c:\temp\v1_PLAN_103198.export_sql
The file must be in a directory that can be accessed by the Process Scheduler, as this file is the
input for the Receive Planning Messages SQR (PLS2000.SQR). The file name is controlled by
the export version number specified on the Planning server page in this component and the Model
ID name specified when creating the data model with the Production DataLink. In this example,
the “v1” is the version number and “PLAN_103198” is the data model ID. These two values areconcatenated with an underscore by the Planning engine when the file is created.
When you use the automatic process to generate the export file and receive the data for the
PeopleSoft transactional system, data for both planning messages and reports is contained within
a single file. If you choose to manually export the planning information, you can export just
message data or just report data. Two command files are provided with the Planning engine to set
the export parameters for messages and reports. These command files are messages.command
and reports.command. When manually exporting the message and report data from the same
planning model, you must change the version number on the Planning Server page to prevent the
files from having the same name and overwriting each other.
If you’re generating a planning report before you transfer planning messages to the PeopleSoft
database, indicate the file name for receiving report data and select the Simulation Run check
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 5
box. When you run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, PeopleSoft Production
Planning verifies that the content of the export file matches the simulation run status specified
here. If it doesn’t match, the system will write a message to the SQR log file and continue
processing. If you’re receiving planning messages, PeopleSoft Production Planning performs an
additional check to ensure that the planning messages being delivered are from the latest master
run of the Production DataLink. If it isn’t, PeopleSoft Production Planning stops processing the
planning messages it is trying to transfer over from the Planning engine.
If you receive the planning messages and report data simultaneously, you can’t create report
data from a simulation run, because simulation runs don’t pass back message data.
For more information on creating planning reports and generating simulation runs for report
data, see Creating Planning Reports.
Receive Messages Options
Select one of the following Approval Options:
Auto Approve All Select this option to automatically approve all messages
brought over from the Planning engine.
Auto Approve Within
Horizon
Select this option to automatically approve all messages
brought over from the Planning engine based on the
parameters you set in the other fields of this group box.
Manual Approve Select this option if you want to manually approve all
messages in their applicable components.
If you select Auto Approve Within Horizon, the From Date, To Date, and Based on fields
become available for entry. Enter the from date and to date for the horizon, and indicate whether
the horizon is based on the Order End Date, Order Start Date, or Both the order start date and
the order end date.
Select the Receive Master Plan Items check box if you also want to receive planning messages
for Master Plan items.
Verifying Planning Server Settings
Usage Use the Planning Server page to select the default server template for the
Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. You can also use this
page to override your Planning server template defaults. This page
enables you to automatically transfer the export files for messages and
reports from the Planning server to your local server for further
processing by Process Scheduler.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 6 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Object Name RUN_PLS10010
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Receive
Planning Messages, Planning Server
Prerequisites You must have previously defined at least one Planning server template
using the Planning Server Definition page in the Define General Options
menu. Optionally, you can also create your own Planning server
template defaults by using the User Preferences - Planning page in the
Define General Options menu.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLAN_EXPORT, PLS9001, PLS2000
Process Type Application Engine, SQR
Receive Planning Messages - Planning Server page
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report
Manager, Process Monitor, and Run button.
Planning Server
Depending on how you entered the Receive Planning Messages component, one of the following
will appear in the Planning Server Template Name field:
• If you entered the component by adding a new run control ID and your own Planning server
defaults using the User Preferences - Planning page, your Planning server template will default
into this field. If this is the case, the host and server information you defined for your Planning
server template will default into the host and server fields on this page.
• If you entered the component by adding a new run control ID and you haven’t defined your
own Planning server defaults using the User Preferences - Planning page, the Planning server
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 7
template defined as the installation default on the Installation Options - Planning page will
default into this field.
• If you entered the component by selecting an existing run control ID, you’ll have to select a
Planning server template from one of the available options. You use the Planning Server
Definition page in the Define General Options menu to define one or more Planning server
templates.
Once you verify that the Planning server template is correct or you select a Planning server
template, you can use the defaults that populate this page or you can override any of the defaults.
Overriding the defaults impacts only the run control definition; it doesn’t update the server
template definition.
If you want to change the Planning server definition default information for the Planning
Server Definition, you’ll need to change the Planning server definition itself.
Verify or change the Host Name, Host User Name, Host Password, host Platform, Server
Name, server User Name, Server Password, Timeout (seconds), Port, and Export Version.
For more information about these fields, about changing Planning server definition defaults,
or about adding a new Planning server definition, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 ApplicationFundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Financials and Supply Chain Management
General Options”.
In the Write Export Files To field, indicate where the export files that were created by the
Planning server reside. This is controlled by the configuration parameter EXPORT_PATH in the
configuration file for the Planning server (rpsserver.ini for NT or .rps file for UNIX). The
Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process looks for the export files on the Planning server
you specify here. If it was specified when selecting the process job to run, this path name
represents what the File Transfer process uses as the source path name for moving files. The file
name and path on the Receive Planning Messages page is used as the destination path name for
moving files. The path name must end with a forward slash (/) for UNIX, or a backslash (\) for
Windows NT; otherwise, the file transfer won’t take place.
Click the Run button to access the Process Scheduler Request page. Select one or more of the
following options to run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process using Process
Scheduler:
PLAN_EXPORT
(PLAN_EXPORT)
Select this check box to run the PLAN_EXPORT process.
This process creates the file of the plan data to be
exported.
Receive Planning Messages
(PLPPMSG)
Select this check box to run a multi-step process job that
includes the transfer of the planning message export file to
the host (PLS9001) and the Receive Planning Messages
(PLS2000) process.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 8 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Planning Export
(PLPPMSG1)
Select this check box to create the file to be exported
(PLAN_EXPORT), transfer of the planning message
export file to the host (PLS9001), and the Receive
Planning Messages (PLS2000) process.
Receive Planning Messages
(PLS2000)
Select this check box to only receive the planning
messages.
Transfer Export File
(PLS9001)
Select this check box to transfer the export file (PLS9001)
to the host for the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000)
process.
This is a multi-step process that runs the file transfer, then the Receive Planning Messages
(PLS2000) process. If you have already moved the export files to a location that can be
accessed by Process Scheduler (such as an NTFS file server), you might only need to run the
Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process; the export files won’t need to be moved.
For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process SchedulerPeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.
Once you run this process, you can generate planning messages and, optionally, the plan report
information to create a planning report. Once you generate these messages, you can review,
approve, and apply them using pages in PeopleSoft Production Management, Inventory, Order
Management, and Purchasing.
For more information about reviewing, approving, and applying planning messages in
PeopleSoft Production Management, see “Processing Planning Messages in PeopleSoft
Production Management”.
For more information about reviewing, approving, and applying planning messages in
PeopleSoft Inventory, see “Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft
Inventory”.
For more information about reviewing, approving, and applying planning messages in
PeopleSoft Purchasing, see “Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft
Purchasing”.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 9
For more information about reviewing planning messages in PeopleSoft Order Management,
see “Processing Planning Recommendations in PeopleSoft Order Management”.
Using Unprocessed Messages From a Previous Plan
When you run the Production DataLink, PeopleSoft Production Planning generates transfer order,
purchase order, sales order, and production order messages that you can review and, in most
cases, approve and apply to your PeopleSoft database. You can continue applying messages from
a planning run until the next time the Production DataLink is run for your business unit. Once the
Production DataLink process is run, you can’t apply the messages generated from the last
planning run. This prevents you from creating double supply orders.
The lockout function gives you the visibility to know when planned orders and changes can’t beprocessed. When processing planning messages, this function is system-enforced.
There may be times when you make an error and pull data from the database too early. In these
cases, you might want to go back and review, approve, and apply messages from the last
Production DataLink run. To do this, you’ll need to:
• Change the Lockout status using the Master Plan Data page.
• Review, approve, and apply any additional planning messages from the last Production
DataLink run.
Once you apply all of the planning messages from the last Production DataLink run, generate a
new planning message run. You must do this to accurately reflect the messages that were
processed. When you run the Production DataLink again, it sends data back to the Planning
engine and automatically selects the Lockout check box on this page. If the Lockout check box isselected, it indicates that the previous Production DataLink planning data is now invalid.
Using the Master Plan Data Page
Usage Use the Master Plan Data page to view the last date and time a full
regeneration Production DataLink process was run, the last date that a
net change Production DataLink was run, and whether or not the
planning information has been received back into the PeopleSoft
transactional system. Use this page also to change the lockout status.
Object Name PL_MASTER_PLAN
Navigation Plan Production, Maintain Production Data, Use, Master Plan Data
Access
Requirements
Enter the business unit Group Code that corresponds to the specific
planning messages you want to review.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 1 0 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Master Plan Data page
This page displays the PeopleSoft Production Planning business unit Group code you selected, as
well as the Date Time (date and time) and Net Change status of the last plan generated for the
business unit group by the Production DataLink. The Processed check box indicates whether the
Receive Planning Message (PLS2000) process was previously run against this plan. You can run
the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process against only a single production plan master
run.
Use the Lockout check box to indicate whether or not you can apply additional planning
messages from the current production plan to your PeopleSoft database.
If the Lockout check box isn’t selected, the current production plan messages can be reviewed,
approved, and applied, and a new Production DataLink process hasn’t been initiated. You can
continue to apply planning messages until you generate a new plan through the Production
DataLink.
If the Lockout check box is selected, a new Production DataLink process has already been
initiated and new messages have been generated. In this case, you can clear the check box to run
the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process. When you clear the check box, you can
access any of the messages from the previous Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) run. You’ll
have to run the Production DataLink process again before reviewing new planning messages.
The Process Status check box will be selected if the Production DataLink is running; typically,
you shouldn’t select or clear this check box.
Creating Planning Reports
A critical measure of an effective, enterprise-wide planning system is the ability to produce
accurate and timely reports with a minimum of effort. PeopleSoft Production Planning provides
you with the solution: standard supply chain planning reports with the flexibility to select and
classify the information you need. Using the Planning Report, you can create your own report
layout and information with over twenty rows of detailed options.
Understanding Planning Report Options
Using the Planning Report (PLS2001), you can include as much or as little information you need
to make scheduling and forecasting decisions. With this functionality, you can:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 1 1
• Create your own layout. You can standardize the look of your report or you can select
different criteria every time you create a new report. You can also modify the report title and
the row type names or labels.
• Generate supply and demand pegging detail. If you want to review the detailed information
that represents your bucket totals, you can generate supply and demand pegging detail. Thisenables you to print row-by-row supply and demand detail for easier bucket reconciliation.
• Generate reports based on simulation or actual plan data. You have the option of analyzing
“what-if” scenarios by generating reports based on the simulation plan. You can also generatereports based on actual plan data.
In addition, each standard planning report includes the following sections:
• Report header: The header contains standard report information such as the report number,
report name, description, page number, and report run date and time. The header appears foreach item on the report.
• First page: The first page lists your selection criteria. Only the criteria you specified when
setting up your report are printed. If you selected a criterion for sort sequence or subtotal
purposes only, None will appear as the value of the selection criteria, followed by the sort
sequence and subtotal.
• Item attributes: These detail the attributes of each item, such as an item description,
configuration code (if one exists), balance on hand, and selling price.
• Row Types: The row types you specified to be included in the report appear for selected
periods. If you decide to print a detailed report only, the planning report, including the row
types, won’t be printed.
With each report, you can include these optional reporting features:
• Schedule Detail (supply pegging) and Actual Demand Detail (demand pegging).
• Subtotals for each of the specified selection criteria.
Creating Your Own Layout
The planning reports you generate using PeopleSoft Production Planning enable you to create
your own report layout and content. You define the rows you want to include in the report as
well as the sort order and row names. In addition, you can:
• Display up to 13 periods across a page, including those periods that are past due. If there are
more than 13 periods, PeopleSoft Production Planning prints the next 13 periods below the first
13 periods if there is sufficient vertical space. If there isn’t enough space, the next 13 periodsprint on the next page.
• Define the bucket size to use for reporting. You can use days, weeks, months, or a
combination of all three. Including the past due and total columns, you can view up to a
maximum of 54 columns. Daily buckets always occur before weeks in the planning horizon,
and weeks occur before months. Weekly buckets run Sunday through Saturday. Monthly
buckets are by calendar month. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses the beginning date of the
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 1 2 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
bucket to identify a column.
• Specify if you want to print the Planning Report, the Supply and Demand pegging details, or
both.
• Define your own report title.
• Specify the row types you want to appear in the body of the report. In addition, you can
modify each row type name or label to meet your own reporting needs. You can also
determine the sort sequence of the row type.
Generating Supply and Demand Detail
In addition to creating your own layout, you also have the option to review supply and demand
pegging detail on all reports. This row-by-row detail enables you to reconcile your bucket totals.
Supply Detail
This table describes the detail supply sourcing information that PeopleSoft Production Planning
provides with your detailed report:
Column Explanation
Due Date Actual date the scheduled receipt is expected to be completed or
received.
Order Number Identifies the production ID, transfer order ID, purchase order, or
planned transfer. In the case of planned production, this data field is
blank.
Order Quantity Quantity remaining open on the scheduled receipt.
Order Type Indicates whether the planning data is identified as a purchase order
(PURC), production order (PROD), or transfer order (XFER).
Order Status For production IDs or production schedules: Planned, Entered, Firmed,
Released, or In Process.
For purchase orders: Planned or Open.
For transfer orders: Planned or Open.
Reference For purchase orders: Vendor ID.
For transfer orders: From business unit.
Demand Detail
This table describes the actual demand sourcing information that PeopleSoft Production Planning
provides with your detailed report:
Column Explanation
Required Date Ship date or final assembly start date.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 1 3
Column Explanation
Order Number Identifies the customer sales order ID, material stock request ID,
production ID, production schedule, or transfer order ID. In the case
of forecast, planned production, or planned transfer, this field is blank.
Quantity Quantity open for customer order, transfer order, or production order.
In the case of a forecast, this is the forecast quantity.
Type Indicates whether the planning data is identified as a customer sales
order (CUST), production order (PROD), transfer order (XFER),
material stock request (MSR), or forecast (FCST).
Status The order status of demand.
For forecasts: Open.
For production IDs or production schedules: Planned, Entered, Firmed,
Released, or In Process.
For sales orders: Open or In Process.
For transfer orders: Planned, Open, Released, or In Transit.
For material stock requests: Open or In Process.
Reference For forecasts: blank.
For material stock requests: Customer ID, if one exists; otherwise, the
customer name if available.
For sales orders: Ship to customer ID.
For production: End item ID.
For transfer orders: Destination business unit.
Understanding Simulation and Master Plan Reporting
If you want to review planning data based on “what-if” scenarios, you can create a planning
report based on the simulated plan. This option is available only if you don’t enter a File Name inthe Receive Planning Messages group box on the Receive Planning Messages page.
When generating reports for a master plan, verify that the Simulation Plan check box is clear on
the Production DataLink component. In this case, you can generate report data at the same time
you’re generating planning messages using the Receive Planning Messages component.
For more information on generating planning messages, including the creation of simulation
and master plans, see Receiving Planning Messages (PLS2000).
Generating the Planning Report (PLS2001)
PeopleSoft Production Planning can maintain up to two plans for each business unit at any given
time in the report tables. These two plans include:
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 1 4 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
• One simulation run of a production plan.
• One master run of a production plan.
As PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a new simulation or master plan for the same business
unit and imports it into the report tables, the old simulation or master plan is deleted for the
respective business unit.
Before You Begin
The first step in generating a planning report is to process the exported file created at the end of
the planning session. This process retrieves the planning data from the flat file created by the
Export to RDBMS process and places it in the PeopleSoft database.
Once you export the data, you need to retrieve the report data from the planning system. To do
this, use the Receive Planning Messages component.
Defining Selection Criteria
Usage Use the Criteria page in the Planning Report component to define the
selection criteria and sort sequence you want to use to create your report.
You can create a planning report for a particular business unit, or you
can create a very specific report based on defined selection criteria.
Object Name RUN_PLS2001_SEL1
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning
Report, Criteria
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLS2001
Process Type SQR Report
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 1 5
Planning Report - Criteria report page
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit and
Language.
Select a PeopleSoft Production Planning business unit Group Code from the available options.
This is required. If you select a group code and don’t define additional selection criteria,
PeopleSoft Production Planning will include planning information for the business unit group.
If you want to create a report with more specific information, you can select from any of the
optional selection criteria:
• Business Unit.
• Item ID. If the item is a configured item, specify the Config Code (configuration code).
• Planner Code.
• Family.
• Category ID.
• Source Code: Make and Buy, Make, or Buy.
• Primary Buyer: This field is available if you’re using PeopleSoft Purchasing.
If you don’t specify an object within any of these criteria, PeopleSoft Production Planning
includes all objects within the criteria for the report. This enables you to print subtotals for the
criteria. For example, if you select a single item ID, you can’t collect subtotal information for the
criteria. If you leave the Item ID field blank, you can specify that you want to see a subtotal forall item IDs based on the defined selection criteria.
Once you determine your selection criteria, you can determine the Sort Sequence for the optional
criteria. For example, you might want the report with Planner Code as a primary sort and
Source Code as a secondary sort. In this case, enter a lower number (such as 1) in the Sort
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 1 6 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Sequence field for Planner Code, and a higher number (such as 2) in the Sort Sequence field for
Source Code.
Select the Subtotal check box if you want to view a subtotal for the criteria. In order to printsubtotals on your report, you must specify a sort sequence for that criterion.
Defining Report Options
Usage Use the Criteria2 page in the Planning Report component to specify a
report date range, buckets, and print options.
Object Name RUN_PLS2001_SEL2
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning
Report, Criteria2
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLS2001
Process Type SQR Report
Planning Report - Criteria2 report page
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID and
Language.
Select a Vendor Set ID and a Vendor ID. These fields are available if you’re using PeopleSoft
Purchasing.
Enter a Report Title. You can change the report title every time you generate a new report.
Select one of the following Print Options:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 1 7
Horizontal Report Only Print all the bucket information without row detail.
Horizontal Report with
Detail
Print all the bucket information with supply and demand
detail.
Supply and Demand Detail Print row-by-row information to view the detail that
makes up your bucket totals.
Bucket Size
Define the bucket size for your report. If you don’t specify reporting buckets, only past due
information is printed.
Although you can change it, the As Of Date edit box defaults to the last receive planning data run
date. The Receive Planning Data Run field displays the date you ran the Production DataLink
process for reports. The As Of Date must be equal to or later than the Receive Planning Data
Run date. In addition, the As Of Date controls what gets included in the past due bucket.
For your buckets, specify how many Days, Weeks, and Months you want to include in your
report. You can also combine days, weeks, and months up to a maximum of 52 columns. Daily
buckets always occur before weeks in the planning horizon, and weeks occur before month.
Weekly buckets run Sunday through Saturday. Monthly buckets are by calendar month. Each
column date is the beginning date of the bucket.
For example, the following entries in the Days, Weeks, and Months edit boxes will create a report
with the first 10 buckets as days, the next 12 as weeks, and the last 5 as months.
• Days: 10
• Weeks: 12
• Months: 5
Specifying Row Types
Usage Use the Row Types and Row Types2 pages in the Planning Report
component to select the row types you want to appear in the body of the
report. In addition, you can change any one of the row type names or
labels that appear in the report.
Object Name RUN_PLS2001_LBL1, RUN_PLS2001_LBL2
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning
Report, Row Types
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Report, Planning Report,
Row Types2
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLS2001
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 1 8 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Process Type SQR Report
Planning Report - Row Types report page (1 of 2)
Planning Report - Row Types2 report page (2 of 2)
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit,
Language.
The following row types are available and supported by PeopleSoft Production Planning, and
they are defined using both these pages:
Actual Forecast Actual planning periods for inventory.
Actual Supply Scheduled receipts from either existing purchase orders,
inventory transfer orders, or production orders.
Actual Supply = Production Supply + Purchased Supply
+ Transfer Supply
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 1 9
Actual Forecast Actual planning periods for inventory.
Available to Promise (ATP) Determines the projected available inventory that hasn’t
been committed to customer orders. PeopleSoft
Production Planning uses the following algorithm:
ATP = Planned Receipts + Scheduled Receipts - Actual
Demand - Carryover Demand
Planned Receipts + Scheduled Receipts = Total Supply
row type
Total Orders row type + Dependent Demand row type =
Actual Demand.
Carryover demand occurs when ATP is driven below 0 in
a time bucket. If this is the case, supply is consumed from
an earlier time bucket.
ATP is reported as a negative number in the first bucket if
carryover demand isn’t satisfied. PeopleSoft Production
Planning doesn’t print ATP and cumulative ATP in the
Past Due bucket since it doesn’t apply.
Cumulative ATP Cumulative or running total of ATP.
Customer Orders Orders generated by customers.
Days Supply A forward-looking calculation of that period’s Planned On
Hand balance, which determines how many days into the
future that period’s Planned On Hand balance will cover
the Total Demand. In the case where Planned On Hand
isn’t enough to cover some but not all of the Total
Demand for a particular bucket, PeopleSoft Production
Planning prorates the number of days by the ratio of the
Planned On Hand available to the Total Demand. If there
isn’t enough Total Demand through the periods reported,
the Days Supply bucket is blank.
Dependent Demand Demand that occurs when the item is required from
higher-level production assemblies.
Excess Inventory The maximum amount of inventory that is allowable. The
planned inventory on hand should never exceed this
number.
Forecast Expected demand based on sales history, leading
indicators, promotions, and so on.
Inter-unit Orders Demand from transfer orders placed on the source
business unit.
Net Forecast Forecast quantity that was consumed by actual demand.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 2 0 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Actual Forecast Actual planning periods for inventory.
New Planned Orders The sum of Planned Production, Planned Purchases, and
Planned Transfers.
Planned On Hand Prior period ending on hand + (Total Supply - Total
Demand)
Planned Production Suggested production orders created by PeopleSoft
Production Planning.
Planned Purchases Suggested purchase orders created by PeopleSoft
Production Planning.
Planned Transfers Suggested transfer orders created by PeopleSoft
Production Planning.
Production Supply The scheduled receipts from manufacturing in the form of
production orders.
Projected Inventory Turns How many times per year the inventory is turning based
on quantity:
[(Total Demand/Weighted Average Planned On Hand) x
(365/total days in planning horizon)]
This is quantity-based, rather than a traditional inventory
turns calculation (which is dollar-based).
Projected On Hand Prior period ending on hand + (Actual Supply - Total
Demand)
(This doesn’t include new planned orders.)
Purchased Supply The scheduled receipts from vendors in the form of
purchase orders.
Safety Stock The minimum quantity of stock planned to always be in
inventory to protect against fluctuations in demand or
supply.
Target Inventory Level The average of:
(Safety Stock + Excess Inventory).
Total Demand Defined as the sum of Net Forecast, Customer Orders,
Interunit Orders, and Dependent Demand.
Total Orders This sum of Customer Orders and Interunit Orders.
Total Supply The sum of Actual Supply and New Planned Orders.
Transfer Supply The scheduled receipts from other business units in the
form of transfer orders.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 2 1
To include a row in the report, select the Incl (include) check box next to the row name.
If you want, you can change the Row Type name by entering the new name in the specified Row
Type edit box.
Once you define the rows you want to include in your report, you can optionally define the Sort
sequence. For example, you might want Forecast as a primary sort and Total Orders as a
secondary sort. In this case, enter a lower number (such as 1) in the Sort field for Forecast, and a
higher number (such as 2) in the Sort field for Total Orders. If you leave any of the Sort edit
boxes blank, PeopleSoft Production Planning prints the sort-sequenced row types first, followed
by the unsorted row types in the default order they appear on these pages.
Click Run to generate the Planning Report (PLS2001).
For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process Scheduler
PeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.
Using the Planning Messages Report (PLS4001)
After you run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, you can create a report to
display a list of the messages brought over from the Planning engine. On the Planning MessagesReport, you review the messages brought over based on your selection criteria.
Defining Message Selection Criteria
Usage Use the Planning Messages page to print a report of the planning
messages brought over from Production Planning.
Object Name PL_REVPL_MSG
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning
Messages, Planning Messages
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLS4001
Process Type SQR Report
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 2 2 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Planning Messages - Planning Messages report page
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID,
Language, and Unit.
Select the business Unit, Item, and Planner Code to narrow the messages displayed on thereport.
Message Selection
Select the New Order check box to include messages on the report for new orders or the
Existing Order check box to include messages for existing orders. You can select both checkboxes, but you must select at least one.
Report Options
Select the Production check box to include production messages on the report, Transfers to
include inventory transfer messages on the report, or Purchasing to include purchasing messageson the report. You can select more than one check box, but you must select at least one.
Status
Unapproved Select this check box if you want to include messages that
weren’t approved in previous review sessions.
Approved Select this check box if you want to include messages that
were previously approved but not processed.
Processed Select this check box if you want to include messages that
were previously approved and processed.
Expedite Select this check box if you want to include messages that
are required before the planning time fence.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 2 3
Tolerance Select this check box if you want to include messages with
rescheduling tolerances applied to them.
You can select more than one check box, but you must select at least one.
Message Type
Reschedule Select this check box if you want to include messages for
rescheduled items.
Canceled Select this check box if you want to include messages for
canceled items.
Route Chg (change) Select this check box if you want to include messages for
items with routing changes.
Substitute Select this check box if you want to include messages for
substitute items.
You can select more than one check box, but you must select at least one.
Defining Production, Purchase Order, and Inventory Transfer MessageReporting Options
Usage Use the Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer page to select the production,
purchase order, and inventory message reporting options for the
Planning Message report.
Object Name PL_REVPL_MSG2
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning
Messages, Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer
Access
Requirements
Enter a Run Control ID.
Process
Name
PLS4001
Process Type SQR Report
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 2 4 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Planning Messages - Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer (production, purchase order, and transfer ordermessage selection) report page
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID and
Language.
Production
In the Order Status group box, select the Entered check box to include messages for entered
orders on the report, Firmed to include firmed orders, Released to include released orders, and
In Process to include orders in process. You can select more than one check box, but you must
select at least one.
Select the Production Class you want to use, either Production ID, Production Schedule, or
Both to include messages with that class on the report. Enter Production Start From and To
dates to limit the messages included to those in that date range.
Transfers
Enter a Dest Unit (destination business unit) to include only messages from that unit, and Dest
Planner Cd (destination planner code) to include only messages from that destination planner.
Enter Schedule Date From and To dates to limit the messages included to those in that date
range. Enter Schedule Arrival Date From and To dates to limit the messages included to thosein that date range.
Purchasing
Enter Purchase Start Date From and To dates to limit the messages included to those in that
date range.
Click Run to generate the Planning Messages report (PLS4001).
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 2 5
For more information about Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process SchedulerPeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.
Displaying Planning Item Use Up Information
PeopleSoft Production Planning provides you the ability to plan for end life of components and
beginning of life for their replacement. When one component replaces another component, it is
generally due to: engineering change, technical upgrades, and cost.
The process for handling useup items includes:
• Determine the phase out date of the component.
• Use up the remaining stock of the old component before introducing the new component into
production.
• Based on the effectivity date of the new component, plan for the purchasing of the new
component, while continuing to use the old stock (manufacturing, transfer orders, sales orders)
until such time as the old component is used up.
Displaying Planning Use Up Information
Usage Use this page to inquire about the item use up information that includes
the quantity on hand at the time of the phase out and final available
quantity.
Object Name PL_USEUP_ITEMS
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Inquire, Planning
Useup, Item Useup
Prerequisites Have determined the phase out date.
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit and Item ID.
Item Useup Inquiry page
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
7 - 2 6 C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit, and Item ID.
Select a Business Unit and enter an Item ID.
At the top of the page, the system displays the following:
Phase Out Date This date indicates when use up logic should go into effect
for the original component. After the phase out date,
supplies will be used but not replenished for the original
component. Any required new supply is generated for the
substitute item after this date. The phase out date field is
the future status date for items identified to be
discontinued. The future status and status date are defined
at the item attributes by Business Unit level.
Projected Use Up Date This is the projected date that the use of the component
will start tapering off without any activity. PeopleSoft
Production Planning populates this field.
QOH at Use Up This is the projected quantity on hand at the time of the
projected use up date. The quantity on hand may or may
not approach zero. PeopleSoft Production Planning
populates this field.
Qty Avail This is the current quantity available from the inventory
system.
The system retrieves the following information in the grid:
• Item ID (Parent Item where the item being queried is used).
• Short Desc (Short description of the parent item)
• Sub Item (Substitute Item)
• Short Desc (Short description of the substitute item)
• Priority (the item substitution priority)
• Qty Avail (quantity available for the substitute item)
Generating the Planning Use Up Report
Usage Use the page to generate an item use up report.
Object Name PL_USEUP_RPT
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Report, Planning Useup
Report, Item Useup Report
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O M M I T T I N G T H E P R O D U C T I O N P L A N 7 - 2 7
Prerequisites Have determined a phase out date.
Access
Requirements
Select a Run Control ID.
Item Useup Report page
The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the
preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report
Manager, Process Monitor, and Run button.
Report Request Parameters
Select a business Unit from the list. You can select all items (All) or a range of items (Range).
Click this button to access a page that allows you to select a range of items.
To generate a report, enter a Run Control ID and click the Run button.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T 8 - 1
C H A P T E R 8
Processing Planning Messages inPeopleSoft Production Management
Once demand has been translated into planned production, PeopleSoft Production Planning
creates planned production and rescheduling recommendations for PeopleSoft Production
Management for execution. Within PeopleSoft Production Management, planned production can
be automatically converted into production IDs and production schedules. In addition,
PeopleSoft Production Planning’s solvers review existing production information from
PeopleSoft Production Management, recommending cancellations to existing orders andrescheduling of existing production at both the operation and production levels.
Overview of the Production Messages Review and ApplicationProcess
After you use PeopleSoft Production Planning’s planning engine to optimize your production
plan, you will want to transfer new and existing production information from Production Planning
to PeopleSoft Production Management. PeopleSoft Production Planning’s functionality enables
you to transfer production plan information back and forth between Production Planning and
PeopleSoft Production Management.
PeopleSoft Manufacturing and Distribution data moves into PeopleSoft Production Planning tocreate a plan. The plan is fed back to Manufacturing and Distribution in the form of messages.
Once PeopleSoft Production Planning creates a Master and/or Material plan, you can transfer the
plan back to PeopleSoft Production Management using the Receive Planning Messages
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
8 - 2 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
component. Once the data is in PeopleSoft Production Management, you can review these
recommendations using the Review Planning Messages component. The steps to process
recommendations and apply them to your production management system are:
• Review and approve the planning messages.
• Apply the approved messages to your production data in PeopleSoft Production Management.
Before You Begin
Before you begin reviewing and applying production messages, you must:
• Generate your Production Plan.
For more information about generating the Production Plan, see “Generating the Production
Plan” and “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
• Receive the production messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning
Messages (PLS2000) process.
For more information about receiving planning messages, see “Committing the Production
Plan”.
Reviewing Production Messages
Before you apply the recommended changes from the Planning engine for your production data in
PeopleSoft Production Management, you’ll need to review the production messages and indicate
which recommendations are approved for processing. Use the Production Messages component
to review and approved the planning recommendations.
Selecting Production Messages for Review
Usage Use the Message Search page in the Production Messages component to
define the selection criteria for the production messages you want to
review.
Object Name PL_PRODUCTION_SRCH
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production
Messages, Message Search
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production
Messages, Message Search
Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review
Planning Messages, Message Search
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T 8 - 3
Production Messages - Message Search page
You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selection any of the following:
Enter a Business Unit (required field) or Item ID.
You can also select a Planner Code. PeopleSoft Production Planning uses planner codes to
provide access to information more efficiently. Planner codes are used to filter information in
most pages and processes in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
Message Selection
You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the New Order or Existing Order check
boxes, or both.
Order Status
You can limit the messages displayed by selecting the Entered, Firmed, Released, In Process,
or Cancel check boxes.
For more information about production statuses, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 ProductionManagement PeopleBook, “Maintaining Production Orders and Production Schedules”.
Production Class
You can select Production ID, Production Schedule, or Both, to narrow the list of production
messages to those of that class. Once you review and approve the production messages for
production IDs and production schedules, you can automatically apply them using the Apply
Production Messages page.
Production Start Dates
You can select the production start range for the messages displayed by entering From and To
dates to limit the messages displayed to that date range.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
8 - 4 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Status
Finally, you can select a status for messages you want to review; the default is to review
unapproved messages only. You can select one or more of the following:
Unapproved Select this check box if you want to view messages that
weren’t approved in previous review sessions.
Processed Select this check box if you want to view messages that
were previously approved and processed. In this case,
these messages and the production data have been updated
with PeopleSoft Production Planning’s recommended
changes.
Approved Select this check box if you want to view messages that
were previously approved but not processed.
Reschedule w/in Tolerance
(reschedule within tolerance)
Select this check box if you want to apply rescheduling
tolerances to the messages you review. If you select this
option, the system filters out any messages that fall within
the schedule in and out tolerances defined for the items
selected.
The Reschedule In Factor sets the tolerance for
recommendations to move an order to an earlier date. The
Reschedule Out Factor sets the tolerance for
recommendations to move an order to a later date.
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses these factors to
automatically approve reschedule recommendations. The
message is approved as long as the number of days
rescheduled falls within the tolerance factor. As a result,
review and approval of these messages aren’t necessary.
For example, if you set both factors to 5 and your
production date is 12/10, PeopleSoft Production Planning
automatically approves any order between the reschedule
in date of 12/5 and reschedule out date of 12/15 without
going to the appropriate review page. This only applies if
the change is a reschedule.
Expedite Select this check box if you want to review messages that
are required before the planning time fence.
Accepted Select this check box if you want to review messages that
have been previously accepted.
Cutoff Flag Select this check box if you want to review messages for
items that have messages beyond the planning message
fence defined for the item.
After you make your entries, click the Search button to display the messages.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T 8 - 5
Reviewing the Production Message Summary
After you select the production messages, you review them for approval. The details are broken
down into three pages:
• Production Details
• Details
• Configuration Code
Reviewing the Production Message Summary Production Details
Usage Use the Message Summary: Production Details page in the
Production Messages component to view the production details for
the production messages you want to approve.
Object Name PL_PROD_MSG_SUM
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production
Messages, Message Summary
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production
Messages, Message Summary
Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review
Planning Messages, Message Summary
Access
Requirements
Enter the Business Unit and whether you want a new and/or existing
orders.
Production Messages - Message Summary: Production Details page
At the top of the page, the business Unit is displayed. You can also select one of the followingProduction Status codes for the business unit: Entered, Firmed, or Released.
For more information about production statuses, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production
Management PeopleBook, “Maintaining Production Orders and Production Schedules”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
8 - 6 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Click this button (Set Status) to reset the status of all unprocessed planned production
displayed; unapproved messages are changed to a status of Approved, and the status of
new planned orders changes to the status you select.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Approved check box and Item ID are common to all the tabs.
Production Details tab
The system displays the production details of the messages for your approval based on the entries
you made on the previous page. The Item ID, Description, Start Date, Production ID, Total
Qty (total quantity), and PL Status (planning status) values display for each message.
Also displayed is one of the following Production Status codes, which you can change by
selecting another.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
Details tab
Viewing the Details tab
The system displays the details of the messages for your approval based on the entries you made
on the previous page. The Item ID and a notification of whether the item has been Processed
display for each message.
Also displayed are whether the item has a New Order or a Route Chg (route change), or a
Reschedule, Canceled, or Substitute status.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T 8 - 7
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The system displays the Configuration Code information of the messages for your approval based
on the entries you made on the previous page. The Item ID and Config Code (configuration
code) display for each message.
Click this button (Set Status) to reset the status of all unprocessed planned production
displayed; unapproved messages are changed to a status of Approved, and the status of
new planned orders changes to the status you select.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
Reviewing Production and Operations Detail
Usage Use the Production Messages - Production Detail page to display
production detail for each recommendation.
Object Name PL_PROD_MSG_SUM
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production
Messages, Production Detail
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production
Messages, Production Detail
Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review
Planning Messages, Production Detail
Access
Requirements
Enter the Business Unit and indicate whether you want new and/or
existing orders.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
8 - 8 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Production Messages - Production Detail page
At the top of the page, the Item, Production ID, Prdn Type (production type), PL Status
(planning status), production Area, Prdn DueDt (production due date), and Due Shift values
appear. If the item has been approved, the Approved check box is selected.
For each item, the Curr Item (current item), Short Desc (short description), Original Item,
Short Desc (short description), Production ID, and Per (quantity per assembly) also appear.
Click this button (Approved by Auditor) to display the Production Details page.
For more information about the Production Details page, see Viewing Additional Production
Details.
Click this button (Details) to display the Operation Detail page.
For more information about the Operation Detail page, see Viewing Operation Details.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
Viewing Additional Production Details
Usage Use the Production Details page to display additional production
details.
Object Name PL_SF_HDR_DETAIL1
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T 8 - 9
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production
Messages
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production
Messages
Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review
Planning Messages, Production Detail
Access
Requirements
Click the Approved by Auditor button on the Production Messages -
Production Detail page.
Production Details page
The Production ID, Total Qty (total quantity), and Production Status fields appear at the top of
the page.
The Plan Start date, Start Date, Processed, PL Status (planning status), Plan Due date, Due
Date, Plan Routing, Routing, Plan BOM, and BOM fields also appear.
At the bottom of the page, the Approved, New Order, Route Chg (route change), Canceled,
Reschedule, Substitute, and Frozen Substitutes check boxes appear.
Viewing Operation Details
Usage Use the Operation Detail page to display the details for a production message.
Object Name PL_SF_HDR_DETAIL1
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production Messages
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production Messages
Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review Planning
Messages, Production Detail
Access
Requirements
Click the Details button on the Production Messages - Production Detail page.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
8 - 1 0 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Operation Detail page
The Op Seq (operation sequence), Plan Start, Start Date, Work Center, Task Code, Plan Due,
Due Date, and Frozen Code fields appear at the top of the page, along with the Reschedule
check box.
Resources
The Resource Type, Crew/Machine/Tool, Description, and Qty Used (quantity used) fieldsalso appear.
Reviewing Production Exceptions
When you run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, PeopleSoft Production
Planning generates exception messages. These exception messages are generated because a
change in the production data occurred since the Production DataLink was run, or a violation of abusiness rule occurred, such as an invalid calendar date.
The production exception messages are broken down into three pages:
• Exception Details
• Dates/Quantity
• Configuration Code
Reviewing Production Exception Details
Usage Use the Exception Details page in the Production Exceptions
component to view the exception details for production messages.
Object Name PL_PROD_EXCEPTION
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T 8 - 1 1
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Production
Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Production
Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions
Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Review
Planning Exceptions
Access
Requirements
Enter the Business Unit and indicate whether you want a new and/or
existing order.
Production Exceptions - Review Planning Exceptions: Exception Details page
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Prdn ID (production ID) and Item ID are common to all the tabs.
Exception Details tab
The system displays the exception details found for the business unit, including Prdn ID
(production ID), Item, Description, and exception Message.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
8 - 1 2 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Dates/Qty (dates/quantity) tab
Viewing the Dates/Qty tab
The system displays the date and quantity information of the exceptions found for the business
unit, including Prdn ID (production ID), Item, Start Date, Start Time, Due Date, Due Time,
and Total Qty (total quantity).
Production Exception Configuration Codes tab
Viewing Configuration Code tab
The system displays the configuration code details found for the business unit, including Prdn ID
(production ID), Item, and Config Code (configuration code).
Applying Production Messages
Once you’ve reviewed and approved the planning recommendations, you are ready to apply the
production messages to your production data. When applying the planning messages, PeopleSoftProduction Management will:
• Apply any changes to existing production, including rescheduling production, operation
rescheduling, and alternate routing changes for production in the Firm status. In addition,
production frozen by PeopleSoft Production Planning is automatically applied to production
within PeopleSoft Production Management.
• Cancel any existing production IDs and production schedules recommended for cancellation by
PeopleSoft Production Planning.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T 8 - 1 3
Applying Production Messages
Usage Use the Apply Production Messages page to process the production
messages you have approved.
Object Name SF_PRDN_PLN_REQ
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Apply
Production Messages
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Apply
Production Messages
Manage Production, Maintain Production, Process, Apply
Planning Messages
Access
Requirements
Enter the Run Control ID.
Process Name SFPAPLNS
Process Type COBOL, SQL
Apply Production Messages page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager,
Process Monitor, and Schedule.
Enter a Request ID and choose the business Unit.
Process Frequency
Choose one of the following for this request:
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
8 - 1 4 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G M E S S A G E S I N P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Once Executes the request the next time this process is
scheduled to run. Once the process runs, the process
frequency is automatically set to Don’t Run.
Always Executes the request every time the process is scheduled
to run.
Don’t Run Ignores the request when the process is scheduled to run.
Planner Code Selection
Select All or a Single planner code. If you select Single, enter the Planner Code; only those
items belonging to that planner will be processed.
Production Selection
You can apply messages for production IDs, production schedules, or both by selecting the
Process Production IDs and Process Production Schedules check boxes accordingly.
Production Message Options
Select the appropriate check box to specify whether you want to:
Convert Planned
Production
Convert planned production into production IDs and
production schedules.
Apply Production Changes Apply production change messages to existing production
IDs and production schedules.
Click the Run button to apply the planning messages using Process Scheduler.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 1
C H A P T E R 9
Processing Planning Recommendationsin PeopleSoft Inventory
Once the recommendations have come back from PeopleSoft Production Planning and have been
received into the system using Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000), you can review, analyze,
and apply inventory transfer messages for PeopleSoft Inventory.
Overview of the Inventory Messages Review and Application Process
PeopleSoft Inventory includes an interface to manage fulfillment of, or changes to, interunit
transfer orders from PeopleSoft Production Planning. Managing the information from PeopleSoft
Production Planning is a two-phase process; information about changes can be reviewed and
analyzed using the Inventory Messages component. Then, the messages you approve are acted on
by the Apply Inventory Messages component.
PeopleSoft Production Planning analyzes PeopleSoft Inventory supply and demand by reading
directly from inventory tables. It then sends interunit transfer messages back to PeopleSoft
Inventory through an interface table.
If a message can’t be processed, it’s marked as an exception and viewed in the Inventory
Exceptions component. Each time the Apply Planning Messages process runs, it attempts toprocess all approved messages for the business unit regardless of error codes.
Before You Begin
Before you begin reviewing and applying inventory messages, you must:
• Generate your Production Plan.
For more information about generating the Production Plan, see “Generating the Production
Plan” and “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
• Receive the inventory messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning
Messages (PLS2000) process.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
9 - 2 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about receiving planning messages, see “Committing the Production
Plan”.
Reviewing Inventory Transfer Messages
Before you apply recommended changes from the Planning engine, you’ll need to review the
inventory transfer messages and select those recommendations you want to apply.
Selecting Inventory Transfer Messages for Review
Usage Use the Messages Search page in the Inventory Messages component
to define the selection criteria for the planning inventory transfer
messages you want to review.
Object Name DEM_CHG_SRC_INV
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory
Messages, Messages Search
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory
Messages, Messages Search
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning
Messages, Messages Search
Inventory Messages - Messages Search page
You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following: the
inventory Business Unit (required field), Dest Unit (destination business unit), and Item. You
can also enter a Planner Code to limit the messages to those for that planner, and a Destination
Planner Code to limit to those for the item at the destination business unit.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 3
Schedule Date
To limit the messages retrieved to orders in a specific date range, you can enter a From date and
To date. Only messages related to orders with scheduled ship dates falling within those dates are
retrieved.
Schedule Arrival Date
To limit the messages retrieved to orders with a scheduled arrival date within a specific date
range, you can enter a From date and To date.
Priority
To limit the messages retrieved to orders within a specific priority range, enter a From priority
and To priority.
Message Type
You can select one or more of the following check boxes to limit the messages displayed:
New Select this check box if you want to view messages directing
PeopleSoft Inventory to create new material stock requests.
Reschedule Select this check box if you want to view messages recommending
rescheduling material stock requests.
Reprioritize Select this check box if you want to view messages reprioritized by the
Planning engine by a solver.
Canceled Select this check box if you want to view messages suggesting
cancellations to material stock requests.
Status
To limit the messages to those with a specific status, you can select one or more of the followingcheck boxes:
Unapproved Select this check box if you want to view messages not previously
approved in prior review sessions.
Approved Select this check box if you want to view messages previously
approved but not processed.
Expedite Select this check box if you want to view messages required before the
planning time fence.
Accepted Select this check box if you want to view messages that have been
previously accepted.
Rescheduled w/in
Tolerance
(rescheduled within
tolerance)
Select this check box if you want to apply planning rescheduling
tolerances to messages you review. If you select this option, the
system will filter out any messages that fall within the schedule in and
out tolerances defined for the items selected.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
9 - 4 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Processed Select this check box if you want to view messages that were
previously approved and processed. In this case, these messages and
the production data has been updated with PeopleSoft Production
Planning’s recommended changes.
Cutoff Select this check box if you want to view messages for items that have
messages beyond the planning message fence defined for them.
The default setting is to review unapproved messages only.
After you make your selections, click the Search button to display the messages.
Reviewing the Inventory Transfer Message Summary Details
Usage Use the Messages Summary: Message Details page in the Inventory
Messages component to review the message detail information for
inventory transfer messages.
Object Name DEM_CHG_SUM_INV
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory
Messages, Messages Summary
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory
Messages, Messages Summary
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning
Messages, Messages Summary
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 5
Inventory Messages - Messages Summary: Message Detail page
At the top of the page, the Business Unit, Dest Unit (destination business unit), Planner Code,
Destination Planner Code, and Item ID appear. Also displayed are the Schedule Date, Arrival
Date, Priority, Status, and Message Type group boxes.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Approved check box and message Type are common to all the tabs.
Message Detail tab
For each item message, the message Type, Business Unit, Dest Unit (destination business unit),
Source, Msg ID(message ID), PL Status (planning status), Frozen, Sched Date (schedule date),
and Priority columns appear.
You can display the details for the item by clicking the Details button to display the Message
Detail page.
For more information about the Details button, see Displaying Message Details.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
9 - 6 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Item Information tab
Viewing the Item Information tab
At the top of the page, the Business Unit, Dest Unit (destination unit), Planner Code,
Destination Planner Code, and Item ID appear. Also displayed are the Schedule Date, Arrival
Date, Priority, Status, and Message Type group boxes.
For each message, the Type, Sched Arrv (scheduled arrival), Item, Description, and Qty Base
(quantity base) appear.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
Displaying Message Details
Usage Use the Message Detail page to view details for a specific inventory
message line.
Object Name DEM_CHG_MSD_INV
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory
Messages, Messages Summary
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory
Messages, Messages Summary
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning
Messages, Messages Summary
Access
Requirements
Enter Control ID, then click the Details button for a message on the
Inventory Messages - Messages Summary: Message Detail page.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 7
Message Detail page
The Msg ID (message ID), Status, Msg Type(message type), and Source appear for the
inventory message.
In the Order Details group box, the Unit, Destination Unit, Order No (order number), Order
Line, Sch Line (schedule line), Demand Line, Priority, Item, Planner Cd (planner code), Dest
Planner Cd (destination planner code), Ship Via, Sched Date (schedule date), Sched Arrv
(scheduled arrival), and Qty Base (quantity base) appear for the item.
Click the Return button to go back to the Messages Summary - Message Detail page.
Applying Inventory Transfer Messages
Usage Use the Apply Inventory Messages page to process the inventory
messages you have approved. This process applies the messages so
PeopleSoft Inventory can act on the suggestions made by the Planning
engine.
Object Name DEM_CHG_REQ_INV
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Apply
Inventory Messages, Apply Planning Messages
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Apply
Inventory Messages, Apply Planning Messages
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Process, Apply Planning
Messages
Access
Requirements
Enter Control ID.
Process Name INPAPLAN
Process Type COBOL, SQL
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
9 - 8 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Apply Inventory Messages page
The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this
PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Report Manager,
Process Monitor, and Schedule.
Process Frequency
Select one of the following options for the request:
Once Executes the request the next time this process is
scheduled to run. Once the process runs, the process
frequency is automatically set to Don’t Run.
Always Executes the request every time the process is scheduled
to run.
Don’t Run Ignores the request when the process is scheduled to run.
Enter a Request ID and Description and choose the business Unit and Destination Unit.
Planner Code
For the Source and Destination planner codes, select All or a Single planner code. If you select
Single, enter the Planner Code in the field provided; only those items belonging to that planner
will be processed.
Item Selection
Select All or a Single item. If you select Single, enter the Item in the field provided; only thoseitems will be processed.
Click the Run button to apply the planning messages using Process Scheduler.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 9
Reviewing Inventory Exceptions
When you apply the inventory messages and the system finds data errors, exception messages are
generated. These exception messages might have been generated because a change in the
production data occurred since the Production DataLink was run, or because a violation of a
business rule occurred, such as an invalid calendar date.
Reviewing Inventory Planning Exceptions
Usage Use the Review Planning Exception: Planning Exceptions page in the
Inventory Exceptions component to view the exception details for
production messages.
Object Name DEM_CHG_EXD_INV
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory
Exceptions, Review Planning Exception
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory
Exceptions, Review Planning Exception
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning
Exceptions
Access
Requirements
Enter an inventory business unit.
Inventory Exceptions - Review Planning Exception: Planning Exceptions page
The inventory business Unit appears.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Msg ID (message ID) is common to all the tabs.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
9 - 1 0 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Planning Exceptions tab
For each line, the system displays the Msg ID (message ID), message Type, Status, Source,
Dest Unit (destination business unit), and Item.
Click the Details link to view more information about the message on the Exception Detail page.
For more information about the Details link, see Viewing Inventory Exception Details.
Exception Details tab
Viewing the Exception Details tab
For each line the system displays the Msg ID (message ID), Description, Order No (order
number), Order Line, Sched Date (schedule date), Priority, Sch Line (schedule line), and
Demand Ln (demand line).
Viewing Inventory Exception Details
Usage Use the Exception Detail page to display the details for an inventory
exception message.
Object Name DEM_CHG_EXD_INV
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Inventory
Exceptions, Review Planning Exception, Planning Exceptions
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Inventory
Exceptions, Review Planning Exception, Planning Exceptions
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Use1, Review Planning
Exceptions
Access
Requirements
Click the Details link on the Inventory Exceptions - Review Planning
Exceptions: Planning Exceptions page.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 1 1
Exception Detail page
The inventory business Unit, Destination Unit, Order No (order number), Order Line, Sch
Line (schedule line), Demand Line, Item code and description, Source, Planner Cd (planner
code), Dest Planner Cd (destination planner code), Ship Via, Sched Date (schedule date),
Schedule Arrv (scheduled arrival), Qty Base (quantity base), and Priority appear.
Click the OK button to return to the Inventory Exceptions - Planning Exceptions page.
Reviewing Material Stock Request Messages
Before you can reserve inventory to fulfill an order from any source, you must approve it. To
approve any of the material stock requests recommended by PeopleSoft Production Planning, you
select and review the material stock request messages.
Selecting Material Stock Request Messages
Usage Use the Messages Search page in the External MSR Messages
component to define the selection criteria for the material stock
request messages you want to review.
Object Name PL_SO_INMSG_SRCH
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, External
MSR Messages, Messages Search
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, External MSR
Messages, Messages Search
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Inquire, Planning Date
Changes, Message Search
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
9 - 1 2 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
External MSR Messages - Messages Search page
You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following:
The inventory business Unit (a required field), Order No (order number), Customer ID, or Item
ID.
Schedule Date
To limit the messages retrieved to orders in a specific date range, you can enter a From date and
To date. Only messages related to orders with scheduled ship dates falling within those dates areretrieved.
After you make your selections, click the Search button to display the messages.
Reviewing the Material Stock Message Summary MSR Details
Usage Use the Messages Summary: MSR Details page in the External MSR
Messages component to review the details of the material stock request
messages.
Object Name PL_SO_INMSG_SUM
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, External MSR
Messages, Messages Summary
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, External MSR
Messages, Messages Summary
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Inquire, Planning Date
Changes, Message Summary
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 1 3
External MSR Messages - Messages Summary: MSR Details page
At the top of the page, the business Unit and number of Rows appear.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Order No (Order Number), Line number and Schedule number are common to all the tabs.
MSR Details tab
For each item message, the Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Demand Line No
(demand line number), IN Sched DT/TM (inventory schedule date/time), PL Sched DT/TM
(planning schedule date/time), Customer ID, and Qty Requested (quantity requested) appear.
Item/Config Code tab
Viewing the Item/Config Code tab
At the top of the page, the business Unit and number of Rows appear.
For each message, the Order Number, Line, Schedule, Demand Line No (demand line
number), Item, Description, and Config Code (configuration code) appear.
Reviewing Material Stock Request Exceptions
After you review the material stock request messages, there might be exception messages thatwere generated.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
9 - 1 4 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Viewing Material Stock Request Exception Details
Usage Use the Exception Details page in the External MSR Exceptions
component to view inventory planning message exceptions.
Object Name PL_SO_EXCEP_IN
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, External MSR
Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, External MSR
Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions
Control Inventory, Fulfill Stock Orders, Inquire, Planning Date
Errors, Review Planning Exceptions
Access
Requirements
Enter the Business Unit
External MSR Exceptions - Review Planning Exceptions: Exception Details page
The business Unit appears at the top of the page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Order No (order number), Line number and Schedule number are common to all the tabs.
Exception Details tab
For each exception, the Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Demand Line No (demand
line number), Message, IN Scheduled Date/Time (inventory schedule date/time), PL Scheduled
Date/Time (planning schedule date/time), and Item appear.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T I N V E N T O R Y 9 - 1 5
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
For each exception, the Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Demand Line No (demand
line number), and Configuration Code appear.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G 1 0 - 1
C H A P T E R 1 0
Processing Planning Recommendationsin PeopleSoft Purchasing
Once you’ve run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, you can review therecommendations made by the Planning engine in the form of purchasing messages.
Overview of the Purchasing Planning Messages Review andApplication Process
Both Peoplesoft Production Management and PeopleSoft Production Planning write their
requested purchase orders to a staging area that is scanned by the background process POStage.
POStage writes the inputs to a temporary staging area called PO Staging tables in preparation for
sourcing to a purchase order.
When PeopleSoft Production Planning has made an adjustment to an existing purchase order, or
has suggested that a purchase order be created, a message is loaded into PeopleSoft Purchasing.
You review and approve these messages in much the same way that you handle production
messages.
After you approve the purchasing messages, they are “applied” in PeopleSoft Purchasing by
loading them into purchase order staging tables. If new purchase orders need to be created, they
are built using the purchase order build process. Changes can be made from approved changeorder requests using the change order process.
Before You Begin
Before you begin reviewing and applying purchasing messages, you must:
• Generate your Production Plan.
For more information about generating the Production Plan, see “Generating the Production
Plan” and “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
• Receive the purchasing messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning
Messages (PLS2000) process.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 0 - 2 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
For more information about receiving planning messages, see “Committing the Production
Plan”.
Reviewing Purchasing Messages
Before you apply the recommended changes from the Planning engine for your purchase orders,
you might need to review the purchasing messages and indicate which recommendations are
approved for further processing. Use the Purchasing Messages component to review andapproved the planning recommendations.
Selecting Purchasing Messages for Review
Usage Use the Message Search page in the Purchasing Messages component
to define the selection criteria for the purchasing messages you want to
view.
Object Name PL_PO_MSG_SRCH
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Purchasing
Messages, Messages Search
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Purchasing
Messages, Messages Search
Administer Procurement, Manage Purchase Orders, Use, Review
Planning Messages, Message Search
Purchasing Messages - Message Search page
You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following:
Inventory Unit (required field), Item ID, or Buyer Name.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G 1 0 - 3
You can also select a Planner Code to access information more efficiently. Planner codes are
used to filter information in most pages and processes in PeopleSoft Production Planning.
You can select the start range by entering From and To dates to limit the messages displayed tothat date range.
Msg Selection (message selection)
You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the New Order or the Existing Order
check box, or both. You must select at least one check box here.
Message Type
You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the Reschedule or the Canceled check box.
Status
You limit the messages displayed by selecting either the Unapproved or the Approved check
box, or both. You must select at least one check box here.
Unapproved Select this check box if you want to view messages that
weren’t approved in previous review sessions.
Approved Select this check box if you want to view messages that
were previously approved but not processed.
In addition, you can select one or more of the following:
Processed Select this check box if you want to view messages that
were previously approved and processed. In this case,
these messages and the purchasing data have been updated
with PeopleSoft Production Planning’s recommended
changes.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 0 - 4 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reschedule w/in Tolerance
(reschedule within tolerance)
Select this check box if you want to apply rescheduling
tolerances to the messages you review. If you select this
option, the system filters out any messages that fall within
the schedule in and out tolerances defined for the items
selected.
The Reschedule In Factor sets the tolerance for
recommendations to move an order to an earlier date. The
Reschedule Out Factor sets the tolerance for
recommendations to move an order to a later date.
PeopleSoft Production Planning uses these factors to
automatically approve reschedule recommendations. The
message is approved as long as the number of days
rescheduled falls within the tolerance factor. As a result,
review and approval of these messages isn’t necessary.
For example, if you set both factors to 5 and your
production date is 12/10, PeopleSoft Production Planning
automatically approves any order between the reschedule
in date of 12/5 and reschedule out date of 12/15 without
going to the appropriate review page. This applies only if
the change is a reschedule.
Expedite Select this check box if you want to review messages that
are required before the planning time fence.
Accepted Select this check box if you want to review messages that
have been previously accepted.
Cutoff Flag Select this check box if you want to review messages for
items that have messages beyond the planning message
fence defined for the item.
After you make your entries, click the Search button to display the messages.
Reviewing the Purchasing Message Summary: PO Details
Usage Use the Message Summary: PO Details page in the Purchasing
Messages component to review purchase order details of the purchasing
messages for approval.
Object Name PL_PO_MSG_SUM
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Purchasing
Messages, Messages Summary
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Purchasing
Messages, Messages Summary
Administer Procurement, Manage Purchase Orders, Use, Review
Planning Messages, Message Summary
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G 1 0 - 5
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit and whether to view new and/or existing orders.
Purchasing Messages - Message Summary: PO Details page
At the top of the page, the Business Unit and number of Rows appear.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Approved check box and PO type are common to all the tabs.
PO Details tab
For each item message, the PO type, Line, Sched Num (schedule number) Item ID,
Description, Rel Date (release date), and Due Date appear.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 0 - 6 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Qty/Status Details tab
Viewing the Qty/Status Details tab
For each item message, the PO type, Line, Sched Num (schedule number), Plan’d Qty (planned
quantity), Std UOM (standard unit of measure), Frozen status, and PL Status (planning status)appear.
Also displayed are Ovr Vendor (override vendor), Reschedule, Canceled, and Processed checkboxes.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
For each item message, the PO type, Line, Sched Num (schedule number), and Config Code
(configuration code) appear.
To approve a message, select the Approved check box on that line.
Click this button (Approve All) to approve all messages displayed.
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G 1 0 - 7
Click this button (Reset Approval) to clear any messages approved.
Reviewing Purchasing Exceptions
When you run the Receive Planning Messages page in the Run PO process, PeopleSoft
Purchasing generates exception messages. These exception messages are generated because a
change in the purchasing data occurred since the PO process was run, or because a violation of a
business rule occurred, such as an invalid calendar date.
Information about the purchasing exception messages is provided in three pages:
• Exception Details
• PO Dates
• Configuration Code
Reviewing Purchasing Exception Details
Usage Use the Exception Details page in the PO Exceptions component to
view the purchasing message exceptions.
Object Name PL_PROD_EXCEPTION
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Purchasing
Exceptions, PO Exceptions
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Purchasing
Exceptions, PO Exceptions
Administer Procurement, Manage Purchase Orders, Use, Review
Planning Exceptions, PO Exceptions
Access
Requirements
Enter a Business Unit.
Purchasing Exceptions - PO Exceptions: Exception Details page
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 0 - 8 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Item number, Description, PO type, Line number and Sched Num (schedule number) are
common to all tabs.
Exception Details tab
The system displays the exception details found for the business unit, including Item,
Description, PO number (purchase order number), Line number, Sched Num (schedule
number), and exception Message.
PO Dates tab
Viewing the PO Dates tab
The system displays the date and quantity information of the exceptions found for the business
unit, including Item, Description, PO number (purchase order number), Line, Sched Num
(schedule number), Release Date, and Delivery Due Date from PO (delivery due date frompurchase order).
Configuration Code
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
The system displays the configuration code details found for the business unit, including Item,
Description, PO (purchase order), Line, Sched Num (schedule number), and Config Code
(configuration code).
Applying Purchase Messages
After you have reviewed and approved the purchasing messages, the data is “applied” as follows:
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T P U R C H A S I N G 1 0 - 9
• The PO Stage Load process (PO_POSTAGE) in PeopleSoft Purchasing looks for purchase
order and change order requests. Purchase order requests are loaded onto the purchase order
stage tables. Change order requests are loaded onto the change request stage tables.
• The rows for purchase order requests on the purchase order stage tables are converted into
purchase orders by the PO Calculations process (PO_POCALC) and the Create PurchaseOrders (PO_POCREATE) process.
• The rows for change order requests on the change request stage tables are converted into
change orders by the Change Purchase Order process (PO_POCHNG).
For more information about the PO Stage Load process, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Purchasing
PeopleBook, “Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing”.
For more information about the PO Calculations process, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Purchasing
PeopleBook, “Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing”.
For more information about the Create Purchase Orders process, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01
Purchasing PeopleBook, “Understanding Purchase Order Sourcing”.
For more information about the Change Purchase Order process, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01
Purchasing PeopleBook, “Creating Change Orders”
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T O R D E R M A N A G E M E N T 1 1 - 1
C H A P T E R 1 1
Processing Planning Recommendationsin PeopleSoft Order Management
Once you’ve run the Receive Planning Messages (PLS2000) process, you can review the
recommendations made by the Planning engine. When demand outpaces supply, it might become
necessary for the planning solvers to make scheduling changes to a customer order while making
a feasible plan. In addition, the Planner might have manually made changes to the customerorders within the planning model.
Overview of the Order Management Planning Messages ReviewProcess
Using the inquiry pages in PeopleSoft Production Planning, you can review these rescheduled
shipment dates. Additionally, you can view the date change exceptions based on the customer
calendar or changes in the transaction system. The sales order message pages are used for inquiry
only; you must use the features in PeopleSoft Order Management to make any changes.
Before You Begin
Before you begin reviewing and applying sales order messages, you must:
• Generate your Production Plan.
For more information about generating the Production Plan, see “Generating the Production
Plan” and “Setting Up the Production DataLink”.
• Receive the sales order messages back from the Planning engine through the Receive Planning
Messages (PLS2000) process.
For more information about receiving planning messages, “Committing the Production
Plan”.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 1 - 2 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T O R D E R M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Reviewing Sales Order Messages
During the Receive Planning Message process, the system compares the exported sales order
from PeopleSoft Production Planning with the actual sales orders in PeopleSoft Order
Management. Based on material and capacity constraints, PeopleSoft Production Planning will
suggest rescheduling ship dates for orders that can’t be shipped on the customer-requested ship
date or the promise date.
You can direct rescheduling of demand by establishing demand priorities and lateness tolerance
rules.
For more information about demand prioritization, see “Setting Up Production Planning”.
For more information about lateness tolerance rules, see “Setting Up Production Planning”.
You can select and review the Sales Order Messages component.
Selecting Sales Order Messages for Review
Usage Use the Message Search page in the Sales Order Messages component
to define the selection criteria for the sales order messages you want to
review.
Object Name PL_SO_OMMSG_SRCH
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Sales Order
Messages, Message Search
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Sales Order
Messages, Message Search
Sales Order Messages - Message Search page
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T O R D E R M A N A G E M E N T 1 1 - 3
You can narrow the list of messages you want to review by selecting any of the following:
Select the OM Unit (Order Management business unit) for the sales order messages you want to
review. This is a required field.
Select the Order Number, Ship From business unit, and Ship To Customer to limit the
messages to orders with those parameters. You can also enter a Product ID.
Schedule Date
You can enter a From date and To date to narrow your search.
After you have made your selections, click the Search button to view the data.
Reviewing the Sales Order Message Summary
After you select the sales messages, you review them for approval. The details are provided on
three pages:
• Sales Order Details
• Customer/Product ID
• Configuration Code
Reviewing Message Summary: Sales Order Details
Usage Use the Message Summary: Sales Order Details page in the Sales
Order Messages component to review sales order details of the sales
order messages for approval.
Object Name PL_SO_OMMSG_SUM
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Sales Order
Messages, Message Summary
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Sales Order
Messages, Message Summary
Access
Requirements
Enter an Order Management Business Unit.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 1 - 4 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T O R D E R M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Sales Order Messages - Message Summary: Sales Order Details page
For each line, the Ship From, Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, OM Sched DT/TM
(Order Management scheduled date/time), PL Sched DT/TM (Planning scheduled date/time),
Schedule Status, and Qty Sched (quantity scheduled) appear.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
Common Page Information
The Ship From, Order No (order number), Line number, and Schedule number are common toall tabs.
Customer/Product ID tab
Viewing the Customer/Product ID tab
For each line, the Ship From, Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, Ship To Customer,
Product ID, and Req Ship (requested ship) appear.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T O R D E R M A N A G E M E N T 1 1 - 5
For each line, the Ship From, Order No (order number), Line, Schedule, and Config Code
(configuration code) appear.
Reviewing Sales Order Exceptions
The Planning engine generates exception messages when the rescheduled shipment date of a sales
order is invalid based on the shipment exception calendar defined at the inventory business unit
and customer levels. Additionally, net change conditions (when, for example, a sales order ismodified after being extracted into the planning model) also appear as exceptions.
Reviewing the Sales Order Exception Details
Usage Use the Exception Details page in the Sales Order Exceptions
component to review information about exceptions for your sales
orders.
Object Name PL_SO_EXCEP_OM
Navigation Plan Production, Commit Production Plan, Process, Sales Order
Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions
Plan Enterprise, Commit Enterprise Plan, Process, Sales Order
Exceptions, Review Planning Exceptions
Access
Requirements
Enter an Order Management Business Unit.
Sales Order Exceptions - Review Planning Exceptions: Exception Details page
The Order Management business Unit appears at the top of the page.
Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scrolling area. We
document fields common to all views first.
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 1 - 6 P R O C E S S I N G P L A N N I N G R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S I N P E O P L E S O F T O R D E R M A N A G E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Common Page Information
The Ship From, Order No (order number) Line number, and Schedule number are common to
all tabs.
Exception Details tab
For each line the system displays the Ship From business unit, Order No (order number), Line
number, Schedule number, a brief Message, OM Scheduled Date/Time (Order Management
scheduled date/time), and PL Scheduled Date/Time (Planning scheduled date/time), and
Product ID.
Configuration Code tab
Viewing the Configuration Code tab
For each line the system displays the Ship From business unit, Order No (order number), Line
number, Schedule number, and Configuration Code.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G R E P O R T D E S C R I P T I O N S 1 2 - 1
C H A P T E R 1 2
PeopleSoft Production Planning ReportDescriptions
PeopleSoft applications offer a wide range of query and reporting possibilities. In addition to the
standard reports that we deliver, we also provide reporting tools that you can use to create new
reports from scratch.
In this chapter, we provide you with a list of reports provided with PeopleSoft Production
Planning.
For more information about the reporting tools used to generate reports using PeopleSoft
applications, see PeopleTools 8.12 Introduction to PeopleSoft Reporting PeopleBook,“PeopleSoft Reporting Tools”.
PeopleSoft Production Planning Standard Reports
The following is a list of the reports provided with PeopleSoft Production Planning:
Report ID Report Name Report Description Report Type
PLS3000 Planning Data
Inconsistency
Report
Lists items to be planned and validates
items currently planned. Can identify
planned components with invalid routing
sequence numbers, manufactured items
with no routing in the routing table,
item/production areas with no valid
routing, routings with no item/production
area, routings with no planning times,
items with routings with no default
production areas. Also verifies if Master
Plan items only have master and material
components, or only have material
components.
SQR
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
1 2 - 2 P E O P L E S O F T P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G R E P O R T D E S C R I P T I O N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Report ID Report Name Report Description Report Type
PLS2001 Planning
Report
Lists all the information for business unit ,
and can include as much or as little
information needed to make scheduling
and forecasting decisions. Can create
custom layouts, generate supply and
demand pegging detail, and generate
reports based on simulation or actual plan
data.
SQR
PLS4001 Planning
Messages
Report
Lists messages brought over from the
Planning engine as recommendations for
PeopleSoft Production Management,
PeopleSoft Inventory, PeopleSoft
Purchasing, and PeopleSoft Order
Management. Can include new or
existing orders; production, transfer, or
purchasing messages; unapproved,
approved, processed, expedited, or
tolerance messages; and rescheduled,
cancelled, routing change, and substitute
types. Further parameters that can be
selected include order status, production
class, production start and end dates,
destination business unit, destination
planner code, schedule date, schedule
arrival date, and purchase start date.
SQR
PLS4002 Item Use-up
Report
Lists all discontinued items with the
projected use-up dates. For each item,
lists short description, substitute item
priority, and quantity available.
SQR
Standard Financial Reports
For more information about standard financial reports, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Setting UpYour Manufacturing System PeopleBook, “PeopleSoft Manufacturing Report Descriptions”.
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N D E X 1
Index
A
active Roll Forward phase 2-18
Actual Supply row type 5-9
Add Production button 5-21
Add Production page - Capacity Plan Summary
component 6-9
Add Production page - Material or Master Plan
Summary component 5-22
Add Purchase button 5-21
Add Purchases page - Material or Master Plan
Summary component 5-24
Add Row Type button 5-13
Add Transfer button 5-21
Add Transfers page - Material or Master Plan
Summary component 5-25
Advanced Filters page - Material or Master Plan
Exceptions component 5-39
advantages of PeopleSoft Production Planning 1-4
aggregate capacity
using constraints 5-60
violations 5-59
Aggregate Capacity Violations Configuration Code
page - Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary
component 6-17
Aggregate Capacity Violations Details page - Planning
Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary component
6-17
Aggregate Capacity Violations Item ID page -
Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary
component 6-17
Aggregate Capacity Violations page - Planning
Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary component
6-15
Aggregate Capacity Violations Resource page -
Planning Scorecard - Capacity Plan Summary
component 6-16
Aggregate Items page 2-10
aggregate items, maintaining 2-10
aggregate resources, using 2-10
Apply button 5-27
Apply Inventory Messages page 9-7
Apply Production Messages page 8-13
attributes
defining planning 2-21
setting up for production planning 2-10
B
back-loaded forecast 3-38
Balancing page - Line Schedule Editor component
2-58
balancing resource defaults, setting up 2-58
bar colors
defining 2-60
setting up filters 2-62
Bar Colors Filters page - Line Schedule Editor -
Filters component 2-62
Bar Colors page - Line Schedule Editor component
2-60
Bar Item Filters page - Line Schedule Editor - Filters
component 2-61
bar item filters, setting up 2-61
bar split duration, setting 2-51
BI (buildable inventory) shortages
using constraints 5-56
violations 5-55
BOM (bill of material), description 2-8
business process for Production Planning 1-5
business units, setting up 2-2
buttons
Add Production 5-21
Add Purchase 5-21
Add Row Type 5-13
Add Transfer 5-21
Apply 5-27
Change Server Settings 5-11
Remove Row Type 5-13
Return 5-27
Search 5-32
Sourcing Template Load 2-31
Update Production Options 2-31
Update Purchasing Options 2-31
Update Transfer Options 2-31
View Outputs 5-27
Workbench Link 5-40
C
canceled forecast quantities 5-63
capacity feasibility 3-15
capacity fence 3-6, 3-31
capacity load start date and time, description 5-61
capacity model 1-13
capacity plan
analyzing 6-12
maintaining 6-1
managing 6-1
prerequisites 6-1
reviewing summary 6-12
using 6-4
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
I N D E X 2 P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
using the Planning Scorecard 6-14
Capacity Plan Summary - Capacity Summary page
6-12
capacity planning process, overview 6-1
Capacity Summary page 6-4
carrying cost rate 3-32
cell over maximum, setting 2-51
Change Row Types page - Material or Master Plan
Summary component 5-12
Change Server Settings button 5-11
changeover families 2-49
changeover penalties, defining 2-9
color schemes, Line Schedule Editor 2-49
Color Settings page - Line Schedule Editor - General
component 2-53
command file data, setting up 3-55
Command Files page - Production DataLink
component 3-55
commit plan process overview 7-1
Common page - Production DataLink - Solvers
component 3-42
Compress utility 3-6
concatenation codes, defining 2-2
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Detail component 5-36
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Exceptions - Results component 5-43
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component
5-61
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - BI (buildable inventory)
Shortages component 5-57
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - Excess Stock component
5-55
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - Promise Dates component
5-53
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - Request Dates component
5-49
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - RM (raw material) Shortages
component 5-59
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Summary - Show Demand component 5-20
Configuration Code page - Material or Master Plan
Summary - Show Supply component 5-18
configured items, defining concatenation codes 2-2
constraint violations, descriptions 5-46
constraints 1-11
converting costs 3-29
co-products, description 5-28
cost conversion 3-29
Criteria report page - Planning Report component
7-14
Criteria2 report page - Planning Report component
7-16
currency code 3-29
current time 3-6
Customer Orders row type 5-9
D
data verification process, using 2-63
Date/Customer page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - Promise Dates component
5-51
Date/Customer page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - Request Dates component
5-47
Dates/Task Name page - Material or Master Plan
Summary - Show Demand component 5-20
Dates/Vendor/Task Name page - Material or Master
Plan Summary - Show Supply component 5-17
delayed forecast quantities 5-63
demand
defining for DataLink 3-36
prioritizing 2-22
setting options 3-36
sourcing 2-27
demand and supply data input example 1-4
demand for consumption, exploding 3-39
demand options, setting for Production DataLink
3-36
Demand page - Production DataLink -
Demand/Supply component 3-36
demand priorities
defining rules 2-24
setting up families 2-6
demand sources for creating prioritization rules
2-25
Dependent Demand row type 5-9
detail resources, using 2-10
Details page - Material or Master Plan Detail
component 5-33
Details page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component 5-61
Details page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - BI (buildable inventory) Shortages
component 5-57
Details page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - RM (raw material) Shortages component
5-59
Dimensions page - Line Schedule Editor - General
component 2-52
dynamic data 3-2
E
early fence 3-31
end fence 3-30
end-of-time 3-6
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N D E X 3
Exception Details page 9-10
Exception Details page - External MSR Exceptions
component 9-14
Exception Details page - PO Exceptions component
10-7
Exception Details page - Production Exceptions
component 8-10
Exception Details page - Sales Order Exceptions
component 11-5
Exception Specific Details page - Material or Master
Plan Exceptions - Results component 5-42
exceptions
reviewing Inventory 9-9
reviewing Inventory Planning 9-9
reviewing material stock request 9-13
reviewing Production 8-10
reviewing Production details 8-10
reviewing Purchasing 10-7
reviewing Purchasing details 10-7
reviewing sales order 11-5
reviewing sales order details 11-5
viewing inventory details 9-10
viewing material stock request details 9-14
Exceptions page - Material or Master Plan Exceptions
- Results component 5-40
Excess Inventory row type 5-9
excess stock
using constraints 5-54
violations 5-54
Expand utility 3-6
exploding demand for consumption 3-39
External MSR Exceptions component - Exception
Details page 9-14
External MSR Messages component - Messages
Search page 9-11
External MSR Messages component - Messages
Summary - MSR Details page 9-12
F
Feasibility Solver page - Production DataLink -
Solvers component 3-47
Feasible Planning page - Generate Plan component
4-8
Feasible Planning Solver 3-12, 3-47
allocating resources 3-17
allowing alternate routings 3-49
allowing item substitution 3-49
allowing material reallocation 3-48
allowing rescheduling of tasks 3-48
checking effectivities 3-20
computing lateness tolerance 3-18
computing weighted priorities 3-18
defining DataLink options 3-47
description 3-4
determining weighted priorities 3-17
ensuring positive on-hand quantity 3-14
ignoring safety stock 3-48
making a plan capacity-feasible 3-48
overview 3-12
planning for capacity feasibility 3-15
proportionally allocating resources 3-17
reducing excess inventory 3-15
reducing lead time 3-14
rescheduling tasks 3-48
satisfying unmet demand 3-13
sourcing allocations 3-14
using the Lateness Phase 3-19
using the Stock Adjustment Phase 3-19
verifying demand priority for frozen tasks 3-13
verifying supply and demand quantities 3-13
filled forecast quantities 5-63
filtered scorecard score 5-45
filtering Planning Scorecard data 5-66
filters defaults, defining 2-61
financial reports 12-2
firm production fence 3-34
forecast consumption 3-38
forecast demand priority 2-25
forecast fulfillment 3-23
using constraints 5-62
violations 5-62
forecast fulfillment fence 3-38
Forecast Items page 2-5
forecast items, defining 2-5
Forecast Percentages page 2-11
forecast product data, defining 2-6
Forecast Products page 2-6
front-loaded forecast 3-38
Frozen Details page - Production DataLink - General
component 3-33
frozen fence offsets, setting 3-33
G
Gantt charts 3-10
General Filters page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard component 5-66
general options, defining 2-1
General page - Line Schedule Editor - General
component 2-50
General page - Production DataLink - General
component 3-27
generating production plans, prerequisites 4-2
generating the Planning Report (PLS2001)
defining selection criteria 7-14
prerequisites 7-14
global collaboration 1-19
Global Preferences page - Generate Plan component
4-3
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
I N D E X 4 P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
H
histogram period of supply 3-41
I
Independent Demand row type 5-9
in-memory plans 1-10
installation options, PeopleSoft Production Planning
2-1
integrated material model 1-13
interactive-planning approach 1-11
inter-unit transfer demand priority 2-25
inventory attributes, defining 2-3
inventory consumption 1-14
Inventory exceptions
reviewing 9-9
viewing details 9-10
Inventory Message component - Message Search page
9-2
Inventory Message component - Message Summary -
Message Detail page 9-4
Inventory message details
displaying 9-6
inventory options, establishing 2-3
Inventory Planning component - Planning Exceptions
page 9-9
inventory supply 1-14
Inventory transfer messages
applying 9-7
reviewing 9-2
reviewing summary details 9-4
selecting for review 9-2
item attributes by unit, defining 2-4
item changeover families, setting up 2-49
Item Changeover Family page 2-49
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Safety Stock component 5-50
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component 5-61
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - BI (buildable inventory) Shortages
component 5-55
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Excess Stock component 5-54
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Forecast Fulfillment component 5-62
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Promise Dates component 5-53
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Request Dates component 5-49
Item ID page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - RM (raw material) Shortages component
5-57
Item Planning Inquiry page 2-41
item substitution 3-22
Item Use-up Report (PLS4002) 12-2
Iterative Repair page - Production DataLink - Solvers
component 3-52
Iterative Repair Solver 3-5, 3-24
defining run time 3-54
processing features 3-25
selecting optimization templates 3-54
setting up 3-52
using iterations 3-53
L
late beyond tolerance, description 2-24
late fence 3-6, 3-31
Late Supplies Inquiry 3-11
late within tolerance, description 2-24
lateness tolerance
computing formulas 3-18
processing conditions 2-24
Lateness Tolerance Rules page 2-26
lateness tolerances
defining 2-26
overview 2-23
level fence 3-31
Line Schedule Color page 2-49
Line Schedule Editor
defining bar colors defaults 2-60
defining color settings 2-53
defining defaults 2-48
defining dimensions 2-52
defining filter defaults 2-61
defining general settings 2-50
defining time periods 2-55
establishing color schemes 2-49
setting up time period for detailed LSE 2-55
using with solvers 3-11
viewing the Line Schedule Editor chart 2-62
Line Schedule Editor, setting up
aggregate time period 2-56
bar color filters 2-62
bar item filters 2-61
resource balances 2-58
resource entry defaults 2-57
Linear Programming (LP) Solver 3-4, 3-20, 3-50
canceling firm-planned orders 3-24
controlling the LP model 3-20
defining DataLink options 3-50
defining plan periods 3-52, 4-14
enforcing constraints 3-21
fulfilling forecasts 3-23
minimizing inventory without excess stock
constraints 3-24
modeling co- and by-products 3-23
modifying LP parameters 3-52
post processing 3-20, 4-13
processing alternate BOMs and routings 3-23
querying variable capacity over time 3-23
rescheduling firm-planned orders 3-24
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N D E X 5
setting the carrying cost rate 3-52, 4-14
setting the late shipment penalty 3-52, 4-14
sourcing partial orders 3-24
substituting items 3-22
using multiple effectivities with production options
3-23
using objective functions 3-22
using supply and demand transfers 3-24
using-up components 3-22
low-level codes 3-46
LP (linear programming) Solver 3-4, 3-20. See also
Linear Programming (LP) Solver
LP Planning page - Generate Plan component 4-12
LP Solver page - Production DataLink - Solvers
component 3-50
LSE See Line Schedule Editor
M
manufacturing objectives 1-8
manufacturing options, defining 2-8
master plan
analyzing 5-31
changing row types 5-12
changing servers 5-11
creating with the Datalink 3-25
defining advanced filters for exceptions 5-39
defining workbench parameters 5-5
generating 4-1
generation process 4-1
implementing 5-3
maintaining 5-5
maintaining planned orders 5-20
maintaining scheduled receipts 5-13
managing 5-1
overview 5-1
prerequisites 4-2
reporting 7-13
reviewing exceptions 5-36
reviewing the summary 5-32
showing demand 5-18
showing supply 5-15
using the summary 5-7
viewing plan details 5-33
Master Plan Data page 7-9
Master Plan Data page, (defining) 2-12
Master Plan Detail page 5-33
Master Plan Summary page 5-7
Master Plan Workbench page 5-5
master-planning data items, defining data 2-12
material feasible planning options 3-44
material model 1-13
material plan
analyzing 5-31
changing row types 5-12
changing servers 5-11
creating with the Datalink 3-25
defining advanced filters for exceptions 5-39
defining workbench parameters 5-5
generating 4-1
generation process 4-1
implementing 5-4
maintaining 5-5
maintaining planned orders 5-20
maintaining scheduled receipts 5-13
managing 5-1
overview 5-1
prerequisites 4-2
reviewing exceptions 5-36
reviewing the summary 5-32
showing demand 5-18
showing supply 5-15
using the summary 5-7
viewing plan details 5-33
Material Plan Detail page 5-33
Material Plan Summary page 5-7
Material Plan Workbench page 5-5
Material Planning page - Generate Plan component
4-5
Material Planning page - Production DataLink -
Solvers component 3-44
Material Planning Solver 3-4, 3-11, 3-44
calculating low-level codes 3-46
consolidating planned purchase orders 3-45
ignoring safety stock 3-46
including capacity in the plan 3-46
overview 3-11
using fixed periods of supply 3-46
using the net-change mode 3-12
using the regenerative mode 3-12
material reallocation 3-48
material requirements planning 1-2. See also MRP
material stock request demand priority 2-25
material stock request exception details 9-14
material stock request messages
reviewing 9-11
reviewing details 9-12
reviewing exceptions 9-13
selecting 9-11
maximum deviation, description 5-55
maximum rows to retrieve, using 5-34
Message Details page 9-6
Message Search page - External MSR Messages
component 9-11
Message Search page - Inventory Messages
component 9-2
Message Search page - Production Message
component 8-2
Message Search page - Purchasing Message
component 10-2
Message Search page - Sales Order Messages
component 11-2
Message Summary - Message Details page -
Inventory Messages component 9-4
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
I N D E X 6 P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
Message Summary - MSR Details page - External
MSR Messages component 9-12
Message Summary - PO Details page - Purchasing
Messages component 10-4
Message Summary - Production Details page -
Production Messages component 8-5
Message Summary - Sales Order Details page - Sales
Order Messages component 11-3
messages overview process
prerequisites for Inventory 9-1
prerequisites for Order Management 11-1
prerequisites for Production Management 8-2
prerequisites for Purchasing 10-1
Messages Prdn/PO/Transfer report page - Planning
Message component 7-23
model ID, creating 3-28
Modify Resources to Repair option 3-11
MRP approaches to planning 1-2
MRP II process flow example 1-3
N
New Planned Orders row type 5-9
O
objective function 3-20, 3-22
Operation Detail page 8-9
optimization template options 3-54
Optimizer See Iterative Repair Solver
Optimizer/Iterative Repair 3-5, 3-52. See also
Iterative Repair Solver
Optimizer/Iterative Repair Solver 3-24
order management options
establishing 2-3
using 2-6
order modifiers, enforcing 3-31
Order/Operation Details page - Material or Master
Plan Exceptions - Results component 5-41
P
partial-order sourcing 3-24
pegged chains
advantages 3-8
description 3-7
example 3-7
reviewing relationships 3-10
top-level demand 3-8
Pegging Gantt charts 3-10
penalties, changeover 2-9
penalty factor, description 2-15
PeopleSoft Inventory message application
overview of process 9-1
prerequisites 9-1
PeopleSoft Inventory message review
overview of process 9-1
prerequisites 9-1
PeopleSoft Inventory, processing Planning
recommendations 9-1
PeopleSoft Order Management message review
overview of process 11-1
prerequisites 11-1
PeopleSoft Order Management, processing Planning
recommendations 11-1
PeopleSoft Production Management message
application
overview of process 8-1
prerequisites 8-2
PeopleSoft Production Management message review
overview of process 8-1
prerequisites 8-2
PeopleSoft Production Management, processing
Planning recommendations 8-1
PeopleSoft Production Planning
advantages 1-4
analyzing the supply chain model 1-20
collaborating 1-18
consuming inventory 1-14
establishing supply and demand 1-19
integrating material and capacity models 1-13
linking to the enterprise 1-14
maintaining plan data 1-22
managing business processes 1-5
managing capacity plans 6-1. See also capacity
plan
managing master plans 5-1. See also master plan
managing material plans 5-1. See also material
plan
managing shop floors 1-8
moving and balancing the supply chain 1-8
overview 1-1
planning for resources 1-3
reports 12-1
resolving plan constraints 1-17
reviewing plan details 5-33
reviewing plan exceptions 5-36
setting up 2-1
solving factory-specific plans 1-9
supplying inventory 1-14
understanding data flow 1-5
using interactive planning 1-11
using material- and master-planning inquiries
5-2
using plan summaries 5-7
using planning stages 1-5
using production plans 1-10
using reports 1-22
using resources 1-14
using seamless integration 1-6
using the capacity-planning process 1-5
using the master-planning process 1-5
using the material-planning process 1-5
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N D E X 7
using the Planning Scorecard 5-43
using the Production DataLink 1-16
using the system of record 1-15
using workbenches 5-5
working with constraints 1-11
PeopleSoft Production Planning reports
Item Use-up 12-2
Planning 12-2
Planning Data Inconsistency 12-1
Planning Messages 12-2
standard financial reports 12-2
PeopleSoft Production Planning, use
creating reports 7-10
defining general options 2-1
defining manufacturing data 2-8
defining planning attributes 2-10
generating plans 4-1
setting up business units 2-2
setting up the DataLink 3-1
PeopleSoft Purchasing message review
overview of process 10-1
prerequisites 10-1
PeopleSoft Purchasing, processing Planning
recommendations 10-1
period duration settings 5-8, 5-33
period duration, using with detailed resources 6-5
period of supply 3-41
Periods of Supply row type 5-10
plan currency 3-29
plan details, reviewing 5-33
plan exceptions, reviewing 5-36
plan generation
creating a feasible plans 4-8
creating material-feasible plans 4-5
defining global preferences 4-3
generating plans using the LP Solver 4-12
overview 4-1
selecting a solver 3-42
plan summaries, using 5-7
Plan Summary page - Material or Master Plan
Summary 5-32
plan types
master plan 3-29
setting up for DataLink 3-26
simulation plan 3-29
Planned On Hand row type 5-10
planned orders before planning time fence display
5-38
Planned Orders page - Material or Master Plan
Summary component 5-20
Planned Production row type 5-10
Planned Purchase (maintenance) page - Material or
Master Plan Summary component 5-29
Planned Purchases row type 5-10
Planner/Configuration Code page - Material or Master
Plan Planning Scorecard - Forecast Fulfillment
component 5-63
Planner/Configuration Code page - Material or Master
Plan Planning Scorecard - Safety Stock component
5-51
Planner/Configuration Code page - Material or Master
Plan Planning Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates
component 5-66
planning attributes
defining 2-21
defining forecast items 2-5
defining forecast product data 2-6
defining inventory 2-3
defining item attributes by units 2-4
defining Manufacturing data 2-8
defining manufacturing options 2-8
defining master-planning data 2-12
defining order management options 2-6
defining product forecast percentages 2-11
defining promise and request dates 2-14
defining purchasing 2-7
defining resource changeover penalties 2-9
defining resources 2-9
defining Roll Forward phases 2-15
defining transfer 2-4
defining work centers 2-22
maintaining aggregate items 2-10
setting up demand priority families 2-6
setting up roll forward parameters 2-16
setting up Roll Forward phases 2-18
setting up stocking periods 2-6
using aggregate resources 2-10
using detail resources 2-10
Planning Attributes page 2-21
planning constraints 1-11
Planning Data Inconsistency Report 12-1
Planning Data Inconsistency Report page 2-63
Planning Data Inconsistency Report, generating
2-63
Planning Data InconsistencyReport (PLS3000) 12-1
Planning Exceptions page - Inventory Exceptions
component 9-9
Planning message options, identifying 7-3
Planning Message Report page
defining inventory transfer message options 7-23
defining production message options 7-23
defining purchase order message options 7-23
Planning Message Report page - Planning Message
component 7-21
Planning messages application
overview of Inventory process 9-1
overview of Production Management process 8-1
Planning Messages component - Message
Prdn/PO/Transfer report page 7-23
Planning Messages component - Planning Messages
report page 7-21
Planning Messages Report (PLS4001) 7-21, 12-2
Planning messages review
overview of Inventory process 9-1
overview of Order Management process 11-1
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
I N D E X 8 P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
overview of Production Management process 8-1
overview of Purchasing process 10-1
Planning messages, receiving 7-3
planning model 1-5
planning periods display, setting 5-33
Planning recommendations
processing in PeopleSoft Inventory 9-1
processing in PeopleSoft Order Management
11-1
processing in PeopleSoft Production Management
8-1
processing in PeopleSoft Purchasing 10-1
Planning report
defining report options 7-16
generating 7-13
specifying row types 7-17
Planning Report (PLS2001) 12-2
Planning Report component - Criteria report page
7-14
Planning Report component - Criteria2 report page
7-16
Planning Report component - Row Types report page
7-17
Planning reports
creating layouts 7-11
generating supply and demand detail 7-12
understanding simulation and master plan reporting
7-13
Planning reports options 7-10
Planning Scorecard
filtering data 5-66
implementing 5-44
overview 5-43
using 5-43
Planning Scorecard page - Capacity Plan Summary
component 6-14
Planning Scorecard page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard component 5-44
Planning Scorecard, reviewing
aggregate capacity violations 5-59
buildable inventory (BI) violations 5-55
excess stock violations 5-54
forecast fulfillment violations 5-62
promise date violations 5-51
raw material (RM) violations 5-57
request date violations 5-47
safety-stock violations 5-50
transfer shipment date violations 5-64
Planning Server page - Production DataLink
component 3-58
Planning Server page - Receive Planning Messages
component 7-5
Planning server settings, verifying 3-58, 7-5
Planning server template 3-59
PLS2000, Receive Planning Messages 7-3
PLS2001, generating 7-13
PLS3000, Planning Inconsistency Report 2-63
PLS4001 Planning Message Report 7-21
PLS5000, Sourcing Template generation 2-38
PO Exceptions component - Exception Details page
10-7
post processing, LP Solver 3-20
previous master plan 3-30
previous plan, using unprocessed messages 7-9
primary items, description 5-28
priority rank 2-25
priority rules 2-23
defining demand sources 2-25
ranking priority 2-25
Priority Rules page 2-24
product forecast percentages, setting 2-11
production
viewing details 6-10
viewing outputs 6-11
Production DataLink 1-16
components 3-1
connecting Planning servers 3-58
controlling data 3-2
including demand and supply 3-36
model data 3-3
process overview 3-1
setting up 3-1
solvers 3-3
Production Demand row type 5-10
Production Detail page - Production Messages
component 8-7
Production Details page 8-8
Production exception details, reviewing 8-10
Production Exceptions component - Exception Details
page 8-10
Production Message component - Message Search
page 8-2
Production message summary
reviewing 8-5
reviewing details 8-5
reviewing production and operations details 8-7
Production messages
applying 8-12, 8-13
reviewing 8-2
reviewing exceptions 8-10
selecting for review 8-2
viewing details 8-8
Production Messages component - Message Summary
- Production Details page 8-5
Production Messages component - Production Detail
page 8-7
Production Options page - Sourcing Inquiry
component 2-44
Production Orders (maintenance) page - Material or
Master Plan Summary component 5-26
Production Orders page - Capacity Plan Summary
component 6-10
production plan
committing 7-1
creating reports 7-10
production plan constraints, resolving 1-17
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N D E X 9
Production Planning run options, setting 3-42
Production Supply row type 5-10
Projected On Hand row type 5-10
promise dates
defining 2-14
using constraints 5-52
violations 5-51
Promise/Request Dates page 2-14
proportional allocation by unit or time 3-17
purchase fence 3-30, 3-34
Purchase Options page - Sourcing Inquiry component
2-46
Purchase Supply row type 5-10
purchasing attributes, defining 2-7
Purchasing messages
applying 10-8
reviewing 10-2
reviewing exception details 10-7
reviewing exceptions 10-7
reviewing PO details 10-4
selecting for review 10-2
Purchasing Messages component - Message Search
page 10-2
Purchasing Messages component - Message Summary
- PO Details page 10-4
purchasing options, establishing 2-3
Q
quotation demand priority 2-25
R
rate type 3-29
raw material (RM) violations 5-57
Receive Planning Messages component - Planning
Server page 7-5
Receive Planning Messages component - Receiving
Planning Messages page 7-3
Receive Planning Messages page - Receive Planning
Messages component 7-3
receiving and shipping calendars, description 5-31
recycle by-products, description 5-28
regenerate sourcing templates 3-31
relative lateness 3-18
released production fence 3-34
Remove Row Type button 5-13
reports 1-22
Item Use-up 12-2
Planning 12-2
Planning Data Inconsistency 12-1
Planning Messages 12-2
standard financial 12-2
request dates
defining 2-14
using constraints 5-48
violations 5-47
reschedule early limit days, description 2-30
resolving production plan constraints 1-17
resource allocation at start or finish of bucket 3-17
resource attributes, defining 2-9
resource changeover penalties, defining 2-9
Resource Load - Configuration Code page - Capacity
Plan Summary component 6-9
Resource Load - Item/Qty page - Capacity Plan
Summary component 6-8
Resource Load - Operation Details page - Capacity
Plan Summary component 6-6, 6-8
resource load, viewing 6-6
Resource page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Aggregate Capacity component 5-59
resource planning 1-3
Resource Workbench page 6-2
Resource Workbench, defining search parameters
6-2
Resources page - Line Schedule Editor component
2-57
resources, description 2-8
retrieving rows of data, description 5-34
Return button, 5-27
RM (raw material) shortages
using constraints 5-58
violations 5-57
roll forward
defining details 3-34
setting up for DataLink 3-26
Roll Forward Phase page 2-18
Roll Forward phases
defining 2-15
setting up 2-18
Roll Forward utility
defining parameters 2-16
defining phases 2-15
scheduling example 2-16
selecting supply and demand tasks 2-18
setting up planning attributes 2-16
setting up targets 2-20
tasks available for reschedule 2-19
using time fences 2-19
round component demand 3-41
routings, description 2-8
Row Type report page - Planning Report component
7-17
row types
changing 5-12
descriptions 5-9
summaries 5-8
using 5-13
run types
defining the net-change type 3-29
defining the regenerative type 3-28
setting up for DataLink 3-26
P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1
I N D E X 1 0 P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L
S
safety stock
using constraints 5-50
violations 5-50
Safety Stock row type 5-10
safety-stock demand priority 2-25
sales order demand priority 2-25
sales order exceptions
reviewing 11-5
reviewing details 11-5
Sales Order Exceptions component - Exception
Details page 11-5
sales order messages
reviewing 11-2
reviewing summary 11-3
reviewing summary details 11-3
selecting for review 11-2
Sales Order Messages component - Message Search
page 11-2
Sales Order messages component - Message Summary
- Sales Order Details page 11-3
Scheduled Production row type 5-10
Scheduled Purchases row type 5-10
scheduled receipts before current time display 5-38
Scheduled Receipts page - Material or Master Plan
Summary component 5-13
Scheduled Receipts row type 5-10
Scheduled Transfers row type 5-11
seamless integration 1-6
Search button 5-32
search depth 3-32
Selection Criteria page - Material or Master Plan
Exceptions component 5-37
server configuration settings 5-11
Server Configuration Settings page - Material or
Master Plan Summary component 5-11
shipment task fence 3-34
shipping and receiving calendars, description 5-31
solvers
descriptions 3-4
example 3-9
Feasible Planning 3-4
Feasible Planning Solver overview 3-12
improving plan quality 3-19
Iterative Repair Solver overview 3-24
Iterative Repair/Optimizer 3-5
LP (Linear Programming) Solver overview 3-20
Material Planning 3-4
Material Planning Solver overview 3-11
net-change mode 3-12
pegged-chain processing 3-7
processing sourcing templates 2-28, 2-30
processing steps 3-8
regenerative mode 3-12
running 4-3
selecting for plan generation 3-42
setting DataLink run options 3-42
using time fences 3-5
using with the Production DataLink 3-3
source file data, setting up 3-55
Sourcing Details page 2-29
sourcing inquiry selection criteria, defining 2-41
sourcing options
loading 2-34
using production options 2-27
using purchase options 2-28
using transfer options 2-27
verifying 2-41
Sourcing Template Inquiry page 2-42
Sourcing Template Load button 2-31
sourcing template, viewing details 2-42
sourcing templates
defining 2-29
generating 2-38
generation options 2-28
maintaining manually 2-30
overview 2-27
processing data using solvers 2-28
rescheduling early limit days 2-30
search depth 2-30
setting up 2-28
viewing production option details 2-44
viewing purchase option details 2-46
viewing transfer option details 2-47
Sourcing Templates page 2-38
spreadsheets 3-10
stages of planning 1-5
start fence 3-30
start of time 3-5
Starting On Hand row type 5-11
start-of-time purge 3-31
stocking periods, setting up 2-6
substitute item options 3-41
supply
defining for DataLink 3-40
setting options 3-40
supply and demand data input example 1-4
supply and demand planning 1-19
supply chain
analyzing 1-20
balancing 1-8
moving 1-8
planning for material requirements 1-2
planning for resources 1-2
Supply Chain Viewer 1-21
supply options, setting for DataLink 3-40
Supply page - Production DataLink - Demand/Supply
component 3-40
system of record 1-15
T
Target Inventory Level row type 5-11
J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 P R O D U C T I O N P L A N N I N G P E O P L E B O O K
P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N D E X 1 1
Task page - Material or Master Plan Detail component
5-36
task property sheets 3-10
task, description 1-10
teardowns, description 5-28
time fences
setting 3-27
setting up for DataLink 3-26
time fences used by solvers 3-5
time period for detailed LSE, setting up 2-55
Time Periods (aggregate) page - Line Schedule Editor
- General component 2-56
Time Periods (detail) page - Line Schedule Editor -
General component 2-55
top-level demand 3-8
Total Demand row type 5-11
Total Forecast row type 5-11
Total Orders row type 5-11
total scorecard count 5-45
total scorecard score 5-45
Total Supply row type 5-11
traditional material requirements planning vs.
PeopleSoft Production Planning advanced planning
1-8
traditional material requirements planning, description
1-2
transfer attributes, defining 2-4
transfer demand fence 3-34
transfer demand priority 2-25
Transfer Demand row type 5-11
Transfer Details page - Material or Master Plan
Planning Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates component
5-64
transfer option, description 5-26
Transfer Options page - Sourcing Inquiry component
2-47
Transfer Orders (maintenance) page - Material or
Master Plan Summary component 5-30
transfer shipment dates
using constraints 5-64
violations 5-64
transfer supply fence 3-34
Transfer Supply row type 5-11
Transfer Task page - Material or Master Plan Planning
Scorecard - Transfer Ship Dates component 5-65
Type/Item page - Material or Master Plan Summary -
Show Demand component 5-18
Type/Item page - Material or Master Plan Summary -
Show Supply component 5-15
U
Unfulfilled Demand Inquiry 3-11
unprocessed messages 7-9
Update Production Options button 2-31
Update Purchasing Options button 2-31
Update Transfer Options button 2-31
user options, establishing 2-1
V
View Outputs button 5-27
View Outputs page - Capacity Plan Summary
component 6-11
View Outputs page - Material or Master Plan
Summary component 5-27
W
waste by-products, description 5-28
Web-based planning 1-7
weighted priority computation 3-18
WIP (work in progress) details, defining 3-34
WIP/Roll Forward Details page - Production DataLink
- General component 3-34
Work Center Attributes page 2-22
work center attributes, defining 2-22
work center, description 2-8
Workbench Link button 5-40
workbenches, using 5-5